Inventors list

Assignees list

Classification tree browser

Top 100 Inventors

Top 100 Assignees


COMPUTER-TO-COMPUTER SESSION/CONNECTION ESTABLISHING

Subclass of:

709 - Electrical computers and digital processing systems: multicomputer data transferring

Patent class list (only not empty are listed)

Deeper subclasses:

Class / Patent application numberDescriptionNumber of patent applications / Date published
709228000 Session/connection parameter setting 730
709229000 Network resources access controlling 330
Entries
DocumentTitleDate
20110179183NETWORK ADAPTER WITH TCP SUPPORT - A network adapter and corresponding method for its use are disclosed. The network adapter has an operational mode that allows a host CPU to offload transmission of a block of data to the adapter. The adapter segments the block into fragments, and builds a data packet for each fragment. The adapter transmits these packets with an adapter-implemented flow control. This flow control uses: a context engine that tracks flow control variables for a “context” established for the block; a context memory for storing the variables; and a receive filter that updates flow control information for the block based on ACK packets received from the remote endpoint receiving the data packets. Because the network adapter implements flow control for data blocks that the network adapter segments, intermediate ACK packets corresponding to that block can be intercepted by the adapter, before they pass to the host, conserving host resources. An added advantage is that the host CPU can offload data blocks larger than the remote endpoint's receive window size, since the adapter can follow the transmit window and transmit packets at appropriate intervals. This further decreases load on the host CPU, decreases latency, and improves bandwidth utilization.07-21-2011
20110208867Performing Message Payload Processing Functions In A Network Element On Behalf Of An Application - A method is disclosed for performing message payload processing functions in a network element on behalf of an application. According to one aspect, a network element intercepts data packets comprising network layer or transport layer headers having an address of a destination which destination differs from the network element. The network element determines whether information contained in layer 08-25-2011
20120173739FORMAT NEGOTIATION FOR MEDIA REMOTING SCENARIOS - Format negotiation for media remoting involves at least one media data format. In an example embodiment, a media format negotiation for playing media data is begun between a server and a client. The media data format is transferred from the server to the client. A notification that indicates if an attempt at the client to construct a media topology responsive to the media data format was a success or a failure is transferred from the client to the server. Whether and/or how the media data is to be transferred from the server to the client may be impacted by the notification.07-05-2012
20100088418EDGE TRAVERSAL SERVICE DORMANCY - A system maintains a dormant state in the host, in which no beacons (or “bubbles”) are transmitted from the host when no application or service (collectively, “processes”) of the host is accepting unsolicited traffic via the edge traversal service. When at least one application or service begins to accept unsolicited traffic via the edge traversal service, the host enters a qualified state and begins transmitting the beacons. As each additional application or service begins to accept such traffic, the number of accepting applications and services is maintained. As applications and services terminate acceptance of such traffic, the number of accepting applications and services is decremented. When the last application or service terminates acceptance of unsolicited traffic via the edge traversal service, the host re-enters the dormant state and ceases transmission of its beacons.04-08-2010
20100088417STORAGE MEDIUM, UNIQUENESS ASSURANCE REALIZING METHOD, SESSION MANAGEMENT METHOD AND UNIQUENESS ASSURANCE INFORMATION SETTING MANAGEMENT DEVICE - One system distributes a request for providing a service using a first communication protocol, from a terminal device to a server selected from among a plurality of servers by a server load balancer in response to the request. A corresponding relation between identification information for identifying a session generated in a distributed server and the server that has generated the session corresponding to the identification information is set in the server load balancer by the service of a second communication protocol as uniqueness assurance information for uniqueness assurance. Thus, when the provision of a service is requested using a second communication protocol by the terminal device, the server load balancer refers to the set uniqueness assurance information and selects the server for providing the service from among the plurality of servers.04-08-2010
20110191479SYSTEM FOR RAPIDLY ESTABLISHING HUMAN/MACHINE COMMUNICATION LINKS BY MAINTAINING SIMULTANEOUS AWARENESS OF MULTIPLE CALL-HOST ENDPOINT-STATES - A method and system are provided that enhance human/machine communication so as to more closely approximate natural human/human communication by more effectively establishing communications links for human-interactive media. Specifically, the speed and quality of the connection are improved by the method and system, resulting in a more natural user experience. The method includes a communication system receiving a call request from a requestor. The communication system has a Connection Proxy (CP) and a plurality of Endpoints (EPs). The CP has an endpoint state table (EST) configured to store state information associated with each of the plurality of endpoints (EPs). Based on the call request, the CP selects an EP using the EST. If the selected EP accepts the requested communications link, the CP establishes a communications link that excludes the CP itself. The CP also updates the EST based on a response to the call request from the selected EP.08-04-2011
20090193125SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA VIA DATA NETWORKS WITH DATA CONVERSION BY A COM AUTOMATIC MARSHALLER - A system and a method of transmitting data via data networks. A bidirectional data connection is created even behind firewalls, including from a client not visible to a server in the Internet. In the method and system, a first connection request for establishing a first transmission channel is sent to a server of an automation system from a first data processing device of a client via a data connection. This request is answered by the server via a second transmission channel. The data connection is kept permanently open, thereby allowing mutually time-independent bidirectional sending and receiving of data between the client and the server, via at least one data network. A COM automatic marshaller which incorporates itself into the communications chain between the client and the server is provided.07-30-2009
20090193124Methods, Portable Electronic Devices, Systems and Computer Program Products for Automatically Creating Social Networking Services (SNS) - Methods, portable electronic devices, systems and computer program products are provided for automatically creating a social networking service (SNS) session. The methods include generating at and transmitting from a first device a first audio and/or video fingerprint of an audio and/or video event. The first audio and/or video fingerprint has a first predetermined length (T). A second audio and/or video fingerprint is periodically transmitted to a server from the first device. The second audio and/or video fingerprint has a second predetermined length (t), smaller than the first predetermined length (T), and includes data associated with the audio and/or video event that is later in time than data included in the first audio and/or video fingerprint. The first device is joined to an SNS session, automatically created by the server, responsive to receipts at the server, of a third audio and/or video fingerprint having the first predetermined length (T) from a second device that includes a portion of the first audio and/or video fingerprint or the second audio and/or video fingerprint periodically transmitted from the first device.07-30-2009
20090193123SYSTEM AND METHOD OF USING CONVERSATIONAL AGENT TO COLLECT INFORMATION AND TRIGGER ACTIONS - A system of using a conversational agent to collect information and trigger actions, in one example embodiment, comprises a user interface to selectively receive user credentials to obtain access to a computer-implemented marketplace, an information exchange module to establish an information exchange between the user and a conversational agent based on the user profile, where the conversational agent is a computer program designed to simulate an intelligent conversation. The system may further include a communication module to communicate with the user to receive information related to a marketplace offering; and a listing module to list the marketplace offering at the computer-implemented marketplace based on the information received.07-30-2009
20110196970REDIRECTION COMMUNICATION - A method and system of communicating data to or from a remote computer. The remote computer is accessed by a CPU as though it were a local IDE controller attached to a local IDE device. A peripheral device distinct from the CPU provides a set of virtual IDE device registers and an IDE controller to the central processing unit. The peripheral device receives data written to the set of virtual IDE device registers, and transmits the data into a network, addressed for reception by the remote computer. The remote computer receives the data, interprets it, and performs operations upon a mirror set of device data. The remote computer then responds, and transmits its response across the network to the peripheral device. The peripheral device communicates the response to the CPU in a fashion identical to an physical IDE controller attached to a physical IDE device.08-11-2011
20110196969IN-VEHICLE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH SOCIAL NETWORKING - Generally described, aspects of the disclosed subject matter are directed to managing communications from a mobile device. In accordance with one embodiment, a method for establishing a communication session with a contact is provided. The method includes causing information about at least one contact associated with the user to be displayed on the mobile device and receiving input to initiate a communication session with the contact. Then, if the identified contact is associated with a CB radio, a CB based communication session is established in which audio is transmitted and received from the mobile device using a CB radio communication unit. On the other hand, if the identified contact is associated with a remote device capable of performing data-based communications, a data-based communication session is established and which data is transmitted and received in accordance with IP-based protocols.08-11-2011
20130031259Method of Discovering Operator-Provided Network Services Using IMS - A method, session managing node and arrangement for providing a network service address of at least one network service of a first operator IMS network to a third party service provider (3PSP) are disclosed, wherein the 3PSP has no business agreement with the first operator. A first application of a mobile station communicates with a second application via a first network, resulting in the setup of an IMS session between the mobile station and the 3PSP. A network service address of at least one network service, provided by the first operator IMS network, is inserted into a SIP message of the IMS session in a session managing node of the first operator IMS network and delivered to the 3PSP, where it is forwarded to the second application. If required, the second application may access the one or more network services via the first network, using the retrieved network address.01-31-2013
20130031258NETWORK CONNECTION DEVICE AND METHOD - A network connection device includes: one or more network devices; a network switching control section configured to determine a second network as a candidate network to which connection is subsequently switched from a first network to which a network device is currently connecting; a network relation state determination section configured to determine whether or not the network device is used for forming a PAN; a disconnection-caused disadvantage determination section configured to determine whether or not a disadvantage to a user will be caused by switching connection to the second network, based on the result of the determination by the network relation state determination section; and a switching acceptability determination section configured to prohibit switching connection to the second network when the result of the determination is that a disadvantage to the user will be caused.01-31-2013
20130031257Secure XDM Communication Between IMS Networks - Requests between first and second IMS network domains are communicated by receiving an XDM request in the first domain. The XDM request relates to an XML document that can be accessed via the XDM request from a location in the second domain. A SIP request is created that includes information identifying it as a request that relates to an XDM request. The SIP request is sent to the second domain so that the SIP request can be routed to the location in the second domain based on the identifying information in the SIP request. A connection for XDM requests between the first and second domains is established.01-31-2013
20130031256Method And Apparatus For Reliable Session Migration - Various embodiments provide a reliable session migration method and apparatus without requiring additional option headers to each packet or inducing transmission delay. This is achieved by utilizing aggregated checksums that facilitate session migration upon a migration event. Advantageously, some such embodiments may permit applications to continue when the endpoint device physically moves from one access network. Similarly, some such embodiments may allow dynamic migration access networks based on load, pricing or other factors. Moreover, some such embodiments may permit traffic to be split along multiple paths so as to increase the aggregate throughput.01-31-2013
20130212287Method and Apparatus for Controlling Sessions From One or More Devices - An apparatus and mechanism to manage multi-modal real-time or quasi real-time sessions such as voice, video, instant messaging, or web-conferencing across multiple devices through a simple subscription to a session management service. A user can subscribe to the service from many devices (e.g. mobile device, desk phone, personal computer, internet appliance, internet TV, communication terminal, etc.) and through the service seamlessly move sessions back and forth between subscribed devices. In a preferred embodiment, a user utilizes a “virtual slider” in a simple “two touch” procedure to effectuate the movement of a communication session from one device to another device via the service.08-15-2013
20130212286COMMUNICATION SESSION CLONING USING BARCODES - Method to clone a communication session from a first device to a second device, including: receiving a request to identify the communication session; rendering an information message comprising an identification of the communication session, wherein the information message is configured to be transmitted from the first device; acquiring the information message from the second device to clone the communication session onto the second device; bridging the second device to the communication session without dropping the first device from the communication session, to produce a cloned communication session; and sending a confirmation message, wherein no prior association between the first device and the second device is used during the cloning.08-15-2013
20110202666SESSION ESTABLISHMENT IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for establishing a communication session in an IMS Centralized Services communication network. A Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server (SCC AS) receives a request from an originating device to establish a session with a target device. The request includes a plurality of codec identifiers that could be used by the originating device. The SCC AS sends a second request to establish the session to the target device. The SCC AS subsequently receives, from an intermediate node between the SCC AS and the target device, an invite message. The invite message includes an indication that a codec identifier has been selected from the plurality of codec identifiers. The SCC AS then sends a message to the intermediate node instructing the intermediate node to establish the session.08-18-2011
20110202665Establishing Unique Sessions for DNS Subscribers - A system establishes virtual DNS servers that are supported by a DNS server. Target IP addresses are assigned for the virtual DNS servers. Network capable devices are uniquely assigned to the virtual DNS servers for domain name resolution. Each network capable device accesses the communication network through a corresponding network device associated with a corresponding source IP address. A client's service plan is assigned to a first network capable device used by the client. The service plan is implemented through a DNS request under a session established between the first network capable device and its assigned first virtual DNS server. The session is uniquely identified by a first source IP address of a first network device used by the first network capable device to access the communication network and a first target IP address of the first virtual DNS server.08-18-2011
20110202663Method and Apparatus for Mobility Agent Recovery - Techniques for recovering Mobile Internet Protocol (IP) session(s) of a mobility agent in a Mobile IP network are described herein. In one embodiment of the invention, for each mobility session associated with a mobility agent, the mobility agent distributively backs up mobility agent specific information to the mobility agent peer associated with that mobility session. The mobility agent specific information is not used by the mobility agent peer. Upon the mobility agent inadvertently losing at least one mobility session, the mobility agent recovers the stored mobility agent specific information associated with those sessions from the mobility agent peers respectively associated with those sessions. Other methods and apparatuses are also described.08-18-2011
20110202662NETWORK NODE FOR AN AD-HOC NETWORK AND PROCESS FOR PROVIDING APPLICATION SERVICES IN AN AD-HOC NETWORK - A network node for an ad-hoc network having a plurality of network nodes of the same type, which provide one another with application services via wireless connections. The network node is configured to generate a list of all application services provided to it by other network nodes with associated quality classes and makes the list available to other network nodes as a list of the application services provided by it with such quality classes. At least one of the quality classes is dependent on movement vectors of at least one wireless connection, via which the respective application service is provided. The invention also relates to a method for providing application services in an ad-hoc network.08-18-2011
20110202661SESSION-BASED TELECOMMUNICATIONS - A method for establishing bi-directional and session-based communication between IMS and GSM subscribers with the purpose of sending text information by using the SIP protocol and USSD services. The method defines an IP-USSD gateway that converts messages between the SIP and USSD protocols before relaying them. The communication session can be initiated by either party; the GSM subscriber or the IMS subscriber. A message, which an SIP client has sent, is thereby converted into a USSD message and conveyed to the GSM subscriber. Thus, the GSM subscriber can read the USSD message sent to the mobile phone, and in addition can see the name and surname of the sender and write an answer. Similarly, the SIP subscriber can read the message received and write an answer.08-18-2011
20110202660DIVERSE SOURCE MESSAGE ASSOCIATION - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node and machine-readable storage medium including a policy and charging rules node (PCRN) receiving a plurality of related service requests from different devices. The PCRN may proceed to generate a policy and charging control (PCC) rule based on at least one service request and other information stored in the PCRN if a mate service request does not arrive during the duration of a waiting timer. If the mate service request arrives subsequent to the expiry of the waiting timer, the PCRN may then generate a subsequent PCC rule to replace the previously generated rule, with the new PCC rule incorporating information from both of the mate service requests.08-18-2011
20120246327METHOD AND DEVICE FOR NETWORK ACCESS - Embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of communication technologies, and disclose a method and device for network access. The method includes: detecting whether a notification message reported by an x digital subscriber line module is received within a set time, wherein the notification message is used for indicating that the x digital subscriber line module is connected to a network successfully; if yes, establishing a connection between a service terminal and the x digital subscriber line module so that the service terminal accesses the network through the x digital subscriber line module; and if no, establishing a connection between the service terminal and a 3G data card module so that the service terminal accesses the network through the 3G data card module.09-27-2012
20120246326MECHANISM TO CONVEY DYNAMIC CHARGING INFORMATION OVER SIP - A system and method of providing charging information to the participants for a session is disclosed. User A initiates a session to user B, by sending an invitation message. The message contains an application body. A first method talks about basic charging framework involving network level manipulation and second method being an offer answer model for charging. In network level manipulation, the user A sends an invitation message to proxy server which modifies the application body of the message before sending the message to user B. In offer answer model for charging, user A initiates an offer for charging, which is sent to user B and means of negotiation is involved between both. Means of negotiation allows implementing different charging schemes, and User B or User B's network can also initiate the charging offer.09-27-2012
20100077086METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDLING CONNECTION SETUP IN A NETWORK - Certain embodiments of a method and system for handling connection setup in a network may comprise a network interface hardware device (NIHW) that may be operable to receive a services list and/or connection acceptance criteria from a first guest operating system running on a host system, receive a connection request from a second guest operating system running on the host system, and determine whether to allow establishment of the requested connection based on one or both of the services list and the connection acceptance criteria. The determination may be made prior to or during connection set up. The NIHW may maintain a connection state comprising information regarding set up of the requested connection. The services list may comprises one or more of a local network address, a local transport address, a network protocol, and a transport protocol. The communicated acceptance criteria may comprises packet filtering operations and/or security operations.03-25-2010
20100077085Systems and method for configuring display resolution in a terminal server environment - Methods, apparatus, systems and computer program product for configuring display resolution in a terminal server environment. A host system can receive a request for a graphical session, wherein the request identifies a non-standard resolution and the host system generates display initialization information for the non-standard resolution prior to transmitting graphic information to the remote client. The host system can configure a virtual monitor in the non-standard resolution, retain the display initialization information for the non-standard resolution, and can pre-render future graphical sessions in that resolution. Additionally, the host system can maintain a graphical session during a period of inactivity without terminating and, upon reconnection of the remote client, determine if the session should be maintained in the original display resolution or configured for a new resolution.03-25-2010
20100077084PROCESSING SIP MESSAGES BASED ON MULTIPLE CORES - A method and an apparatus of processing Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) messages based on multiple cores. The method comprises: pre-parsing a received SIP message to obtain an identifier of the SIP message; dispatching SIP messages with the same identifier to the same core; and processing, on each core, SIP messages dispatched to the core by using related dedicated resources. The present invention relieves the resource contention and thus improves the utilization efficiency of computing resources of cores.03-25-2010
20100077083COORDINATING DATA DELIVERY USING TIME SUGGESTIONS - Coordinating delivery of data to a first computing device from a plurality of second computing devices based on known power times for a resource associated with the first computing device. One of the second computing devices requests a time interval for data delivery. The first computing device compares the requested time interval to the known power times to determine a delivery time. For example, the requested time interval is compared against activation times for recurrent schedules that use the resource, and against previously determined delivery times. The second computing device delivers data at the determined delivery time to preserve the resource. In some embodiments, the delivery time is adjusted for processing delays and network latency.03-25-2010
20100077082Method of Operating A Contact Center - Some known Contact Centers rely on a Network Level Router to determine which of a number of available Contact Centers should deal with a given contact. This decision is made by the NLR based on real time information provided by the Contact Centers. However, the format of such information is proprietary which means that the NLR must translate and collate this information. This invention seeks to use session initiation protocol (SIP) Presence for such information transfer which enables improved decision making and further enables additional functionality to be added to the Contact Center system. The invention provides a SIP enabled Contact Center (03-25-2010
20100115106MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK SUBSCRIBER INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, SUBSCRIBER INFORMATION MANAGEMENT METHOD, COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A session control method for a mobile communication system including a session control device for executing the control of sessions according to instructions from an application server, includes managing a group of plurality of communication terminals owned by same user and types of sessions processable by each of the communication terminals constituting the group. When a session establishment request is executed to any one of the plurality of communication terminals constituting the group, any one from the plurality of communication terminals comprising the group may be selected depending on type of session requested to be established, and the session connection to the selected communication terminal is executed. The constitution of the communication terminals of the group can be changed according to request from the communication terminals. The types of sessions processable by each of the communication terminals constituting the group can be changed according to request from the communication terminals.05-06-2010
20130080645METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING REAL-TIME COMMUNICATIONS SERVICES - The present invention provides a method and a system for providing at least one communications service to one or more service providers by a communications service provider. Communications capabilities of the communications service provider are sliced into a plurality of virtual slices and each of the plurality of virtual slices is configured for a different service provider from among the one or more service providers. At least one communications service is provided to each of the one or more service providers through a respective configured virtual slice by the communications service provider. Each of the one or more service providers further provides the communications service to a user through the respective configured virtual slice in collaboration with the communications service provider.03-28-2013
20130080644INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, SERVER DEVICE, DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM STORING DATA COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - An example mobile terminal is a terminal for transmitting and receiving data to and from a server device via an access point by wireless communication. The mobile terminal includes an identification information storage unit configured to store a terminal ID, a signal receiver configured to receive a broadcast signal containing a plurality of terminal IDs transmitted from the server device via the access point, an ID determiner configured to determine whether or not any of the terminal IDs contained in the received signal corresponds to the terminal ID of this mobile terminal, a connection requester configured to, when the ID determiner determines that one of the terminal IDs corresponds to the terminal ID of this mobile terminal, request a wireless connection to the access point, and a data communicator configured to transmit or receive data to or from the server device via the access point by wireless communication.03-28-2013
20130036230SOCIAL NETWORK CONNECTIONS - The present invention relates to methods and apparatus for maintaining network connections. One or more new communication events for a first user are identified and a social graph builder receives data relating to the one or more new communication events wherein the data includes data relating to a second user. The social graph builder modifies a social network graph for the first user based on the received data if the identified one or more new communication events fulfills one or more predefined criteria.02-07-2013
20130036229METHOD OF MANAGING CONNECTION BETWEEN PERSONAL NETWORK AND CPNS SERVICE IN CPNS SYSTEM - A method of managing a connection between a Personal Network (PN) and a Converged Personal Network Service (CPNS) server by a first device in a CPNS system including the personal network configured between the first device and a second device including at least one of a Personal Network Entity (PNE) and a Personal Network GateWay (PNGW) and the CPNS server connected with the personal network through a first communication network is provided. The method includes identifying the second device including the PNGW by using device mode information indicating whether the second device included in a PN inventory includes the PNE and the PNGW; requesting a connection between the CPNS server and the second device through the first communication network; and terminating the connection to the CPNS server according to the connection between the CPNS server and the second device through the first communication network.02-07-2013
20130036228COMMUNICATION DEVICE, METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION AND RELAY SYSTEM - A communication device is configured to relay a signal between a first device to perform as a connection start terminal and a second device to perform as a connection end device, the communication device including: a processor configured to execute a procedure, the procedure including: establishing, with the second device, sessions meaning logical connections in communication; deciding whether an unused session remains in the established sessions for a command to be transferred to the second device, the command being generated by the first device; in a case of identifying that the unused session remains in the established sessions when the command is received, exchanging the command with the second device by using the unused session; and communicating messages to the second device by using the established sessions within a particular period of time of the second device, the established sessions being continuously maintained in the particular period of time.02-07-2013
20130042011COMMUNICATION NODES AND NETWORK NODES - Disclosed is a technique for reducing the number of event report messages sent from many communication nodes (MTC devices). Upon detecting an event (smoke detection by a smoke sensor), an MTC device A 02-14-2013
20130042010ACCESS ESTABLISHMENT TO LOCALLY CONNECTABLE DEVICE - In a non-limiting and exemplary embodiment, a method is provided for arranging access to locally connectable devices. A target direction is estimated on the basis of a user input. A communication device residing substantially at the target direction is defined. Before or after the identification of the communication device, access information associated with the communications device is received without establishing a connection to the communication device and without any information of earlier connection to the communication device. The device at target direction communication device and/or a service is connected on the basis of the access information associated with the identified communication device.02-14-2013
20100042729System for automated device-to-device transfer system - A session transfer module of a session server provides the capability to a user to direct a transfer of an on-going session from one device to another device while maintaining the session. The session transfer module is invoked by a user in a way consistent with the user interface of the client application, including by a graphical user command, a command line prompt, or a voice command. The client provides a selection of possible devices that may receive the redirected session. The session transfer module receives the selected device with the session redirect command over a communication network. The communication network may be wired (e.g., public switched telephone network (“PSTN”), Internet, etc.,) a wireless network (e.g., digital telephone network, pager network, etc.,) or a combination of the wired and wireless networks. The session transfer module may be configured to discontinue the session with the current device and to block any subsequent messages of the transferring session from reaching the device. The session transfer module may be further configured to access a device profile from a device profile database to convert the blocked messages into a format compatible to the format and/or modality of the redirected device. The session transfer module may be further configured to push the session to the redirected device in response to an activation (e.g., log-on) of the redirected device by the user. Alternatively, the session transfer module may be further configured to push the session back to the device in response to a time-out in the activation of the redirected device.02-18-2010
20090157883Messaging Proxy System - A messaging proxy system is disclosed for the purpose of delivering data in the form of a portable message format from a producer running on a mobile or non-mobile computer, over any wireless network, by passing this data through an intermediary proxy computer program, to one or more recipients running on mobile or non-mobile computers. The system includes a message proxy computer program with at least one pluggable transport protocol adapter. The proxy contains a command subsystem for sending and receiving command- and message-tokens to and from the mobile clients. The system further includes a thin messaging middleware client to run on mobile devices. The thin messaging middleware client includes at least one pluggable protocol adapter. The client also comprises a command subsystem for sending and receiving command- and message-tokens to and from the proxy. The proxy also contains a communication subsystem for sending and receiving messages via a state of the art message oriented middleware.06-18-2009
20090157882NETWORK CONNECTION FAILOVER DURING APPLICATION SERVICE INTERRUPTION - A system, method and computer program product for implementing network connection failover during application service interruption. While the application is quiesced, a network socket that terminates a network connection to a network peer is maintained on behalf of the application. The socket's network connection state information is sustained by providing acknowledgements of incoming network traffic to the network peer that prevent the peer from terminating the connection. Upon restart, the application is brought up with a blocked socket. The state of the blocked socket is conformed to a current network connection state of the original socket and the blocked socket is unblocked.06-18-2009
20100332663PLUG-AND-SHOW USB PORTABLE DISK - A plug-and-show USB portable disk, applied to a wireless presentation system including a computer, a wireless gateway wireless networking with the computer and a display apparatus connected with the wireless gateway, includes an image capturing and analyzing program and a plug-and-show program. The computer, further having a screen and a USB transmission port, is to transmit at least a presentation frame data to the screen for displaying respective presentation frame image. The image capturing and analyzing program is to capture and analyze the presentation frame data transmitted from the computer to the wireless gateway and to generate and forward an analysis result of the presentation frame data to the wireless gateway through the computer. The plug-and-show program is to control the computer to execute the image capturing and analyzing program as the USB portable disk engages with the USB transmission port.12-30-2010
20100106841Handling Proxy Requests in a Computing System - Systems, methods, and computer-program products receive a communication request, identify the communication request as a proxy request, generate a fake SID for the communication request, and transmit the proxy request using the generated fake SID.04-29-2010
20090164640MULTIMEDIA PERSONAL ASSISTANT - A system receives, when a multimedia component is operating in a first identity, a first communication request from a first user. The first communication request includes a voice session establishment request or a video session establishment request. The system provides, in response to receiving the first communication request, first multimedia content to the first user based on the first identity and an identifier associated with the first user. The system further receives, when the multimedia component is operating in the first identity, a second communication request from a second, different user. The second communication request includes a voice session establishment request or a video session establishment request. The system provides, in response to receiving the second communication request, second, different multimedia content to the second, different user based on the first identity and an identifier associated with the second, different user.06-25-2009
20090125629METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSPARENT NEGOTIATIONS - In one embodiment, the present invention is a method and apparatus for transparent TCP negotiations. In one embodiment, endpoint machines (e.g., clients and servers) negotiate network characteristics through use of TCP header fields, which provide backward capability. Negotiations may be requested or initiated by either endpoint, and if the receiving endpoint is not capable of negotiating, the existing TCP connection will continue to operate as normal.05-14-2009
20090125628Service subscription associated with real time composition of services - Real-time service composition is provided by a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) transport binding for Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) messages. A SOAPAction header and SOAP envelope can be included in a SIP message to identify a requested service. The SIP message recipient can parse out the SOAP envelope and forward same to a corresponding Web Service. An intermediary node, including a SIP Proxy, can evaluate incoming SIP/SOAP messages and provide requested services to which they have access. Service discovery and subscription are facilitated by adding Universal Description, Discovery and Integration (UDDI) services requests and responses.05-14-2009
20090125627HIGHLY SCALABLE NETWORK ENVIRONMENT FOR MANAGING REMOTE DEVICES - A highly scalable primary server is provided to serve an increasing number of users and remote devices. Instead of communicating with a primary server using an expensive communication protocol, a remote device communicates with a secondary server using a less expensive protocol to determine whether the primary server desires to communicate control instructions to the remote device. When the primary server has a request to control the remote device, the primary server creates a table entry to the secondary server to notify the remote device of a request to communicate. Upon polling the secondary server and learning of the created table entry, the remote device establishes a communication connection with the primary server to receive the instructions for controlling the remote device. In this manner, the demand for resources needed for communication with the primary server is significantly reduced.05-14-2009
20090125626Method and system for processing a control message in an Internet protocol-based mobile communication system supporting a multimedia service - A method and system for processing a message in an Internet protocol-based mobile communication system supporting a multimedia service. In the system, application servers include a representative application server and multiple backend application servers. A method for defining a control message between application servers to set up a session using the standard Internet protocol is provided. When an application server performs a call processing operation, control message processing load and control message transmission delay is reduced.05-14-2009
20090119405Combining UNIX commands with uniform resource locators - A computer command processor to prepare a data processing pipeline where an output of a first process is provided as an input of a second process, wherein the first process and the second process execute at different computer systems. Systems (and the processes that are to occur there) are identified by Uniform Resource Locators (“URLs”).05-07-2009
20110004690Method of Forwarding Messages Over a Network and System for Implementing the Method - The present invention relates to a method of forwarding messages over a network. The message forwarding method is implemented in a router (01-06-2011
20090327496REMOTE ACCESS BETWEEN UPnP DEVICES - A method is provided for allowing Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) technology to be used over the Internet or other wide area communications networks. In one illustrative example, a first UPnP-enabled device is to provide a UPnP service such as streaming media to various users over the Internet. The first UPnP-enabled device provides an on-line identity provider such as Windows Live or the like with user IDs of those users who are authorized to access the first UPnP-enabled device from a remote location. When a user wishes to receive the UPnP service from the first UPnP-enabled device, the user logs in to the on-line identity provider using his user ID and receives from the on-line provider an IP address associated with the first UPnP-enabled device. The user's media player or other application constructs a URL from the IP address and contacts the UPnP-enabled device at that URL. The UPnP-enabled device provides the user with a list of media libraries that are available on it. Finally, the user's media player can invoke the desired UPnP service using content or other information available from the media libraries.12-31-2009
20090319670Method and system for maintaining connections between a terminal and servers in a communication system - A method and system for maintaining connections between a terminal and a plurality of servers in a stand-by state in which the terminal is connected to the servers. The terminal generates timers for maintaining the connections to the servers. The terminal determines whether a timer expires. When the timer expires, the terminal simultaneously sends packets for connection maintenance notifications to all the servers having communication connections to the terminal.12-24-2009
20090113057Proximity Routing For Session Based Applications Using Anycast - Certain exemplary embodiments can comprise a method, which can comprise automatically providing content to an information device from a content distribution node of a plurality of content distribution nodes. The information device can be adapted to send a request for the content from the first content distribution node utilizing an Internet Protocol (IP) address of the content distribution node.04-30-2009
20120191863PRIVATE MULTIMEDIA CONTENTS BROADCASTING EQUIPMENT WHICH USES ISM RADIO FREQUENCY BAND OR U-NII 5GHz RADIO FREQUENCY BAND, PRIVATE MULTIMEDIA CONTENTS BROADCASTING SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - An individual multimedia contents broadcasting equipment is disclosed, which includes an individual broadcast process unit which provides a private IP through a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) to a receiving terminal, which requests a connection, and makes a connection of the receiving terminal through a radio network, and transmits a broadcast content to the connected receiving terminal; and a radio communication unit which forms a radio network and communicates data with the connected receiving terminal through the radio network.07-26-2012
20120191862Content Pre-fetching and CDN Assist Methods in a Wireless Mobile Network - The current invention is applicable to a RAN-cache or proxy operating in a wireless mobile network that is functioning as a transparent inline device intercepting wireless mobile protocols such as UMTS, LTE, WIMAX, CDMA etc.), or a traffic off-load device connected to multiple interfaces towards the Core/Internet. The current invention identifies methods for pre-fetching content by emulating portions of a mobile client for gaining connectivity through the mobile-core network, or to use session contexts of other mobile clients in a way not to significantly effect charging and billing for the preloaded content. The pre-load decision of what to pre-load and when to pre-load may be locally derived within the RAN-cache/Proxy device, or in-coordination with a locally connected CDN (Content Delivery Network) device. Other embodiments of the current invention include the RAN-cache/Proxy providing interconnectivity from the locally connected CDN device to other CDN devices through the Mobile Core Network (SGSN/GGSN in UMTS, S-GW/P-GW in LTE etc.).07-26-2012
20120191861Cardless Contact Information Exchange - In one embodiment, a method includes determining that a first user registered for an event. A first user identifier for the event is determined upon the first user registering for the event. The first user identifier is associated with the first user. A message is received from the first user. The message includes a second user identifier associated with a second user. The second user identifier is determined for the second user upon the second user registering for the event. A computing device automatically connects the second user and the first user using the first user identifier and the second user identifier.07-26-2012
20090094367METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING GROUP SESSION - A method and system for establishing a group session and a service server are disclosed. The method comprises: acquiring a group member list and establishing session conditions according to the information in a received group session; acquiring the various information described in the establishing session conditions; determining group members of which the various information meets the establishing session conditions; and sending a request for establishing a group session of which the various information meets the establishing session conditions, and establishing the group session. The method solves the problem that the service server cannot dynamically select the group members, according to the current statuses of the group members, to establish the session in the prior art, whose disadvantages are the session is inflexible and the communication resources are wasted.04-09-2009
20130073738Method and Apparatus for Browsing Using Multiple Coordinated Device Sets - Systems and methods for navigating hypermedia using multiple coordinated input/output device sets. Disclosed systems and methods allow a user and/or an author to control what resources are presented on which device sets (whether they are integrated or not), and provide for coordinating browsing activities to enable such a user interface to be employed across multiple independent systems. Disclosed systems and methods also support new and enriched aspects and applications of hypermedia browsing and related business activities.03-21-2013
20130073737Proximity Synchronizing Audio Gateway Device - A digital audio gateway device for use in a wireless network of digital audio playback devices. The gateway device is wirelessly linked to one or more digital audio playback devices to provide a gateway to the Internet for the digital audio playback devices. In addition to functioning as a gateway, the device provides additional functionality and may act as a cache of digital audio data for the various digital audio players connected in the wireless network and may also act to automatically update digital audio content on the audio players, synchronize digital audio content and playlists between the digital audio players and continue automatically or upon user request a particular playlist as the user moves from one digital audio player to another.03-21-2013
20130073736COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication device configured to receive content from a server via a network, comprises a storage unit configured to store content received from the server in a cache, a display unit configured to display the content stored in the storage unit, a control unit configured to switch connection to the network to one of a plurality of communication lines having different communication rates, and a setting unit configured to set the size of the content received from the server and the number of histories stored in the cache, in accordance with the communication line to which connection has been switched by the control unit.03-21-2013
20130060952METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING COLLABORATIVE SESSION - The present invention discloses a method, a device, and a system for establishing a collaborative session, and belongs to the field of communication. The method includes: receiving, by a network control device, a session establishment request that carries media stream description information and is sent by a control UE; and according to the media stream description information carried in the received session establishment request, establishing, by the network control device, on the control UE a media stream with a remote UE, and establishing on a controlled UE a media stream with the remote UE. In the present invention, the control UE sends the media stream description information to the network control device, so that the network control device establishes media streams on the control UE and the controlled UE with the remote UE, thereby enabling the media streams to be established on different UEs at the same time.03-07-2013
20130060951COMMUNICATION MEDIATING APPARATUS FOR MEDIATING COMMUNICATION OVER NETWORK - A pressure-sensitive adhesive composition attached to a metal surface. The composition includes an acrylic copolymer obtained by polymerizing a monomer mixture, the monomer mixture including: at least one monomer (monomer m1) selected from alkyl(meth)acrylates represented by the formula (I): CH03-07-2013
20130060950PROCESSING CONTROL SERVER, PROCESSING CONTROL METHOD, AND PROCESSING TERMINAL - A processing control server has a first communication unit that communicates with a processing terminal by using a first connection based on HTTP; a second communication unit that communicates with the processing terminal by using a second connection that is different from the first connection; and a processing control unit that transmits object data to the processing terminal based on HTTP after acquiring a processing request, and requests the processing terminal to cancel processing of the object data by using the second connection in response to acquisition of a cancellation request.03-07-2013
20130060949COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS THAT CONTROLS SESSION ESTABLISHMENT, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication control apparatus which is capable of transmitting a message to a plurality of destinations by broadcasting using SIP, and also avoiding a situation in which other SIP services cannot be used. A connection request message received from a transmitting-side terminal apparatus via a network is transmitted to destinations associated with an address included in a connection request message. It is determined whether or not a predetermined designation is made as to the connection request message, and when it is determined that the predetermined designation is made as to the connection request message, response messages are received from all receiving-side terminal apparatuses which are the destinations, then a connection response message is transmitted to the transmitting-side terminal apparatus, and all the receiving-side terminal apparatuses which are the destinations and the transmitting-side terminal apparatus are connected to each other by one session.03-07-2013
20120311161DUAL-PHASE CONTENT SYNCHRONIZATION - Metadata is synchronized between a mobile device and a remote node over a first network, where the metadata specifies media content to be synchronized between the mobile device and the remote node. Subsequently a network connection is established with the remote node over a second network. The media content is bi-directionally synchronized between the mobile device and the remote node over the second network based on the metadata that was synchronized over the first network.12-06-2012
20090271520Method, system and apparatus for logging date with low latency - A system, method and apparatus for logging data are provided. Network data is acquired in transmission to a destination. The network data is converted to loggable data. The loggable data is output in a machine readable format. As a result, the system, method and apparatus provides for low latency acquisition of data, which may also be used for recoverability.10-29-2009
20090271519Method and system for facilitating group organization using mobile devices - Method and system for facilitating group organization using mobile devices and near field communication (NFC). Such a method in one aspect comprises the steps of selecting a first member of a group to create resources for the group, creating the resources by the first member using a mobile device belonging to the first member, bringing the mobile device belonging to the first member and a mobile device belonging to a second member of the group into proximity whereby a NFC connection is established between the mobile devices, uploading from the mobile device belonging to the second member to the mobile device belonging to the first member via the NFC connection information about the second member and adding the information about the second member to the resources.10-29-2009
20090271518ETHERNET EXTENSIBILITY - A networked computer with a networking framework that can operate in accordance with a standard protocol or may be configured to perform one or more functions that alter or extend processing according to the standard. The framework includes extensibility points and a mechanism to receive plug-ins that may perform extensibility functions. Network profile information indicates configuration of the extensibility points, including specific extensibility functions to be executed at the extensibility points. This information may be used to configure the extensibility points so that, as the computer operates, the extensibility functions are selectively executed instead of or in addition to standard functions.10-29-2009
20090271517METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS DEVICE RECONNECTION HANDLING - An apparatus and method for wireless device reconnection handling are disclosed involving a keep-alive request being sent from a wireless device to a server based on a first keep-alive time interval. At least one indicator that the keep-alive request has failed is received. A second keep-alive time interval different from the first keep-alive time interval is defined in response to at least one condition being satisfied and in response to the receiving. The defining includes defining the second keep-alive time interval when a response to the keep-alive request is not received from the server within a threshold time period associated with the at least one condition. In addition, the server is associated with a first wireless network. The first keep-alive time interval is defined before the sending based on a preference associated with a server associated with a second wireless network different than the first wireless network.10-29-2009
20090031031METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MAINTAINING A CONFIGURATION STATE - A system for configuring configurable products includes a stateless configuration engine. A user and a server are coupled to a network for transmitting and receiving information. The user includes a web browser, memory and a display. The user receives web pages from the server and enters information into the fields on the page. The user sends the web page and the entered information to the server. The server decodes the information on the web page and sends a next page to the user including hidden form fields that include the decoded information. The information is stored in the source code of the page displayed by the web browser located at the user.01-29-2009
20090031030PEER-BASED NETWORKING ENVIRONMENT - A solution for providing a networking environment is provided, in which data for a plurality of members is managed. Each member includes profile data and may include one or more peers. A peer can comprise another member that is a friend of the member. The member can provide invitee credentials, such as an identifier (e.g., user name) and password, which another member can use to view some or all of the profile data of the member. Additionally, peers of the other member can also view some or all of the profile data of the member and both the other member and his/her peers can view some or all of the profile data of the peer(s) of the member. In this manner, a networking environment is provided that enables an individual and his/her peers to learn about another individual in the context of the other individual's peers.01-29-2009
20090031029SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REESTABLISHING, WITH A CLIENT DEVICE, A SIGNALING SESSION ASSOCIATED WITH A CALL IN PROGRESS - The subject matter described herein includes methods, systems, and computer readable media for re-establishing, with a client device, a signaling session associated with a call in progress. One method for reestablishing, with a client device, a signaling session associated with a call in progress includes monitoring an Internet protocol (IP) address of media packets received from the client device during a call in progress having an associated signaling session and detecting a change in the IP address for the device from the media packets, and wherein the signaling session is terminated. The method further includes, in response to detecting a change in the IP address for the device from the media packets, sending a notification message to the client device. The method further includes receiving a registration message from the client device to re-establish the signaling session.01-29-2009
20090031028Secure tunnel domain name management - Apparatus, systems, and methods may operate to establish a virtual private network (VPN) connection between a server in a private network and a client in a public network. Additional activities include intercepting a socket call from the client requesting resolution of a network address associated with a domain name in the private network, searching a local linked list for the network address, returning the network address to the client if the network address is found in the local linked list, and, if the network address is not found in the local linked list, sending a request to resolve the network address to a domain name system (DNS) server in the private network. Additional apparatus, systems, and methods are disclosed.01-29-2009
20130067099MULTI-MODE ENDPOINT IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHODS THEREOF - A method, apparatus, and communication network system that allows an endpoint to be simultaneously registered with more than one communications server is described. In one embodiment, the communication network system includes a network, a plurality of communications servers that are coupled to the network, and a plurality of endpoints coupled to the network. Each endpoint is capable of being simultaneously registered with more than one communications server. A communication method for an endpoint involves registering a first logical line of the endpoint with a first communications server, and registering a second logical line of the endpoint with a second communications server. Consequently, flexibility is obtained by allowing an endpoint to choose the registering communications server for each logical line of the endpoint.03-14-2013
20130067098Remote Access to Resources - The invention provides systems and methods for securely transmitting data between a roaming computer and a managed network service over a shared public network. A secure connection is created between the roaming computer and a server computer that hosts or acts as a secure gateway to the managed network service. The connection is set up and established by a client agent installed on the roaming computer and a connection component of the managed service on the server computer. The client agent and the connection component of the managed service operate, on an initial request from the roaming computer to the managed service to negotiate the secure connection using certificate-based client authentication. The client certificate preferably includes user-specific attributes that can be extracted by the connection component and made available to the managed service to apply processing rules specific to the user.03-14-2013
20130067097Switching Between Connectivity Types To Maintain Connectivity - Techniques are provided for leveraging narrowband connectivity (such as dial-up communications or other types of low bandwidth communications) to provision or configure broadband connectivity between a broadband access provider and a broadband device, such as a DSL modem or a cable modem. Specifically, because narrowband connectivity does not require advance configuration or provisioning by the host system of connectivity parameters for an access-seeking device, a modem at an access-seeking device may be leveraged to establish a narrowband connection between that device and a host system and to enable an exchange or negotiation of connectivity parameters necessary to enable future broadband connectivity. Thus, once established, the narrowband connection may be used as a conduit for communicating required provisioning information between the broadband-enabling host and the access-seeking device to enable broadband connectivity by the device in the future.03-14-2013
20130067095SMB2 SCALEOUT - Systems and methods are disclosed for clients and servers operating in a scaled cluster environment. Efficiencies are introduced to the process of connecting a client to a clustered environment by providing the client with the ability to attempt a connection with multiple servers in parallel. Servers operating the in the clustered environment are also capable of providing persistent storage of file handles and other state information. Ownership of the state information and persistent handles may be transferred between servers, thereby providing clients with the opportunity to move from one server to another while maintaining access to resources in the clustered environment.03-14-2013
20130067094DIRECTLY TRANSFERING DATA BETWEEN DEVICES - A method for directly transferring data between devices includes, with a first computing system that is able to wirelessly associate with a computer network, establishing a direct data-link layer connection to a second computing system that is acting as a data sink, and with the first computing system transmitting data to the second computing system over the connection without transferring the data over the network.03-14-2013
20110022715MANAGEMENT SESSION INITIATION WITH A CUSTOMER PREMISES DEVICE - A communication method for execution at a customer premises device, comprising detecting receipt of a command indicative of an intent of a management entity to initiate a management session, the command being a management session initiation command. Responsive to detecting receipt of the management session initiation command, an identifier for participating in a management session with the management entity is obtained. Also, a method for execution at a management entity, comprising obtaining a management address for a customer device and determining whether the management address is indicative of a an address capable of supporting a management session or an address incapable of supporting a management session. If the management address is indicative of an address incapable of supporting a management session, a command is sent to the customer device, causing it to obtain a management address capable of supporting a management session.01-27-2011
20120117252DYNAMIC SHARED RISK NODE GROUP (SRNG) MEMBERSHIP DISCOVERY - In one embodiment, a network device determines identities of each peer device in a second routing domain attached to edge devices in a first routing domain. The network device associates each address prefix reachable in the second routing domain with an identity of each peer device in the second routing domain that advertised the address prefix and with an identity of one or more edge devices in the first routing domain to which that peer device is attached. The network device determines an address prefix is associated with a same identity of a peer device in the second routing domain but with different edge devices in the first routing domain. The network device assigns the different edge devices in the first routing domain associated with the determined address prefix to a shared risk node group (SRNG).05-10-2012
20120117251Method for Reselecting Bearer Binding and Event Report Function - The invention provides a method for a Bearer Binding and Event Report Function (BBERF) relocation, which is used in a process of the BBERF relocation after establishing a first Internet Protocol (IP) Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session for User Equipment (UE) and establishing a first gateway control session, a first Gx session, an S9 session and a first subsession of the S9 session which are used to perform policy control to said first IP-CAN session in an Evolved Packet System. In the process of the BBERF relocation, a subsession of the S9 session established before handover of UE is linked to the gateway control session established between the destination BBERF and the visited PCRF and the corresponding Gx session according to the session identity information, thereby achieving deferred linking of policy and charging sessions in roaming scenarios of home routed and local breakout.05-10-2012
20120117250MULTIPLE CLIENT COMPUTING DEVICE INVITATIONS FOR ONLINE COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - An online communication session invitation request message for an online communication session is received from an initiating client computing device. The invitation request message includes connection data of the initiating client computing device and an online communication session endpoint identifier of an intended participant of the online communication session. The session endpoint identifier is associated with a plurality of push tokens that correspond to a plurality of recipient client computing devices respectively. An invitation request message is sent in the form of a push notification message to each of the plurality of recipient client computing devices using the corresponding push tokens. Each invitation request message includes the connection data of the initiating client computing device.05-10-2012
20130067096METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETECTION OF COMMUNICATION ACTIVITIES OF A METER BOARD - Described herein are embodiments of methods and systems for detecting communications of a first meter board by a second meter board. In accordance with one aspect, a method is provided for detecting communications of a first meter board by a second meter board. In one embodiment, the method includes: receiving a signal, wherein the signal indicates a presence of communication activities between a first processor and another device over a network.03-14-2013
20120198081COEXISTENCE OF USER EQUIPMENT INITIATED AND NETWORK INITIATED QUALITY OF SERVICE FLOWS - Systems, methods and apparatus for quality of service (QoS) flows in a communication system are provided. In one aspect a method is providing for establishing a QoS flow for an application in a user equipment device. The method includes receiving QoS information from one of an application and a network. The method further includes establishing a QoS communication flow for the application based on the received information. The method also includes receiving QoS information from the other of the application and the network and modifying the established QoS communication flow based on the additional information.08-02-2012
20090234953APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR INTEGRATION OF THIRD PARTY VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK SOLUTIONS - Various embodiments for integration of virtual private network solutions are described. In one embodiment, a mobile computing device may comprise a virtual private network client configured to establish a virtual private network connection over one or more transports and a connection manager. The connection manager may comprise a virtual private network plug-in module associated with the virtual private network client. The connection manager may load the virtual private network plug-in module in response to a request to establish a virtual private network connection using the virtual private network client over a selected transport. The connection manager may instruct the virtual private network plug-in module to send a setup command to the virtual private network client for establishing the virtual private network connection over the selected transport. Other embodiments are described and claimed.09-17-2009
20120271955Mechanisms for role negotiation in the establishment of secure communication channels in peer-to-peer environments - Methods of establishing secure communication channels in peer-to-peer environments are provided that eliminate role conflicts between peers by determining which peer will act as a client and which the peer will act as a server in a secure connection handshake. In one embodiment, an attribute of the handshake messages are used in a tiebreaker process to determine which peer assumes the role of the server. In another embodiment, the attribute may be used to compute a wait period for each peer, or the wait period may be based on a random time period, and the peers cancel their request and resent requests after waiting their respective time periods.10-25-2012
20090013080Media Stream Scheduling for Hiccup-Free Fast-Channel-Change in the Presence of Network Chokepoints - An implementation, as described herein, facilitates fast start-up of a new media stream while avoiding temporal interruption (i.e., “hiccups”) of the presentation of that new media stream. At least one implementation, described herein, coordinates the delivery of multiple simultaneous media streams on a media-stream network. Its coordination accounts for traversal of bandwidth-restricted chokepoints; quickly stopping delivery of one or more media streams from the set of streams; quickly initiating delivery and presentation of one or more new media streams not previously in the set (i.e., a “channel change”); and producing clean playback of all of the streams in the set, despite their different timelines. This abstract itself is not intended to limit the scope of this patent. The scope of the present invention is pointed out in the appending claims.01-08-2009
20090013078Optimized Signaling Protocol, Including Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), in a Communications Environment - A redacted version of a signaling protocol, such as Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), is used to optimize call session communications between a communications terminal and a proxy server. During a session registration process, the proxy server captures and stores session context data by leveraging the content of the registration messages. With the session context data stored at the proxy server, the messages between the proxy server and the communications terminal may omit some or all of the session context data. For outgoing messages, a proxy server receives a redacted signaling message from the communications terminal, reconstructs a standard signaling message from the redacted signaling message, and forwards the reconstructed message to a recipient. For incoming messages, the proxy server receives a standard signaling message, redacts the standard message to remove some or all of the session context data, and forwards the redacted message to the communications terminal.01-08-2009
20090013077OBJE NETWORK DEVICE SERVICE CONTROL METHOD AND SYSTEM - An Obje network device service control method and system, the method including: discovering Obje components by an Obje proxy, and generating component proxies by an Obje proxy, the component proxies respectively corresponding to the Obje components; discovering the component proxies by a Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) control point, and requesting by the UPnP control point a component proxy of the component proxies, which is selected by a UPnP control point, for a presentation page; generating and providing by the selected component proxy the presentation page to the UPnP control point; and controlling by the UPnP control point a transfer session between the Obje components based on the presentation page.01-08-2009
20090006630Sip converter - When communications are performed by connecting a non-SIP information terminal device in which SIP is not supported to a SIP converter connected to a communication line via a line terminating device, the SIP converter performs establishment and disconnection of a SIP session, and transmission of a SIP message on behalf of the non-SIP information terminal device.01-01-2009
20090006629Instantiating a communication pipeline between software - An embodiment not only instantiates a pipeline that allows communication between first and second executable nodes regardless of whether the nodes have compatible or incompatible interface views, but also structures the pipeline based on the relationship between the interface views so, for example, the pipeline does not consume unnecessary overhead or introduce unnecessary data-transfer delay. For example, an embodiment compares a first interface view of a first executable node to a second interface view of a second executable node. A first communication pipeline having a first structure is instantiated between the first and second nodes if the first view has a first pre-established relationship to the second view, and a second communication pipeline having a second structure is instantiated between the first and second nodes if the first view has a second pre-established relationship to the second view.01-01-2009
20130166759APPARATUS, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS OF IP ADDRESS DISCOVERY FOR TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP - A method of peer discovery in a communications network includes transmitting, by a first client station, a request to a second client station; receiving a response of the second client station, at least one of the request and the response including a local IP address of the corresponding client station; and establishing a tunneled direct link setup (TDLS)direct link between the first client station and the second client station based on the local IP address.06-27-2013
20130166760LOAD SENSITIVE DATA SESSION SCHEDULING MECHANISMS OF WIRELESS/WIRELINE ACCESS NETWORKS - A method and apparatus to link user requirements of data sessions to the network conditions provides an application making an advance request corresponding to a data session, which a communication device may immediately acknowledge but will attend to the request at its convenience. The data session setup is based on the actual network conditions which are either sensed by the device or provided by an agent in the network. The method may be overlaid on top of existing wireless handsets using existing technologies. Hence, all the flexibility and configurability associated with data sessions offered by the existing solutions may remain intact with added features for the customer and the operator. In various exemplary embodiments, the method may use a network load measurement capability in the device and/or a network agent.06-27-2013
20080313335Communicator establishing aspects with context identifying - One aspect relates to attempting to establish a communication with at least one identifiable person and/or identifiable communication device based at least in part on an at least one context designated destination relating at least partially to at least one context of the at least one identifiable person and/or identifiable communication device. Another aspect relates to altering an at least one transmitted data between a relatively ambiguous specification and a relatively precise specification at least partially based on an at least one context relating to communications with an at least one identifiable person and/or identifiable communication device.12-18-2008
20080294782CLAN BASED STRATEGY SHARING TOOL - A method for use with a computer simulation includes providing an ability to run a simulation in which a plurality of client devices communicate over a network to interact with the simulation, providing an ability to generate a first user interface on each of the plurality of client devices for allowing users associated with the client devices to interact with the simulation, providing an ability to provide information that includes a representation of at least a portion of an environment of the simulation on a subset of the plurality of client devices, and providing an ability to allow users associated with the subset of the plurality of client devices to interact with the information without allowing access thereto by the other client devices. A system for use in running a computer simulation and a storage medium storing a computer program executable by a processor based system are also disclosed.11-27-2008
20080294781METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GLOBAL LOGOFF FROM A WEB-BASED POINT OF CONTACT SERVER - A method carried out at a point of contact (e.g., reverse proxy, a web server plug-in, or the like) that serves as an intermediary between a client browser and one or more back-end applications (or application component), wherein each back-end application has the capability to set its own server-side session management data with respect to the point of contact that is independent of any client-side session management data set by the point of contact and used by the point of contact to manage a user session. The method begins as a given back-end application returns a response to a first request that has been issued from the client browser (the first request having been received at the point of contact and passed to a back end application or component for processing). The point of contact intercepts the out-going response, augments server-side session management data associated therewith with a “stamp,” and forwards to the client browser the response together with the server-side session management data as augmented to include the stamp. The stamp provides a way for the point of contact to later determine whether the server-side session management data, if received with another user request, is valid for that request. Later, upon receipt at the point of contact of a new user request that includes the server-side session management data (and stamp), the point of contact uses the stamp to determine whether the new request is valid. If so, the point of contact removes the stamp from the server-side session management data and forwards the new request (and the management data) to the back-end application for handling.11-27-2008
20120102206SYSTEM AND METHOD EMPLOYING AN AGILE NETWORK PROTOCOL FOR SECURE COMMUNICATIONS USING SECURE DOMAIN NAMES - A client device comprises: (a) a memory, (b) an application program, and (c) a signal processing configuration. The memory is configured and arranged to facilitate a connection of the client device with a target device over a secure communication link created based on (i) an address request generated by the client device, and (ii) a determination as a result of the address request that the target device is a device with which a secure communication link can be established when the requested address is identified in an address lookup. The application program is configured and arranged so as to allow participation in audio/video communications with the target device over the secure communication link once the secure communication link is established. The signal processing configuration is arranged to execute the application program.04-26-2012
20110307614Techniques For Efficient Remote Presentation Session Connectivity And Routing - Techniques are disclosed for efficient remote presentation session connectivity and routing. In an embodiment, the roles of a remote presentation session deployment involved in receiving a connection from a client and determining a virtual machine (VM) to serve the client's remote presentation session are consolidated on one or more servers of the deployment that host such VMs. When this consolidated role receives a connection set up communication from a client, it uses information local to it and its server to determine a VM to serve the remote presentation session. Where the deployment comprises a plurality of such servers, the consolidated role may communicate with an inter-server connection broker to determine a different server that will conduct the remote presentation session.12-15-2011
20110283003SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BILLING SYSTEM INTERFACE FAILOVER RESOLUTION - A determination is made whether a first application server of a group of N application servers, N being at least two, is a coordinator of the group. Responsive to determining that the first application server is the coordinator of the group, a connection to a billing system is established, via a terminal server, by the first application server. A determination is made whether a second application server of the group of N application servers is the coordinator of the group. Responsive to determining that the second application server is not the coordinator of the group, a periodic check is made whether the second application server of the group of N application servers is the coordinator of the group. The second application server may later be determined to be the coordinator of the group, when the first server experiences difficulty. Once it is determined that the second application server now is the coordinator of the group, a connection is established to the billing system, via the terminal server, by the second application server.11-17-2011
20090319668COMMUNICATION INTEGRATION BETWEEN A VIRTUAL UNIVERSE AND AN EXTERNAL DEVICE - An approach that provides real-time communication integration between a virtual universe and an external source is described. In one embodiment, there is a real-time communication integration interface tool that provides real-time communication integration between a virtual universe and a communication device external to the virtual universe. In this embodiment, there is a communication request component configured to receive a request to initiate a communication between a first resident that is on-line in the virtual universe and a second resident that is logged out of the virtual universe via the communication device. A communication link component is configured to establish a communication link between the virtual universe and the communication device in response to receiving the request.12-24-2009
20090019164DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURING A ROUTER TO FIND THE BEST DHCP SERVER - Provided is a method for assigning a domain host configuration protocol (DHCP) server from a list of available DHCP servers based upon user selected criteria. When a network router receives a request for an IP address from a computer, or “client,” connected to a network, the request is analyzed for information related to both the client and the available DHCP servers. The analysis may be based upon a number of factors such as the number of previous requests to a particular DHCP server and the proximity of the servers to the computer requesting the IP address. Once the router determines an appropriate DHCP server for a particular IP address request, the client request is forwarded to that DHCP server. The process is completely transparent to both the requesting client and to the selected DHCP server.01-15-2009
20110040880TONE GENERATION SYSTEM CONTROLLING THE MUSIC SYSTEM - In a plurality of rooms, hubs are installed to build a star-shaped LAN, and tone-generation-related devices, such as a keyboard, tone generator device and speaker, are connected to the respective hubs. For example, in an internal network, the keyboard is logically connected to an input side of the tone generator device and a speaker is connected to an output side of the tone generator device, so as to build a tone generation system. The tone-generation-related devices are provided with respective network adaptors so that they can be readily connected to the LAN. Communication is carried out between the tone-generation-related devices, using a communication protocol intended for retransmission control. Each of the tone-generation-related devices is in the form of a processor device, which executes a program corresponding to a function of a desired processing element to thereby implement the desired processing element. Once a given tone-generation-related device, implementing a plurality of processing elements, is connected to the network, an internal connection between the processing elements is canceled.02-17-2011
20100088414SELECTIVELY JOINING CLIENTS TO MEETING SERVERS - In an embodiment, a hosted-on-premises meeting exchange server operates seamlessly with web meeting servers. For example, one computer-implemented method comprises receiving a request from a client computer to join a web meeting; determining whether the client computer is coupled to a local network which includes an on-premises-meeting exchange server; in response to determining that the client computer is coupled to the local network, joining the client computer to the web meeting at the on-premises-meeting exchange server when the on-premises-meeting exchange server has sufficient capacity, and otherwise joining the client computer to the web meeting at an off-premises-meeting exchange server; and in response to determining that the client computer is not coupled to the local network, joining the client computer to the web meeting at the off-premises-meeting exchange server.04-08-2010
20110302314EDGE TRAVERSAL SERVICE DORMANCY - A system maintains a dormant state in the host, in which no beacons (or “bubbles”) are transmitted from the host when no application or service (collectively, “processes”) of the host is accepting unsolicited traffic via the edge traversal service. When at least one application or service begins to accept unsolicited traffic via the edge traversal service, the host enters a qualified state and begins transmitting the beacons. As each additional application or service begins to accept such traffic, the number of accepting applications and services is maintained. As applications and services terminate acceptance of such traffic, the number of accepting applications and services is decremented. When the last application or service terminates acceptance of unsolicited traffic via the edge traversal service, the host re-enters the dormant state and ceases transmission of its beacons.12-08-2011
20110276698Method for Establishing a Paired Connection Between Media Devices - A method for establishing a paired connection between first and second media devices across a network includes transmitting a first information message across the network including an identifier that includes a request to pair the first and second media devices. When a second information message is received from the second media device within a first predetermined time period, the first device retrieves an identifier of the second device and transmits a confirmation message across the network including the device identifiers. A paired connection between the media devices is completed after a corresponding confirmation message from the second device is received within a second predetermined time period.11-10-2011
20110302313Method and System for Utilizing a Gateway to Enable Peer-to-Peer Communications in Service Provider Networks - A broadband gateway may be operable to receive network topology information to enable peer-to-peer communications between a first communication device and a second communication device. The first communication device is communicatively coupled to the broadband gateway. The broadband gateway may be operable to handle at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. A communication link which may bypass core layer network components and/or resources for enabling the peer-to-peer communications between the first communication device and the second communication device may be established by the broadband gateway, based on the received network topology information, a location of the first communication device and a location of the second communication device. The broadband gateway may establish the communication link to enable the peer-to-peer communications by marking traffic such as by inserting QinQ tags into traffic between the first communication device and the second communication device.12-08-2011
20090063687Hybrid connection model - A connection manager to manage connections between a web server using a hybrid connection model. The hybrid connection model is optimized to minimize system resources necessary to maintain an idle connection The hybrid connection model decreases resources required during idle times by using a single or set of poller threads to monitor for socket events for all idle connections. The connection is then assigned a worker thread when further data is ready to be transferred over a connection.03-05-2009
20110289223METHOD OF DISTINGUISHING A PLURALITY OF UES SHARING ONE PUID AND A DEVICE THEREOF - The present invention provides with a method of distinguishing a plurality of calling UEs sharing a PUID in a calling S-CSCF of IMS network and the device thereof. When a calling UE using a shared PUID in the calling-party network requests to establish a session with some called UE in the called-party network, the calling S-CSCF adds a extension identification corresponding to the calling UE into the session request message from the calling UE and sends the session request message with the extension identification added therein to the called UE in the called-party network, such that the called UE may realize which one is the actual calling UE according to the extension identification in the session request message and the shared PUID used by the calling UE. Therefore, after completion of such session, the called UE may re-establish a session with the calling UE according to the extension identification of the calling UE and the shared PUID thereof.11-24-2011
20110289225Load Balancing of Server Clusters - A load balancing scheme is described for a server cluster. An application identifier is received by the cluster from a client desiring to connect to the application. Each one of the servers in the cluster independently hashes the application identifier into a unique number. This unique number is used to determine a preferred one of the servers for the connection. The servers then each calculate a priority code using the unique number, a load level for each server, and/or a node identifier assigned to the servers in the cluster. If the preferred cluster server is available, it transmits its priority code to the client before the other servers transmit their priority codes. Otherwise, each of the available cluster servers transmits their priority codes to the client. The client selects the cluster server with the most favorable priority for making the connection.11-24-2011
20110289224METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ESTABLISHING COLLABORATIVE COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN DEVICES USING AMBIENT AUDIO - Various embodiments of the present invention are directed to systems and methods for enabling two or more devices in the same ambient audio environment to become automatically interconnected so that information can be exchanged between the devices. The two or more device detect substantially the same sounds, such as people talking in a meeting, automatically determine this fact and enter the devices into an information and document sharing relationship via a network.11-24-2011
20110289221Multilevel Routing - A communication system comprising a plurality of nodes that are capable of establishing a communication connection between two or more clients, the plurality of nodes being arranged in a hierarchy in which a node comprised in one level of the hierarchy is more likely to be reachable by a client trying to establish a communication connection with another client than a node comprised in a lower level of the hierarchy, the communication system being arranged such that, when a client determines that a node is unreachable for establishing a communication connection between it and another client, that communication connection is instead established by a node comprised in a higher level of the hierarchy than the unreachable node.11-24-2011
20110289220METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INTEGRATING METADATA AND DATA OF A SESSION - Embodiments of the invention are directed to a system and method for reconstructing a session. A method may include receiving audio and metadata packets related to a session. Audio data may be recorded and metadata information may be extracted from the metadata packets and stored in association with the audio data. A session may be reconstructed by simultaneously replaying the audio data and presenting a visual representation of the metadata.11-24-2011
20110289222CLIENT-SERVER SESSION PARALLELISM - Using client-server session parallelism (CSSP), a client device establishes multiple network communication sessions with different remote servers and requests the same unsegmented data item from each server. Whichever copy of the unsegmented data item is received earliest at the client device is provided to an application. The CSSP software may be part of a network stack, or it may be part of a particular application such as a browser or a media player. The servers are not necessarily CSSP-aware, but when they are, sessions may be load-balanced. CSSP sessions may also be transferred to other CSSP-aware servers in view of server loads, imminent server reboots, or other events. A CSSP client may notify a CSSP server of status information describing session(s) established at the client with other server(s), allowing the server to reallocate bandwidth to other clients when the CSSP client has sufficient alternate data sources.11-24-2011
20120191864MEDIATED NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION TRAVERSAL - A method of establishing a connection traversing at least one network address translation (NAT) gateway is presented. In the method, a bind request is sent from a source device to a mediation element via a NAT gateway. A bind response associated with the bind request is received. A connection request is sent to the mediation element. The mediation element causes the connection request to be sent to a destination device. A connection response associated with the connection request is received. A hello message is sent to a predicted destination address. The predicted destination address is based on an address received in the connection response. A data connection is established between the source device and the destination device using the predicted destination address.07-26-2012
20120023239Creation Method of Multimedia Service and System Thereof - The present invention relates to a method for creating multimedia services comprising: creating a signaling link between the first node and the second node; and the second node negotiating multimedia with the first node via the signaling link to establish a media channel for transmitting stream of the multimedia services and complete creation of the multimedia services at the second node. The present invention also relates to a system for creating multimedia services. Therefore, the present invention allows the signaling link between the first node and the second node to be established and to be used for multimedia negotiation to create the media channel and complete the creation of the multimedia services at the second node so as to implement the unified creation of the multimedia services and simplify the scheduling of the multimedia stream.01-26-2012
20090287828METHOD, SYSTEM AND SERVER FOR TRANSFERRING SESSION CONTROL RIGHT - A method, a system and a server for transferring session control right, relating to communication field, are provided in the present invention. The method includes: receiving a request for transferring session control right; negotiating about session transfer with a client of which the control right is to be taken over or a client which is to take over the control right based on the received request for transferring session control right; and transferring the session control right to the client which is to take over the control right after a successful negotiation. The server includes a request receiving module, a negotiating module and a control right transferring module. Therefore, session control right can be transferred between various clients, which facilitates user with a better control over session.11-19-2009
20110296035CHARGING CONTROL IN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - For controlling charging in an Internet Protocol multimedia subsystem, it is detected whether a session initiated in the Internet Protocol multimedia subsystem is associated with a service requiring special charging control, and charging information is added to messages signalling establishment or modification of the session in the Internet Protocol multimedia subsystem in accordance with the detection result.12-01-2011
20110296033SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING CLICK TO DIAL SERVICE TO MULTIMEDIA CONFERENCE SERVICE - The present invention discloses a system and method for switching click to dial (CTD) service to multimedia conference service. The method comprises: a CTD service is performed between one user equipment (UE) and another; an application serve invites at least one of the UEs and makes said at least one of the UEs take media negotiation with the media server so as to carry out the multimedia conference service, wherein the application server is in charge of realizing not only the CTD service but also the multimedia conference service. The application server invites at least one of the UEs and makes said at least one of the UEs take media negotiation with the media server so as to carry out the multimedia conference service, thus the limitation that extra UEs cannot be joined in the call in the CTD service is overcome.12-01-2011
20110296032Resources Allocation Flexibility - A method for an application function (AF) device in a wireless cellular network including the steps of determining with a processing unit whether an application service requires confirmation that a transmission path for corresponding application service media is available to progress set up of an application service session. There is the step of sending a message generated by the processing unit through a network interfacing unit to a policy and charging rule function (PCRP) server to indicate whether the application service requires confirmation that the transmission path for the corresponding application service media is available. An application function (AF) device in a wireless cellular network including a processing unit which determines whether an application service requires confirmation that a transmission path for corresponding application service media is available to progress set up of an application service session. The AF device includes a network interfacing unit that sends a message generated by the processing unit to a policy and charging rule function (PCRF) server indicating whether the application service requires confirmation that the transmission path for the corresponding application service media is available. A method for a policy and charging rule function (PCRF) server in a wireless cellular network. A policy and charging rule function (PCRF) server in a wireless cellular network.12-01-2011
20110296030SINGLE RUI RENDERER ON A VARIETY OF DEVICES WITH DIFFERENT CAPABILITIES - Remote user interface rendering devices are able to adaptively degrade the user experience in a manner that is predictable utilizing the method and system described. Capability groups used are a set of interrelated functionalities that are supported as a whole by the rendering device. If the rendering device does not support any feature in a capability group, the remaining features in the same capability group are automatically disabled for the rendering device. The capability groups are able to be assigned priorities so that higher priority capability groups are evaluated first.12-01-2011
20090300185Reception of Audio-Visual Content Addressed to Several Devices - The present invention relates to a method for receiving audiovisual programs sent by a server to at least two reception devices. Initially, a first user requests a document from the server that establishes a unicast stream to download said document. Then, a second user requests to receive the same document, even truncated by a part. The server studies the proposal and possibly, for a lower price, agrees to the download. The server then switches the broadcast of the document from a unicast stream to a multicast stream, the first and second devices receiving said document via the same multicast stream.12-03-2009
20100064045HANDING A REQUEST RELATING TO A SERVICE - In a multi-service communication environment, when a communication establishment request is received (03-11-2010
20110264810ESTABLISHING A SPLIT-TERMINATED COMMUNICATION CONNECTION THROUGH A STATEFUL FIREWALL, WITH NETWORK TRANSPARENCY - A method and apparatus are provided for establishing a split-terminated client-server communication connection through a stateful firewall, with network transparency. In an environment in which a pair of network intermediaries is employed to optimize client-server communications, a first intermediary intercepts a client request for a new connection. The first intermediary probes the network for a counterpart near the server, and opens an optimized communication session with a second intermediary that responds affirmatively. Some or all client-server communications that transit the intermediaries' session are accelerated or otherwise optimized. The first intermediary's probe uses the client's source address, but a different port number, while the optimized intermediary session is opened using the client's source address and source port. Therefore, a network monitoring tool can monitor the end-to-end connection, and the stateful firewall will not reject the optimized session.10-27-2011
20100153562METHOD FOR DISCOVERY AND ROUTING USING A PRIORI KNOWLEDGE IN THE FORM OF APPLICATION PROGRAMME WITHIN MOBILE AD-HOC NETWORKS - A mobile ad-hoc network device includes application software. The device constructs its routing table, listing reachable devices with the same application software. The routing table knowledge is dynamic, as devices enter and leave the network or their parameters change.06-17-2010
20110219125Endoscopy device with integrated RFID and external network capability - A unit of equipment designed for use in endoscopic surgery includes radio frequency identification (RFID) circuitry and a network interface. The RFID circuitry can be used to store information of various types, such as component usage tracking information, user preferences, usage logs, error logs, device settings, etc. The network interface allows the unit to communicate over an external network with a remote server. Information, such as information stored in the RFID circuitry or in a separate memory, may be sent over the network to a desired destination, such as a server operated by the manufacturer of the equipment.09-08-2011
20110219122REMOTE CONTENT CLASSIFICATION AND TRANSMISSION USING MULTIPLE TRANSPORT CHANNELS - In various embodiments, methods and systems are disclosed for the implementation of multiple transport channels between the client and server. Each of the channels may be adapted to efficiently communicate data for a particular data type and thus be particularly well suited for its data-element characteristics and the detected link characteristics between the client and server.09-08-2011
20090313376METHOD AND APPARATUSES FOR ESTABLISHING A SESSION BETWEEN A CLIENT TERMINAL AND A MEDIA SUPPLY SYSTEM TO TRANSPORT A UNICAST MEDIA STREAM OVER AN IP NETWORK - A method of setting up a session between a client terminal and a media supply system in order to transport a unicast media stream from the media supply system to the client terminal over an intervening IP network, the media supply system implementing the Real Time Streaming Protocol. The method comprises conducting a negotiation between the client terminal and the media supply system over an IP Multimedia Subsystem network in order to identify to the IP Multimedia Subsystem network the source and destination IP addresses and port numbers for the media stream, and subsequently sending Real Time Streaming Protocol messages from the client terminal to the media supply system in order to control the playout of media from the media supply system.12-17-2009
20110191481SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRANSFERRING DATA - Data transfer systems and methods are disclosed. A method of transferring data includes initiating a session for transferring data, establishing a session connection between a first gateway and a second gateway, buffering a predetermined amount of data received by the first gateway, generating a data block using a session-layer protocol when the predetermined amount of data is buffered, and transmitting the data block from the first gateway to the second gateway over the session connection. A system for transferring data includes a first gateway, a second gateway, and a network. The first gateway includes memory for buffering received data and a processor operable to execute a session-layer protocol for generating a data block when a predetermined amount of data is buffered. The first gateway is configured to transmit the data block to the second gateway via the network during a session.08-04-2011
20110191480PACKET-BASED DIGITAL DISPLAY INTERFACE SIGNAL MAPPING TO MICRO SERIAL INTERFACE - A passive cable adaptor for connecting a data source device with a display device is described. The adaptor has a packet-based interface connector at one end, the connector having a positive main link pin, a negative main link pin, a positive auxiliary channel pin, and a negative auxiliary channel pin. At the other end is a micro serial interface connector, wherein multimedia content is transmitted over the cable adaptor and electrical power is supplied over the cable adaptor simultaneously. The cable adaptor has an auxiliary and hot plug detect (HPD) controller utilized to map the auxiliary channel and HPD signals of the packet-based digital display to the micro serial interface ID signal.08-04-2011
20090024744SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING A DESIGNATED CONNECTION BETWEEN COMPONENTS OF COMPUTING DEVICES - A system and method for identifying a single, designated connection from one or more connections (e.g. TCP connections) that may have been established between two components for data communications. Each component is associated with a component identifier that is generated by an identifier generating algorithm adapted to ensure that component identifiers generated by the algorithm are orderable and substantially unique. For example, Universally Unique Identifiers may be generated for this purpose. Each component in the distributed system can be uniquely identified by its component identifier, and the component identifiers facilitate the identification of each component as either a controller or responder in a determination of whether a particular connection should be identified as the designated connection. In one embodiment, that particular connection is identified as the designated connection unless an earlier established connection exists that neither the first component nor the second component knows to be broken. In that case, the earlier established connection may be identified as the designated connection.01-22-2009
20100115107COMMUNICATION DEVICE - When a communication route is established between SIP servers #05-06-2010
20100115104COOPERATIVE NETWORK FOR MOBILE INTERNET ACCESS - A method and system for connecting mobile users to the Internet using cooperative interconnection. A node consists of a network element that has two connections methodologies—typically a node will have a radio link and a wired link to the Internet. To obtain a connection, a member of the service located themselves in proximity to a network node which is commonly provided by another member and the cooperative tunneling agent requests a secure link. All members of the service agree to give connection to the Internet upon request from another member.05-06-2010
20100115105MOBILITY IN A MULTI-ACCESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention provides a terminal capable of establishing multiple communication sessions with a public network proxy through different access networks. The terminal actively communicates with the public network proxy to control which of the multiple communication paths are active, as well as control the transition from actively using one communication path to using another. The public network proxy facilitates data and voice sessions between the terminal and any number of other communication devices. In one embodiment, the communication sessions are reserved tunneling sessions, and the terminal cooperates with the public network proxy to effectively control how many tunneling-sessions are established, how many tunneling sessions are active at any given time, and the transition from one tunneling session to another for active communications. Each of the communication or tunneling sessions may be established over different access networks using different communication technologies and protocols.05-06-2010
20100169496Method and Apparatus for Optimization of SIGCOMP UDVM Performance - A mobile communication system that utilizes multiple access technologies achieves multiple session registrations by deriving a plurality of extended unique device identifications from a specific unique device identification (e.g., private user identification (PIID) stored on a subscriber identity module (SIM)) assigned to a user equipment. Each of the plurality of extended unique device identifications have the benefit of allowing multiple registrations with one or more access networks while allowing a home subscriber system to detect the one unique device identification embedded in the extended unique device identifications for authentication purposes. Thereby, a large population of deployed UEs and access network infrastructure may benefit without replacement by allowing a UE to maintain session continuity when transitioning between access networks, to select a preferred access technology when in overlapping coverage areas without session interruption, or to maintain multiple sessions (e.g., simultaneous Voice over IP (VoIP) and media streaming) with different access networks.07-01-2010
20100268829Selecting proxies from among autodiscovered proxies - Network devices include proxies and where multiple proxies are present on a network, they can probe to determine the existence of other proxies. Where more than two proxies are present and thus different proxy pairings are possible, the proxies are programmed to determine which proxies should form a proxy pair. Marked probe packets are used by proxies to discover each other and probing is done such a connection can be eventually formed even if some probe packets fail due to the marking Asymmetric routing can be detected and proxies configured for connection forwarding as necessary.10-21-2010
20100268828METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERRING REMOTE SESSION DATA - Examples of systems and methods are provided for communication and for forwarding display data related to a remote session between a client device and a remote server to a host device. The system may facilitate establishing the remote session with the remote server. The system may facilitate establishing a trusted relationship between the client device and the host device. The system may filter out data related to local graphical user interface (GUI) and selectively forward from the client device to the host device display data related to the remote session established between the client device and the remote server.10-21-2010
20100115102METHOD FOR IMPROVING A TCP DATA TRANSMISSION IN CASE THE PHYSICAL TRANSMISSION MEDIUM IS DISCONNECTED - A method for the improvement of a TCP data transmission process in the case of an interruption of the physical transmission medium, wherein after the establishment of a TCP connection between a client (05-06-2010
20090063688CENTRALIZED TCP TERMINATION WITH MULTI-SERVICE CHAINING - A network element having centralized TCP termination with multi-service chaining is described herein. According to one embodiment, a network element includes a switch fabric, a first service module coupled to the switch fabric, and a second and a third service modules coupled to the first service module over the switch fabric. In response to packets of a network transaction received from a client over a first network for access a server of a data center having multiple servers over a second network, the first service module is configured to terminate a TCP connection of the packets. The TCP terminated packets are transmitted to the second and third service modules over the switch fabric. The second and third service modules are configured to perform different application network services on the TCP terminated packets without having to perform a TCP process again. Other methods and apparatuses are also described.03-05-2009
20100023625TERMINAL UNIT FOR HANDLING SESSION ON THE BASIS OF SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL, METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING THEREOF - According to the present invention, a service is configured by a plurality of sessions and respective session negotiation requests defined by different media formats can be performed without influencing existing connected sessions, and hence it is easy to add, delete, and change the media, the contact of session negotiation can be specified, and the response to the session negotiation request can be processed easily with the service acceptance or rejection of the contact.01-28-2010
20120110194DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD AND INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE - Provided is a data communication method of establishing a plurality of TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) connections between a first information processing device and a second information processing device and communicating each piece of data, which is divided for each prescribed unit, through the plurality of established TCP connections. In the method, the first information processing device dynamically changes the number of TCP connections with the second information processing device by notifying connection-upper-limit information, which represents the upper limit of the number of TCP connections to be established with the second information processing device, to the second information processing device, and by changing the connection-upper-limit information to be notified.05-03-2012
20100115101DISTRIBUTED NETWORK CONNECTION POLICY MANAGEMENT - A connection policy for a communications network has a local connection policy indicating which paths between a given one of the nodes (computer A, router A, host 05-06-2010
20080270614METHOD AND DEVICES FOR THE INTERWORKING OF NODES - A method for the set-up of a bearer in a communication system from a first node which is adapted to a first bearer protocol to a second node which is adapted to a second bearer protocol is described. The set-up of a bearer is initiated by a message to the first node and an identification of the second node is provided to the first node. The first node determines whether the second node is adapted to the first bearer protocol and sets up the bearer according to the first bearer protocol if the second node is adapted to the first bearer protocol. Else, the first node sets up a bearer according to the first bearer protocol to a conversion node (BIGW) and sends an identification of the second node to the conversion node (BIGW) and the conversion node (BIGW) sets up a bearer according to the second bearer protocol to the second node and introduces a conversion unit between the first bearer protocol and the second bearer protocol. Nodes and program units adapted to the method are also described.10-30-2008
20100030898NETWORK SETTING METHOD AND NETWORK SETTING APPARATUS - An administrative manager connected to a plurality of servers each including a virtual machine environment in which a host OS and a guest OS are operable as virtual OS, performs the following processes. Namely, when the guest OS is started up in the server, the information whether or not transmission and reception of data among service programs is necessary and the information of the servers executing the service programs are referred to. Then, the connection target server which performs communications with the server in which the guest OS is started up, is determined according to the service program to be executed in the starting objective server. Further, the connection information is set to the host OS that operates in the starting objective server and to the host OS that operates in the connection target server.02-04-2010
20120036273LOAD BALANCING SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) SERVERS - A device receives Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) requests that include registration information, and load balances a SIP call based on the registration information of the SIP requests.02-09-2012
20120036269COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One of objects is to reduce a load in a session management and relay process on an SOAP-SIP adaptor for providing a 3PCC service. The SOAP-SIP adaptor (hereinafter the adaptor) receives a connection request message between a first terminal and a second terminal from a Web server, and establishes the sessions with each of the first terminal and the second terminal. After establishing the sessions with each of the first terminal and the second terminal, the adaptor sends a transfer request (REFER) of session to a call control device. Thereafter, the call control device manages session between the first terminal and the second terminal each having established the session with the adaptor.02-09-2012
20100121956COMPOSITE ENDPOINT MECHANISM - A multimedia call from an originating device is provided. At least one session may be created at an application server in response to receiving the multimedia call. An endpoint may be created within the session for communication between the originating device and the application server. The endpoint may be a composite endpoint for communication between the originating device and two or more terminating devices. The composite endpoint may be include two or more logical endpoints for communicating with and respectively associated with the two terminating devices. A portion or more of the multimedia call may be delivered from the application server to each of the terminating devices using the logical endpoint associated with each terminating device.05-13-2010
20100088416NETWORK CONNECTION CONTROL TECHNIQUE, NETWORK CONNECTION TECHNIQUE AND AUTHENTICATION APPARATUS - A network connection method includes: generating the same address as an address that is other than address currently used by the user terminal and is generated by the authentication apparatus, as a reconnection address, and storing the reconnection address that is valid for a predetermined valid period into a reconnection address storage device; and when a present time is within the predetermined valid period after the connection with the first network is disconnected, reconnecting to the first network by using the reconnection address stored in the reconnection address storage device without the authentication by the authentication apparatus.04-08-2010
20100017518Facilitating early media in a communications system - A method of sending information from a Session Initiation intermediate node to a first Session Initiation Protocol terminal. The method comprises, upon receipt of a session initiation request at the Session Initiation Protocol intermediate node, establishing a first Session Initiation Protocol dialog between the Session Initiation Protocol intermediate node and the first Session Initiation Protocol terminal, sending information over said first dialog, forwarding said request from the Session Initiation Protocol intermediate node to a second, destination Session Initiation Protocol terminal, before, during, or after establishment of said first dialog, and establishing a second Session Initiation Protocol dialog, between the first and second Session Initiation Protocol terminals.01-21-2010
20110125908METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROGRAMMING SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL BACK-TO-BACK USER AGENTS - In one embodiment, the present disclosure is a method and apparatus for programming session initiation protocol back-to-back user agents. In one embodiment, a method for programming a telecommunication feature as a session initiation protocol back-to-back user agent includes receiving source code defining the feature, the source code using at least one abstraction that hides session initiation protocol signaling details required by the feature and generating executable code that causes a session initiation protocol server to execute the feature, in accordance with the abstractions.05-26-2011
20100082819NETWORK BRIDGING APPARATUS FOR STORAGE DEVICE AND DATA STREAM TRANSMITTING METHOD THEREOF - A network bridging apparatus for a storage device and a data stream transmitting method thereof are provided. More particularly, a chip embedded with ATA over Ethernet (AoE) technology is incorporated into the network bridging apparatus. By which the independent-external storage device can be shared over a network. According to a preferred embodiment, a bridging module having the technology of AoE is included for converting either network packets or data being compatible with some standard data transmission formats. Preferably, one end of the apparatus is equipped with a network interface unit for connecting to the network, and further, the other end of the network bridging apparatus is connected to a storage device via a transmission interface. Therefore, the storage device using a standard transmission interface, such as USB, IEEE1394. eSATA or the like, can be shared with other computer systems within the local area network.04-01-2010
20100088415METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOCATING FACILITIES - A method and apparatus for providing facility location plans for a network are disclosed. For example, the method identifies a facility and a number of nearest active clients associated with a minimized cost per unit demand of connecting these clients to this facility. The method then connects the number of nearest active clients to the facility associated with the minimized cost per unit demand. In one embodiment, the method iterates this process with the remaining clients until all demands have been assigned to facilities.04-08-2010
20100100627SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BYPASSING AN ACCESS POINT IN A LOCAL AREA NETWORK FOR P2P DATA TRANSFERS - A system and method for bypassing an access point in a wireless Local Area Network (LAN) for direct point-to-point data transfers are provided. A user device in the wireless LAN is equipped with a primary local wireless interface establishing a wireless communication link with an access point of the wireless LAN, a secondary local wireless interface used for direct point-to-point (P2P) file transfers, and a P2P file transfer application. When the P2P application desires to transfer a data file to another user device within the wireless LAN, the user device determines whether the other user device is within a coverage area of the secondary local wireless interface and whether the file transfer meets one or more alternate transfer criterion. If so, the data file is transferred to the other user device via a direct P2P wireless communication link, thereby bypassing the access point of the wireless LAN.04-22-2010
20090287826Many-to-One Mapping of Host Identities - A computer-implemented method includes sending, from a first node to a second node, an initiator message to open a connection between the first node and the second node, receiving, at the first node, a responder message sent from the second node, in which the responder message comprises a responder certificate, converting the responder certificate to a responder canonical identifier, comparing the responder canonical identifier to a stored canonical identifier, and establishing the connection between the first node and the second node over a pre-existing session corresponding to the stored canonical identifier, when the responder canonical identifier matches the stored canonical identifier.11-19-2009
20110173331SEAMLESSLY TRANSFERRING A COMMUNICATION - Seamlessly transferring a communication. At least one communication is established between a first device and a second device. The at least one communication is transferred from the second device to a third device without interrupting the at least one communication and without disconnecting the at least one communication from the first device.07-14-2011
20110173332METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING POLICY AND CHARGING CONTROL IN MULTI-PDN SCENARIO - A method for implementing Policy and Charging Control (PCC) in a multi-Packet Data Network (PDN) scenario is disclosed. The method includes: a Visited Policy Control and Charging Rules Function (VPCRF) receives PCC rules and the associated S9 sub-session information from a Home Policy Control and Charging Rules Function (HPCRF), and sends the PCC rules according to the associated S9 sub-session information. The S9 session message carries associated S9 sub-session information, and therefore, in a multi-PDN scenario, the S9 session can distinguish and handle creation, modification and deletion of the Internet Protocol Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session and the gateway control session, and the VPCRF can understand the information delivered by the HPCRF, and send the information to the correct Policy and Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF) or Bearer Binding and Event Reporting Function (BBERF) for enforcement; moreover, the VPCRF can report the PDN connection release information to the HPCRF, and the HPCRF releases the corresponding PDN connection, thus avoiding ineffective occupation of resources and ensuring correct policies.07-14-2011
20090089434METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SAVING AND RETRIEVING CLIENT-SPECIFIC INFORMATION IN AN INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - A method of saving and retrieving client-specific information in an Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). A Serving Call Session Control Server (S-CSCF) receives information from a first client initiating a call to a second client. The information includes identification information corresponding to the first client and a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) invite to the second client. If a profile of the first client in a Home Subscriber Server (HSS) includes a trigger value, the S-CSCF forwards the SIP invite to an Application Server (AS). If a local AS archive does not include valid profile information corresponding to the first client, the AS fetches valid profile information from the HSS, and the AS stores the profile information in the local archive. The AS sends the profile information corresponding to the first client from the local archive to the second client by embedding the profile information within the SIP invite.04-02-2009
20100125667DYNAMIC CONFIGURATION OF VIRTUAL MACHINES - A computer implemented method for configuring virtual internal networks for testing is provided. The method includes deploying a virtual firewall and deploying a public switch enabling access to an external local area network through a first interface of the virtual firewall. A private switch enabling access to a plurality of virtual machines through a second interface of the virtual firewall is provided. The plurality of virtual machines define a private network behind the firewall. A network address is assigned to the virtual firewall and a private address is assigned to each of the virtual machines. The plurality of virtual machines are then tested through a test launcher in communication with the public switch.05-20-2010
20090276531Media File Sharing, Correlation Of Metadata Related To Shared Media Files And Assembling Shared Media File Collections - The present invention provides for systems and methods for communicating media files and creating a collection of media files, also referred to herein as a master media file. In addition, the systems and methods of the present invention provide for the creation of automatic metadata and compilation of metadata associated with the collection of media files. The present invention is able to bond devices, referred to herein as slave devices, such as media capture devices, presence devices and/or sensor devices and instruct the slave devices, particularly the media capture devices, to communicate captured media files with a specified set of metadata included.11-05-2009
20080288645COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT USING TWO DIFFERENT PROGRAMS TO DETERMINE STATE OF A NETWORK NODE TO ELIMINATE MESSAGE RESPONSE DELAYS IN SYSTEM PROCESSING - The determination of node and/or adapter liveness in a distributed network data processing system is carried out via one messaging protocol that can be assisted by a second messaging protocol which is significantly less susceptible to delay, especially memory blocking delays encountered by daemons running on other nodes. The switching of protocols is accompanied by controlled grace periods for needed responses. This messaging protocol flexibility is also adapted for use as a mechanism for controlling the deliberate activities of node addition (birth) and node deletion (death).11-20-2008
20090089437SYSTEMS AND MEDIA FOR SHARING SESSION DATA ON A NETWORK - Systems and media for sharing session data on a network are disclosed. More particularly, hardware and/or software for sharing user session data between different servers on a network are disclosed. Embodiments include a data processing system for sharing session data on a network, where the network includes an application server and an enterprise server, each providing at least part of an application to a user on the network. In some embodiments, the application server includes a session transport component for recording changes to user session data with the application server and the enterprise server includes a session transport component for requesting updated user session data from the application server. In further embodiments, the enterprise server may establish a user session based on the updated user session data received from the application server.04-02-2009
20090089435Method for initiating IMS based communications - A method of initiating an IP Multimedia Sub-system communication for a user that is not registered a priori with the IP Multimedia Subsystem. The method comprises receiving a communication request from said user at a Session Initiation Protocol Application Server via an interface to an external network or receiving an internally or externally generated stimulus requiring the establishment of an IP Multimedia Subsystem communication, allocating a Serving Call/State Control Function to the user, forwarding a SIP request from the Application Server to the allocated Serving Call/State Control Function, and establishing the requested communication.04-02-2009
20090089436Policy information in multiple PDFs - The invention proposes a method for establishing sessions in a network comprising a user entity, a network control node and a plurality of network nodes storing subscriber specific information, the method comprising the steps of receiving a session establishing request at the network control node, forwarding a policy request message from the network control node to each network node of the plurality of network nodes storing subscriber specific information comprising policy information required for the session to be established, processing the policy request message to generate a policy decision message and sending the policy decision message to the network control node from each of the network nodes having received the policy request message, generating a single policy decision confirmation message based on the received policy decision messages in the network control node, and sending the single policy decision message to the user entity.04-02-2009
20080209050Multiple sessions between a server and a browser - A method and apparatus for a server capable of supporting multiple sessions with a browser. First session information of a browser is detected. Second session information of the browser is detected. A first session is initiated with a first browser instance of the browser using the first session information. A second session is initiated with a second browser instance of the browser using the second session information.08-28-2008
20080209047METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTED POLICY EVALUATION - In one embodiment, the invention is a method and apparatus for distributed policy evaluation. One embodiment of a method for evaluating a systems management policy, where the policy includes a condition and an action to be taken when the condition evaluates to TRUE, includes forwarding the policy, by a first autonomic manager, to at least a second autonomic manager and receiving at least partial evaluation results for the policy from at least the second autonomic manager.08-28-2008
20080209045Capture and Resumption of Network Application Sessions - A system and method for capture and resumption of network application sessions in a network system. A transaction may be detected between a client and server that includes application session state information. The session state information may relate to a session between the client and the server. The Application session state information may be recorded in response to the detection of the transaction, and the application session state information may not be deleted according to session information expiration policies (e.g., of the client). User input may be received which requests to review the captured network application session. Correspondingly, a network request comprising captured credentials of the captured session may be generated and forwarded to the server. The network request may be usable to enable resumption of the captured network application session.08-28-2008
20090106429Collaborative music network - A collaborative music network for collaboratively linking members with each other has a central control center which is adapted for a plurality of members accessing thereto through internet, and a communication center linked to the central control center for interactively networking the members with each other. The music network includes a session for the session-members to edit, mix and record the audio files in the session and save them in the session and the user's own hard drive. The session also provides a live platform for session-members to interact and perform music. Non-session members are able to work on the audio files in the session. The completed music works are played through the network music player and purchased through online music store. The music network also contains an Internet radio to broadcast the audio files selected from member profiles.04-23-2009
20090106428Service intermediary Addressing for real time composition of services - Real-time service composition is provided by a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) transport binding for Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) messages. A SOAPAction header and SOAP envelope can be included in a SIP message to identify a requested service. The SIP message recipient can parse out the SOAP envelope and forward same to a corresponding Web Service. An intermediary node, including a SIP Proxy, can evaluate incoming SIP/SOAP messages and provide requested services to which they have access.04-23-2009
20090276530Devices, Systems, Methods and Software for Computer Networking - A method of accessing content from a server using a client device, the client device having at least first and second connections to one or more remote computers. The method includes testing the performance of the first connection, testing the performance of the second connection and selecting, in response to the performance testing, the first connection or the second connection for accessing content from the server using the client device.11-05-2009
20090276529CONNECTING EXTERNAL DEVICES TO A GAMING VOICE CHAT SERVICE - Voice chat enhances the game playing experience by allowing gamers in different locations to have conversations within the gaming environment. Functionality can be implemented within a gaming system to send an external invitation a user who is logged out of the game system to participate in a voice chat and/or multiplayer game session. The user can choose to accept the invitation and participate in the voice chat session on a device such as a mobile phone. Automatically generating external requests improves convenience for players, especially when inviting several other players to a voice chat session, because they do not have to find external contact information for each player who is not logged in.11-05-2009
20090282153COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM - A communication control system for intervening in the communication between a PC terminal in an external network and a portable telephone terminal with an electronic mail transmission/reception function in a mobile communication network has a database in which a portable telephone number and a mail account are stored in association with each other. Upon receipt of an access request with an FQDN to a predetermined portable telephone terminal from the PC terminal, the communication control system solves the name of the portable telephone terminal by searching the database on the basis of a host name (mail account name) extracted from the FQDN to acquire the telephone number corresponding to the host name (mail account name) as address information, thereby making a connection of the communication to the mobile communication terminal on the basis of the address information acquired by solving the name.11-12-2009
20090287827MANAGING DISCOVERY IN A WIRELESS PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - Apparatuses and methods are disclosed for managing discovery in wireless peer-to-peer networks. Various discovery procedures may be implemented by supporting a broadcast of a plurality of discovery signals spaced apart in time by silent periods from a peer node and changing the duration of at least one of the silent periods.11-19-2009
20090300187Transmission device having connection confirmation function - When establishment of a link is detected, a connection destination information request frame is transmitted via the established link to request information of a destination of connection. The connection destination information included in a connection destination information response frame received in response to that request is stored in a database and displayed on a display unit.12-03-2009
20090300190Data Serialization In A User Switching Environment - A method for sharing a common computing system among multiple users is disclosed. A user can perform a login process during which an input data, such as a user name or a password can be entered by the user to access a session. The user name and/or the password are then serialized into an object or a set of objects. If the serialized object or objects are authentic, a session is created and the session properties of the session are defined. Any applications that are subsequently executed during the session remain active after the session is switched out.12-03-2009
20120185601Method For Optimally Utilizing A Peer To Peer Network - In accordance with an embodiment of the invention, there is provided a method for splitting a load of monitoring a peer to peer network. The method has a first node in the peer to peer network receiving information reported by a second node in the peer to peer network, including information concerning which nodes are connected to the second node. The method further has the first node connecting to nodes different from the nodes that are connected to the second node using the received information. The method still further has the first node reporting information, including information concerning which nodes are connected to the first node, such that the second node also has access to the reported information, thereby splitting the load of monitoring the peer to peer network among the first and second nodes.07-19-2012
20110270997Deferred Invocation of Communication Services - In one embodiment, a network device determines one or more conditions for invoking one or more real applications to the network device for a session. This determination may be made at the initiation of the session, such as when a SIP INVITE message is received. The one or more conditions allow real applications to be invoked when a future event satisfies the condition. When it is determined that a condition is satisfied, a real application associated with the condition is then invoked. Accordingly, conditions may be set for real applications that may be tested against future events that have not yet occurred. This allows deferred invocation of real applications. Accordingly, if real applications are not needed for a session, then they are not invoked. But, when a real application is needed, it can be invoked.11-03-2011
20100281171PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK-TO-NETWORK INTERCONNECTION INTERFACE - An exemplary method includes network elements associated with distinct network domains exchanging signaling and media border processing information by way of a secure packet-switched connection between the network elements, exchanging service policy information by way of the secure packet-switched connection, peering a session associated with a first service type between the distinct network domains by way of a packet-switched network-to-network interconnection interface (“NNII”) in accordance with the exchanged signaling and media border processing information, peering another session associated with a second service type between the distinct network domains by way of the packet-switched NNII in accordance with the exchanged signaling and media border processing information, enforcing a first performance threshold specified by the service policy information for peering the session associated with the first service type, and enforcing a second performance threshold specified by the service policy information for peering the other session associated with the second service type.11-04-2010
20100281168Assymmetric Traffic Flow Detection - Methods, apparatuses and systems directed to detecting, and in some implementations, responding to, asymmetric routing in network deployments. In a particular embodiment, a first process detects asymmetric routing at connection initiation, while the second process can detect asymmetric routing that may after connection initiation.11-04-2010
20100287285CONTROL OF QUALITY-OF-SERVICE PRECONDITIONS IN AN IP MUTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - The invention relates to a method of establishing a session between client user terminals accessing IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, networks. At least one of the IMS networks implements the use of Quality of Service, QoS, preconditions, and at least one of the client user terminals does not use QoS preconditions. The method includes receiving, at an inter-working function, IWF located in one of the IMS networks, an IMS session initiation request originated by an originating client, the request indicating a terminating client for the session. A decision is made, based on the session initiation request, that one of the originating client and the terminating client is not using QoS preconditions. A set of QoS preconditions is inserted into a procedure for establishing the IMS session on behalf of the client that is not using QoS preconditions. Session establishment is completed only after QoS resources complying with the set of QoS preconditions have been established.11-11-2010
20090037587COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Out of data being transmitted from a client application A02-05-2009
20090037589INTERFACE APPARATUS, EXCHANGE APPARATUS WITH THE APPARATUS, AND CONTROL METHOD FOR USE IN THE APPARATUS - According to one embodiment, an interface apparatus includes a connector which establishes connection with a plurality of Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) terminals which each include communication functions defined by SIP and with an SIP network to one port, a first processor which executes exchange processing for the plurality of SIP terminals, a second processor which executes exchange processing for the SIP network, and a sorting unit which sorts a control signal into the first processor or the second processor based on transmission destination identification information or transmission origin identification information in the control signal regarding exchange received by the connector.02-05-2009
20090037588Method And System For Providing Status Information Of At Least Two Related Principals - Methods and systems are described for providing status information of at least two related principals. One method includes establishing an association between a first tuple including a first status for a first principal and a second tuple including a second status for a second principal, where the association includes a relationship indicator indicating a relationship between the first principal and the second principal. A first subscription to the first tuple for receiving the first status for the first principal is provided for a first watcher entity. In response to providing the first subscription, the method includes generating a first notification message including status information comprising at least one of a composite status based on the first status for the first principal, the second status for the second principal and the relationship indicator; and the first status, the second status and the relationship indicator.02-05-2009
20080244075High performance real-time data multiplexer - A method and system for enabling peer computers to communicate with each other is described. Data of varying data types from a plurality of data sources are multiplexed for delivery through at least one common peer connection.10-02-2008
20080244077Methods for auditing peer-to-peer communications in remote device monitoring system and systems thereof - A method, computer readable medium and system for auditing peer-to-peer communications in a remote device monitoring system includes establishing a peer-to-peer communication between at least two computing devices. An auditing system associated with the established peer-to-peer communication is identified and audit information about at least a portion of the established peer-to-peer communication is stored in the identified auditing system.10-02-2008
20080250146METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR APPLICATION OR PROTOCOL VERSION NEGOTIATION - A method for version negotiation between two entities is provided. Described in the context of communication protocol negotiation, an initiating entity proposes an initial communication protocol version to a receiving entity. In response, the receiving entity accepts the protocol version if it is within the range of its supported versions or proposes an alternative protocol version selecting to be either the highest or lowest protocol version supported by the receiving entity. This allows the receiving entity to successfully limit the number of protocol versions it supports and to communicate this restriction in any protocol setting to the initiating entity. The initiating entity then accepts the proposed alternative protocol version. If version negotiation is successful, either the accepted initial version or the accepted alternative version of the communication protocol is used for the duration of the communication session between the initiating entity and the receiving entity.10-09-2008
20080250145APPARATUS AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIA FOR RECOVERABLE WORKFLOW - Improved methods for providing recoverable workflow of complex and/or risk-prone workflows in a computer system or computer network include segmenting such workflows into sub-processes, associating a checkpoint with the end of each sub-process, and determining whether processing of each sub-process was successful. If so, a set of parameters is stored at each checkpoint before processing the next sub-process, but otherwise processing of the failed sub-process is retried, using the parameter set stored at the previous checkpoint. In one embodiment, the methods are implemented by a certified messaging capability that guarantees delivery of any message. In the event a hardware or software failure occurs during a sub-process execution, the certified messaging capability returns a failure indication, so that execution of the failed sub-process can be reinitiated. Improved computers and computer networks for providing recoverable workflow are also described.10-09-2008
20080250144METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION OF CONTENT DATA - Provided are a method and apparatus for controlling transmission of content data. In the method, a communication channel is initially established to transmit the content data, the content data is transmitted through the established communication channel, verification is performed a plurality of times to determine whether the content data is transmitted within an acceptable transmission range, and whether to continue the transmission of the content data is determined according to the verification result. Accordingly, when a client moves to a location outside a predetermined acceptable transmission range in a wireless environment, a server stops transmission of the content data. In addition, content data can be continuously transmitted regardless of interference caused by a temporary obstacle between a server and a client.10-09-2008
20100138545STREAMING MEDIA - A method for providing a session invitation protocol (SIP) session between a first and a second entity. An SIP session is established between the first and second entity. At least one media stream is transmitted from the first entity to the second entity. At least one of transmission, storage and play back of the at least one media stream is controlled in the SIP session at the first and/or second entity.06-03-2010
20100138544METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DATA PROCESSING - A computer-implemented method, system and computer program product for protecting data being transferred during a session with an application are presented. In response to receiving a session request that includes an application identifier for an application, a data processing node establishes a session with the application and assigns a session identifier for that session. A session response, which includes the session identifier, to the session request is sent. In response to receiving a first request that includes the session identifier, a first pipe in the session is established. This first pipe enables data related to the first request to be isolated according to an assigned first pipe identifier for the first pipe. A first response to the first request is sent, wherein the first response comprises the session identifier and the first pipe identifier.06-03-2010
20110202664Method and Apparatus for Mobility Agent Recovery - Techniques for recovering Mobile Internet Protocol (IP) session(s) of a mobility agent in a Mobile IP network are described herein. In one embodiment of the invention, for each mobility session associated with a mobility agent, the mobility agent distributively backs up mobility agent specific information to the mobility agent peer associated with that mobility session. The mobility agent specific information is not used by the mobility agent peer. Upon the mobility agent inadvertently losing at least one mobility session, the mobility agent recovers the stored mobility agent specific information associated with those sessions from the mobility agent peers respectively associated with those sessions. Other methods and apparatuses are also described.08-18-2011
20090265471METHOD, SYSTEM, SERVER AND TERMINAL FOR PROCESSING MESSAGE - A method, a system, a server, and a terminal for processing message are described. The method includes the steps as follows. A notification message for requesting to establish a session sent by a session requester is received, in which the notification message carries session management information related to the session. The session management information of the session in the notification message is acquired, and a session connection with the session requester is initiated according to the session management information. Alternatively, the notification message is acknowledged according to the session management information, a reply message is generated according to an acknowledgement result, and the reply message is sent to the session requester. In embodiments of the present invention, a Data Synchronization (DS)/Device Management (DM) server determines problems of the sent notification message according to the information returned from the terminal, so as to perform the further processing, thereby preventing the DS or DM server from blindly and repeatedly sending the notification message when not being informed that a session connection is established by a DS or DM terminal.10-22-2009
20090265470Gesturing to Select and Configure Device Communication - Described is a technology by which a gesture made with a source device (e.g., a cellular telephone), such as a throwing or pointing motion, is used to automatically set up a connection with another device to which the gesture is directed. Audio signals output during the gesture, e.g., such as at the start and end of the gesture, are detected by candidate (listening) devices. The device having the least time difference between detection of the start and end signals is the device that is generally best aligned with the throwing or pointing motion, and thus may be selected as the target device. Once selected, a connection such as a network connection may be set up between the source device and the target device for further communication, such as for application data exchange.10-22-2009
20080281970METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR INTEGRATING HETEROGENEOUS SYSTEMS - Disclosed are a method, computer program product and apparatus for integrating resource and coordinator components in a heterogeneous computer system. The technique disclosed involves the introduction of a negotiation phase into the resource enlistment or registration process wherein the resource component and coordinator component request and respond with indicators showing the quality of service that each supports, thus jointly establishing at runtime a quality of service to be supported for the resource and coordinator pairing. The qualities of service may include commit phase support and recovery support.11-13-2008
20080288644System and Method for Creating Global Sessions Across Converged Protocol Applications - A system and method for creating global sessions across different protocols and multiple converged protocol applications are provided. By creating a global session, state information for each of the individual protocol sessions may be communicated across protocols and utilized in performing operations across converged protocol applications. An edge server is used at the edge of a data network to correlate client interactions over different protocols and to associate them with a global session. The edge server acts as a session reference counter for individual client sessions that are part of a larger global session. The global session is created after the creation of the first protocol session and exists across the creation of future sessions on other protocols and other converged applications. Logical names and global session tokens are utilized to manage the various global sessions handled by the edge server.11-20-2008
20100005176METHOD AND DEVICES FOR RESOURCE ALLOCATION - The present invention is related to a method for establishing a communication session between a client and a server. The method comprises the steps of 01-07-2010
20080313336METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PHONE APPLICATION STATE MANAGEMENT MECHANISM - A phone application state management mechanism is described. The mechanism adopts the state storage format widely known as “Cookies” to store information in a cross-application standard format. Cookies for multiple users are stored on a single machine that retrieves phone applications using a hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP). Suitable state information for a particular user is automatically retrieved in connection with HTTP requests. Further, by phone based applications can set the values of suitable cookies. An enforced access policy can be used to prevent an application provided by a first legal entity from accessing state information stored by an application provided by another legal entity. The approach can also be used to reduce the passing of telephone identifying information between applications for user identification purposes.12-18-2008
20080313339CONNECTION MANAGEMENT METHOD, SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM PRODUCT - The invention provides a method, system, and program product for managing a connection. In particular, the invention manages connection information in memory based on an expected usage of the corresponding connection. Connection information can be stored in faster memory, such as cache memory, when the connection is expected to have numerous additional messages. Similarly, the connection information for a connection not expected to have many additional messages can be swapped out of the cache memory and stored in relatively slower memory. As a result, the connection information that is more frequently used is more likely to be available in a faster memory.12-18-2008
20080313338METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR INTEGRATING HETEROGENEOUS SYSTEMS - Disclosed are a method, computer program product and apparatus for integrating resource and coordinator components in a heterogeneous computer system. The technique disclosed involves the introduction of a negotiation phase into the resource enlistment or registration process wherein the resource component and coordinator component request and respond with indicators showing the quality of service that each supports, thus jointly establishing at runtime a quality of service to be supported for the resource and coordinator pairing. The qualities of service may include commit phase support and recovery support.12-18-2008
20080313337Method and Apparatus for Creating Dynamic Phone Pages Due to Triggering Events from an External Source - Methods and apparatus for sending a dynamically updated data object to a user of a communication device are disclosed. An exemplary method comprises receiving updated data from an external source at a first communication device and updating a stored data object with the updated data. Upon the occurrence of a trigger, the updated data object, which comprises the updated information, is transferred to a second communication device.12-18-2008
20100281170METHOD FOR SELECTING A POLICY AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION ENTITY IN THE NON-ROAMING SCENARIO - A method for selecting a policy and charging rules function entity in the non-roaming scenario includes the following steps: when a diameter routing agent DRA receives an indication message of the IP connectivity access network IP-CAN session establishment, the indication message is forwarded to a PCRF according to the related relationship which is set up and saved for allocating the policy and charging rules function PCRF entity to the IP-CAN session; and the corresponding policy and charging control PCC policy, which is made for the IP-CAN session by the PCRF, is forwarded to the provider's IP application function AF and the network element, which has policy and charging enforcement function, corresponding to the IP-CAN session.11-04-2010
20080209046HEALTH-RELATED OPPORTUNISTIC NETWORKING - A wireless opportunistic network that can facilitate data transfer by way of interconnected devices is disclosed. In accordance with this opportunistic network, each of the devices effectively contributes to the transfer of the information thereby obviating the need for an external carrier. In this manner, the carrier infrastructure is embodied and distributed throughout the individual devices of the network. In a particular aspect, the opportunistic network is employed to transfer and make available health-related data. This functionality can be used in many scenarios related to heath from, monitoring patients and conveying basic diagnostic data to identifying bioterrorism by way of collaborating data between a number of devices within the network. Essentially, the innovation provides for at least two core functional ideas, the opportunistic network infrastructure and the use of the network in health related scenarios.08-28-2008
20120297077TECHNOLOGIES FOR DETECTING ERRONEOUS RESUMPTIONS IN A CONTINUATION BASED RUNTIME - Technologies for enabling a continuation based runtime to accept or reject external stimulus and, in addition, to determine if an external stimulus may be valid for processing at a later point in execution.11-22-2012
20120297076METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTING POLICY AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION ENTITY - This disclosure discloses a method, an apparatus and a system for selecting a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) entity. The method comprises: when an IP Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session is established for a User Equipment (UE), the Diameter Routing Agent (DRA) receives a message from a gateway, and selects the PCRF entity for the IP-CAN session according to the main identifier in the message, wherein the UEs sharing the subscription information have the same main identifier. This disclosure can solves the problem that a conflict is caused in PCC since different PCRF entities are used for the PCC when multiple users share the subscription information.11-22-2012
20120297074PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZATION IN SCHEDULED TASK PERFORMANCE - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: determining, by the session management node, a next task time for a session; storing the next task time; waiting for a period of time; after waiting, determining whether a task should be performed with respect to the session based on the next task time; and if the task should be performed with respect to the session, sending a message to at least one other node in the subscriber network including an indication that the task should be performed with respect to the session.11-22-2012
20080235381MESSAGE RELAYING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION ESTABLISHING METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A storage unit of a relaying apparatus stores first identification information that identifies an SIP terminal and second identification that identifies other SIP terminal which is forecast as a transfer destination of a message. A transmitting-and-receiving unit receives from the SIP terminal a request message that is received before a transfer message to be transferred to other SIP terminal and that includes a processing request concerning communications and the first identification information. An obtaining unit obtains from a storage unit the second identification information corresponding to the first identification information included in the received request message. A connection establishing unit establishes communications between the other SIP terminal of the obtained second identification information and the relaying apparatus.09-25-2008
20080235380FACTORING OUT DIALOG CONTROL AND CALL CONTROL - Systems, methods, and machine-readable media are disclosed for providing session control and media exchange control that can include and combine, for example, call control and voice access concepts such as dialog (voice dialog, prompts and DTMF) or web/GUI elements. In one embodiment, a method of controlling a media session can comprise establishing a call via a signaling protocol, maintaining control of the call, and passing control of aspects of the call other than call control to a separate media processing module. The media processing module can comprise, for example, a dialog manager. In some implementations a voice access enabler providing a an abstract interface for accessing functions of the dialog controller.09-25-2008
20090313377TRANSFERRING FILES - Systems and techniques for transferring one or more files by connecting to a communications system host; sending, to a client connected to the communications system host, a request to transfer one or more files; when a client permits access to the one or more files, establishing a direct socket connection from the client and bypassing the communications system host; and initiating the transfer of the one or more files from the client over the direct socket connection.12-17-2009
20080209049Systems and Methods for Enabling Communications between Clients and Hosts - Systems and methods for linking clients and hosts, including obtaining, from one or more hosts, information on host attributes of the one or more hosts; obtaining, from one or more clients, information on desired attributes desired by the one or more clients; enabling a comparison of host attributes to desired attributes; and enabling a communication between one or more of the clients and one or more of the hosts and enabling one or more of the clients to issue commands to the one or more hosts and to receive telepresence information from one or more of the hosts.08-28-2008
20110270998Method For Establishing Secure Communication Link Between Computers Of Virtual Private Network - A technique is disclosed for establishing a secure communication link between a first computer and a second computer over a computer network. Initially, a secure communication mode of communication is enabled at a first computer without a user entering any cryptographic information for establishing the secure communication mode of communication. Then, a secure communication link is established between the first computer and a second computer over a computer network based on the enabled secure communication mode of communication. The secure communication link is a virtual private network communication link over the computer network in which one or more data values that vary according to a pseudo-random sequence are inserted into each data packet.11-03-2011
20110270994SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COORDINATING PEER COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS - In accordance with aspects of the disclosure, a method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for wireless communication. The method, apparatus, and computer program product may be configured to provide a first peer connection with a first node, provide a second peer connection with a second node, and coordinate communication between the first and second nodes via the first and second peer connections.11-03-2011
20080201479Associating Virtual Machines on a Server Computer with Particular Users on an Exclusive Basis - A first computer of a plurality of computers in a server computer system may be associated with a first user on an exclusive basis. An administrator of the server computer system may utilize an administrative user interface in order to specify the association. Associating the first computer with the first user on the exclusive basis may prevent users other than the first user from using the first computer. In response to receiving a request from the first user to connect to the server computer system, the system may operate to determine that the first computer is associated with the first user on the exclusive basis and may assign the first computer to the first user. Once the first computer has been assigned to the first user, the first user can begin using the first computer. In some embodiments the first computer may be a physical computer. In other embodiments the first computer may be a virtual machine.08-21-2008
20080288643Session Initiation Protocol Signalling - A method of delivering a copy of a Session Initiation Protocol, SIP, message to each of a plurality of terminals in a multimedia communication system. The method comprises receiving the message at a first SIP exploder, grouping destination addresses defined for the SIP message according to their network domains, and for each group of destination addresses corresponding to a domain associated with a further SIP exploder, forwarding a single copy of the message to that exploder, the message containing all of the destination addresses of the group.11-20-2008
20080270612Enabling secure remote assistance using a terminal services gateway - A secure remote assistance session between computers that are behind firewalls and/or NAT devices is provided by an arrangement that uses a terminal services (“TS”) gateway to enable utilization of a remote desktop protocol (“RDP”) connection by a terminal services client in a reverse direction to that used in a conventional terminal services session. The connection is made via a regular TS gateway protocol mechanism by which the TS client behind a firewall establishes a connection to the remote server that is typically behind a firewall that protects a corporate network. The server then functions as the terminal services client to tunnel RDP data through the established TS gateway connection through the NAT firewall to a client. Thus, the server and client reverse roles after the TS gateway connection is made to thereby enable remote viewing of the graphical user interface that is displayed by the client in support of the remote assistance session.10-30-2008
20080270611Method and Device for Providing Correlation Means in Hybrid Telecommunication Networks - Combinational networks provide simultaneous connectivity via networks of different network type between user equipment. For communication sessions on different network types, belonging to the same user equipment, a correlation check is enabled by introduction of an identifier denoted as Combinational Call Indicator (CCI). This CCI identifier in combination with the known Calling Line Identity (CLI) identifier enables user equipment and other and network entities to perform a correlation check between ongoing, or to be established, CScalls and PS-sessions. A user equipment, setting up a related communication session, sets the CCI identifier and provides the CCI identifier during the communication session setup towards the receiving user equipment or network entity, which is enabled to check whether the last received communication session is correlated to the earlier established session due to the presence of the CCI identifier.10-30-2008
20100138543Real-time content detection in ISP transmissions - A method and system for detecting the transmission of preidentified content, such as copyrighted material, over an Internet Service Provider (ISP) network. A set of rules is provided to identify one or more traffic flow profiles of data streams transmitting preidentified content. Preferably the rules are adaptively created through analysis of actual ISP data in conjunction with data suggesting an initial set of profile characteristics. The rules are applied to data streams being transmitted in the ISP network, so that data streams fitting one or more of the profiles are identified. A database contains, e.g., as digital signatures or fingerprints, one or more items of content whose transmission is sought to be detected. Data streams identified as matching a profile are analyzed to determine if their content matches an item of content in the database, and if so, an action is taken which may include interrupting the transmission, suspending an ISP account, or reporting the transmission. An ISP with a system performing this method may offer services to content providers, and a plurality of ISPs may jointly use a single database of preidentified content to be compared to each ISP's identified data streams.06-03-2010
20090031027Relationship-Centric Portals for Communication Sessions - Relationship-centric resources are provided to users during a communication session. After establishing a communication session between a first communication device and a second communication device, content that meets a content descriptor is retrieved. This content descriptor describes a nature of a relationship between users of the first and second communication devices. The retrieved content, which meets the content descriptor, is then simultaneously displaying on both the first communication device and the second communication device.01-29-2009
20110270995CORRELATING COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - The present invention relates to a session handling entity and an application server (AS) in a communication system, the session handling entity (S-CSCF) is obtaining, from a register entity, a correlation identity for a registering private user identity of a user, transmitting the correlation identity as part of a registration procedure to the application server, and the application server initiates, based on a received session request associated with the user, at least one session request towards corresponding number of devices of the user wherein the application server is configured to check the correlation identity to ensure that not more than one session request is initiated for each device of the user.11-03-2011
20090055539AV SERVER APPARATUS AND CONNECTION MANAGEMENT METHOD - In connection management by a conventional server apparatus using IDs, a client apparatus cannot know an attribute of a connection corresponding to an ID. A server apparatus (02-26-2009
20090049180GATEWAY APPARATUS - Even when all of usable sessions are in use, a communication can be established for a new session and the interrupted session is automatically restored. Information on degrees of importance of communication sessions and information of restoration requirement are set in advance and stored in a session importance table in association with identifier (URI) of communication initiating terminals and identifier of destinations of communication. When a connection request for a session having a high degree of importance such as an emergency session is received, the session having the lowest degree of importance is selected and interrupted. Information of the interrupted session such as the communication initiator identifier and the communication destination identifier is stored in a session restoration table. The session is automatically restored as soon as a session resource becomes unoccupied according to the communication initiator identifier and the communication destination identifier stored in the session restoration table.02-19-2009
20090125630METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEFINING A SEARCH WINDOW BASED ON DISTANCE BETWEEN ACCESS POINTS - An access terminal defines a search window based on a distance between access points. Here, a first one of the access points may comprise a macro access point from which the access terminal acquires timing. The search window may be used to monitor for pilot signals from a second one of the access points. For example, the second access point may comprise a femto node that provides relatively small area coverage. In some aspects the definition of the search window may involve adjusting (e.g., advancing) a center of a search window based on the distance between the access points. In addition, the access terminal may employ a smaller search window when it is searching for pilot signals from a femto node as compared to when it is searching for pilot signals from a macro access point.05-14-2009
20110270991ESTABLISHING A REMOTE DESKTOP - A method includes receiving an IP address via a non-IP protocol communication interface, the IP address associated with an operating system environment established on a computing device; storing the received IP address in memory; responsive to a cessation of communication via the non-IP protocol communication interface, accessing the IP address stored in memory and transmitting the accessed IP address via an IP protocol network interface; and receiving information via the IP protocol network interface, the information issued by the operating system environment established on the computing device associated with the IP address. Various other apparatuses, systems, methods, etc., are also disclosed.11-03-2011
20110208868PROACTIVE PRE-PROVISIONING FOR A CONTENT SHARING SESSION - An apparatus includes a communication interface and a controller associated with the communication interface where the controller is further configured to determine an affinity between a first device and at least one other device and create, based at least in part upon the determined affinity, one or more pre-provision packages. These pre-provision packages include data likely to be shared in the event that a content sharing session is ultimately entered into. The one or more pre-provision packages are then provided for storage upon at least one of the first device and the at least one other device. Then, when a request from the first device to engage in a content sharing session with the at least one other device is received, access to the one or more pre-provision packages is provided to at least one of the first device and the at least one other device.08-25-2011
20090164642METHOD AND INTERNET PROTOCOL TELEVISION (IPTV) CONTENT MANAGER SERVER FOR IPTV SERVICING - There is provided a method and an Internet Protocol Television (IPTV) content manager server for IPTV service. The server comprises a Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) stack adapted to request an establishment of a first RTSP session with an IPTV media server responsive to an IPTV service request from an Internet Protocol Television Terminal (ITF). The RTSP stack stores an identifier of the first RTSP session responsive to the request for the establishment of the RTSP session. Subsequently, the RTSP stack receives an RTSP session initiation message from the ITF requesting an establishment of an RTSP session. Upon receipt of the message, the content manager server authenticates the message, determines the existence of an existing RTSP session for the ITF, and thus acts to discard the session initiation message received from the ITF and to return the identifier of the first, already established, RTSP session.06-25-2009
20120198079PARALLEL TRANSMISSIONS OVER HTTP CONNECTIONS - One example embodiment includes a system for transmitting data from a source system to a target system over an HTTP network. The system includes a user client, where the user client receives data to transmit from a source system to a target system. The system also includes a source tunnel. The source tunnel is configured to receive the data from the client and break the data into pieces for individual transmission. The source tunnel is also configured to establish a plurality of connections with a target system and transmit the pieces of the plurality on connections.08-02-2012
20080320147METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POLICY-BASED PACKET CLASSIFICATION - A method, apparatus, and computer implemented instructions for processing a request in a data processing system. The request is received. In response to a first hash value being present within the request, the first hash value is compared to a second hash value that was computed locally, wherein the second hash value represents a current policy configuration for assigning a quality of service. In response to a match between the first hash value and the second hash value, other information in the request is used to establish a quality of service for packets associated with the request.12-25-2008
20090138603PROTECTION FOR DIRECT LINK SETUP (DLS) TRANSMISSIONS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for establishing direct link setup (DLS) connections between stations in a wireless local area network (WLAN). The DLS connections may be established in a manner that helps avoid collisions with transmissions from hidden stations.05-28-2009
20090177779Methods and Apparatus for Randomization of Periodic Behavior in Communication Network - A technique for use in a client, wherein the client supports a state-based signaling protocol (e.g., Session Initiation Protocol or SIP), includes initiating a given session state between the client and a server that also supports the state-based signaling protocol, and refreshing the given session state in a randomized manner. Further, a technique for use in a server, wherein the server supports a state-based signaling protocol (again, e.g., SIP), includes randomly assigning an expiration time duration for a given session state between the server and a client that also supports the state-based signaling protocol, and reporting the randomly assigned expiration time for the given session state to the client. By randomizing various behaviors of the client, the server, or both, bursty traffic in the communication network is reduced or eliminated.07-09-2009
20090164639INTEGRATED WEB PORTAL FOR FACILITATING COMMUNICATIONS WITH AN INTENDED PARTY - Described are a system and method for presenting, to a first user, information about a second user to enable the first user to select an appropriate communication means for communicating with the second user. A service node receives from a web browser executing at a communication device used by the first user a request for a web page associated with the second user. The service node collects information related to a current status of activity of the second user, determines one or more options for establishing communications with the second user, and transmits to the first user the web page having the current activity of the second user and the one or more communications options.06-25-2009
20090164643System and Method for Concurrently Utilizing Multiple System Identifiers - System and method for providing access to multiple wireless service providers (WSPs) on a shared network infrastructure. The system includes a plurality of access points (APs) coupled to a network which may be distributed in airports, mass-transit stations, businesses, etc. The network may couple to a wide area network, such as the Internet. Each AP may include a plurality of virtual APs (VAPs), each corresponding to a WSP. A portable computing device (PCD) of a user stores identification information indicating a WSP of a plurality of possible WSPs, and which may include an access level of the user. Each AP “listens for” or detects identification information associated with numerous WSPs. When the AP receives the identification information from the PCD, it determines the VAP/WSP for the PCD using the identification information. Network access is then provided to the PCD through the determined WSP at the determined access level.06-25-2009
20090164641Media Toolbar and Aggregated/Distributed Media Ecosystem - A method and network architecture through which user-specific media profile data can be made available to third parties. A browser is optionally enhanced to facilitate playback and control of one or more media players, thereby allowing the user to play content via the browser. As the user plays content in the browser or any of the media players, information is collected about the content and stored in a database. By monitoring all media-related interactions made by the user within the browser, the collected content information can encompass information from a wide range of sources. User-specific profile data is then determined based on the collected data and such user-specific profile data is made available to third parties. The user-specific profile data can be used, for example, for social networking purposes, and may also be used to drive advertisements or other content to the user.06-25-2009
20090144430System and Method for Dynamic Negotiation of Device Name with Wildcard Character - A method and system for dynamically negotiating a device name for establishing a communications session between a host computer and a client computer are provided. A host computer receives from a client computer, a device name that includes as part of the device name at least a wildcard character. The host computer replaces the wildcard character with one or more characters that can be used in device names, to generate a unique device name that is not already being used by the host computer.06-04-2009
20090138606TRANSFERRING SESSIONS BETWEEN DEVICES - Methods and apparatus for transferring a communication and computer session between devices. A user launches a communication session on a first device, such as a personal computer. The user may then selectively transfer the communication session to another device, such as a wireless device, through activation of a triggering signal. In response, the context of the communication session is determined as it is being performed on the first device, including a type of the communication session. The communication session is then transferred to the second device by launching a new communication session on the second device and transferring the context of the communication session corresponding to the first device to the new communication session on the second device. The communications session is continued via use of the first device as a proxy for the second device.05-28-2009
20090049181INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, SESSION RECOVERY METHOD, RECORDING MEDIUM FOR STORING SESSION RECOVERY PROGRAM - An information processing apparatus, a session recovery method and a recording medium for storing a session recovery program are disclosed. According to one aspect of the present invention, even if a session with a server apparatus connected via a network is invalidated, it is possible to resume the session without user's recognition of the session invalidation. The information processing apparatus includes an authentication information maintain part maintaining authentication information supplied to establish the session, a session invalidation detection part detecting that the session is invalidated, and a session recovery part, when the session invalidation detection part detects that the session has been invalidated, requesting the server apparatus to establish a session by using the authentication information in the authentication information maintain part.02-19-2009
20090049178SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MINIMIZING RETRY DELAYS IN HIGH TRAFFIC COMPUTER NETWORKS - A system, method, and program product is provided that requests, by a first computer system, a new network session with a second computer system. The new network session request occurs after a previous network session between the two systems and the new network session request includes a new sequence number that is different from a previous sequence number that was used during the previous network session. The first computer system receives an acknowledgement from the second computer system that references the previous sequence number instead of the new sequence number. In response to receiving the acknowledgement at the first computer system that references the previous sequence number, the first computer system modifies the new sequence number by setting it to a value that is higher than the previous sequence number, and the first computer system re-requests the new network session using the modified new sequence number.02-19-2009
20090177778Session Affinity Cache and Manager - A method and apparatus for managing sessions by a load balancer using a session affinity cache to manage common session identifiers and resource node session identifiers. A session affinity manager within the load balancer utilizes a common session identifier to represent multiple sessions to a client. The session affinity manager provided generates a common session identifier for a set of resource node sessions for each client. The relationship between the resource node session identifiers and common session identifier is maintained in the session affinity cache by the session affinity manager. The session affinity manager translates client requests using the common session identifier into requests using the resource node session identifier retrieved from the session affinity cache. The session affinity manager rewrites resource node responses to use a common session identifier in place of resource node session identifiers.07-09-2009
20090177780Method and apparatus for data processing - According to the present invention, a method and apparatus for data processing is provided for a data processing device comprising an auxiliary execution system, a main execution system, a switch unit and a networking unit. The method and apparatus according to the present invention are capable of establishing a networking data channel between the auxiliary execution system, the switch unit and the networking unit based on a first control instruction for the switch unit; or of establishing a networking data channel between the main execution system, the switch unit and the networking unit based on a second control instruction for the switch unit. In this way, the realization of always online can be guaranteed, and apparently, the user satisfaction can be effectively improved.07-09-2009
20090327497SEAMLESS LOCATION AWARE NETWORK CONNECTIVITY - Described is a technology by which a seamless automatic connection to an (e.g., corporate) network is made for a client device. Upon detecting a need for a connection to a network, such as by intercepting a communication directed towards a network destination, a list of available connection methods is automatically obtained based on the device's current location data (e.g., LAN or remote) and policy information. An available connection method from the list is selected, e.g., in order, and an attempt is made to establish a connection via that connection method. If the attempt fails, another attempt is made with a different connection method, and so on, until a connection method succeeds. Additional seamlessness from the user's perspective is provided via a credentials vault, by which stored credentials may be retrieved and used in association with the access method being attempted.12-31-2009
20090055537COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, TERMINAL SWITCHING SYSTEM, AND TERMINAL SWITCHING METHOD - A transfer-source terminal, a communication-destination terminal, and a nearby terminal existing in the neighborhood of transfer-source terminal are provided. The nearby terminal collects connectivity information for monitoring connectivity after terminal switching by performing a communication process with the communication-destination terminal, and transmits the connectivity information collected to the transfer-source terminal. The transfer-source terminal receives connectivity information from the nearby terminal by a connectivity information receiving unit, determines a transfer-destination terminal from among the nearby terminals according to connectivity information by a transfer-destination terminal determinating unit, and transfers a communication session with a communication-destination terminal to the transfer-destination terminal determined, by a session transferring unit.02-26-2009
20090144429Method and Apparatus for Identifying an IMS Service - An apparatus and method for indicating the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) services to which a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message relates. One or more communication service identifiers are added to the SIP message as a Feature Tag.06-04-2009
20090144428Method and Apparatus For Multimodal Voice and Web Services - This invention is based on being able to locate a voice server, temporarily allocate it, send it the audio of you saying “When is flight 683 due to arrive?”, getting the results of what you said back in the browser, and deallocating the voice server for use by the next person talking into their browser. Voice channels and IVR ports are initially set up by a switch and the IVR using conventional audio protocols. The Voice channels are not initially connected to the client. The switch handles the allocation and deallocation of IVR voice channels without having to communication further with the IVR. A user indicates (usually by pressing a PTT button) to the client device that he wishes to initiate a voice interaction during an X+V session. This translates to a request on the CTRL channel to synchronise the XHTML and VXML forms which the embodiment uses as a trigger for the VXML browser to execute a conversational turn. The multiplexer intercepts this control command and connects the virtual voice circuit between the device and an existing open but unattached voice port. The virtual circuit is connected without having to set up an RTP channel. The CTRL signal is then forwarded to the interaction manager so that the conversation can take place. At the end of the conversation the virtual circuit is disconnected.06-04-2009
20090006631Media Stream Scheduling for Hiccup-Free Fast-Channel-Change in the Presence of Network Chokepoints - An implementation, as described herein, facilitates fast start-up of a new media stream while avoiding temporal interruption (i.e., “hiccups”) of the presentation of that new media stream. At least one implementation, described herein, coordinates the delivery of multiple simultaneous media streams on a media-stream network. Its coordination accounts for traversal of bandwidth-restricted chokepoints; quickly stopping delivery of one or more media streams from the set of streams; quickly initiating delivery and presentation of one or more new media streams not previously in the set (i.e., a “channel change”); and producing clean playback of all of the streams in the set, despite their different timelines. This abstract itself is not intended to limit the scope of this patent. The scope of the present invention is pointed out in the appending claims.01-01-2009
20090006628SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE PRESENTATION OF DYNAMIC INFORMATION TO A MOBILE DEVICE - The present disclosure relates generally to systems and methods for controlling the presentation of dynamic information to mobile devices. In one example, the method includes receiving status information from a mobile device indicating that the mobile device is available to receive advertisement information and receiving device information from the mobile device identifying at least one device parameter of the mobile device. Advertising content to send to the mobile device is identified and access information for the advertising content is embedded in a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message that is send to the mobile device. The SIP message is generated based at least partly on the device information.01-01-2009
20110225302PARALLEL STREAMING - Embodiments of the present invention set forth techniques for a content player to stream a media file using multiple network connections. To stream the media file, the content player downloads metadata associated with a requested media file, establishes a network connection with multiple content servers (or multiple network connections with a single content server or both) and begins requesting portions of the media file. In response, the requested portions are transmitted to the content player. The content player may employ a predictive multi-connection scheduling approach to determine which network connection to use in downloading a given chunk.09-15-2011
20090024745SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING NETWORK CONNECTION - A portable router for enabling a data communication terminal to be location and device transparent includes: a first module for storing a digital communication address of a user; a second module for detecting a data communication network location to which the terminal is connected; a third module for detecting communication devices that are connected to the terminal; a fourth module for establishing data communication between the terminal and the network such that the communication address of the location from the second module is automatically converted to the communication address of the user from the first module; and a fifth module for automatically selecting a communication device which was detected by the third module for use by the fourth module.01-22-2009
20110225307APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REDUCING RESPONSES WHEN EXECUTING A SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL OPERATION - An apparatus and method for reducing responses when executing a session protocol operation is disclosed. In accordance with an embodiment of the disclosure, a mobile device generates a binary encoded message having an indication from which a server can determine a session protocol operation to be performed without communicating all responses for the SIP transaction. The binary encoded message is sent from the mobile device and received by the server. In accordance with an embodiment of the disclosure, the server determines, based on the indication in the binary encoded message, the SIP transaction to be performed without communicating all SIP responses relating to the SIP transaction. The server then attempts the SIP transaction. By reducing the number of SIP responses, communication resources for the mobile device can be conserved. Also battery power for the mobile device can be conserved apparatus and method for reducing responses when executing a session initiation protocol operation09-15-2011
20110225306METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR TRIGGERING A SERVICE NODE TO INITIATE A SESSION WITH A POLICY CHARGING AND RULES FUNCTION - According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a method for initiating a session. The method includes steps occurring at a policy charging and rules function (PCRF) node. The method also includes determining, independent of contact from a service node, that the service node requires policy information. The method further includes in response to determining that the service node requires policy information, communicating a session independent trigger message to the service node, wherein the trigger message comprises information instructing the service node to initiate a session with the PCRF node to obtain the policy information from the PCRF node.09-15-2011
20110225303FCIP COMMUNICATIONS WITH LOAD SHARING AND FAILOVER - An IP gateway device establishes distinct TCP sessions within a single FCIP tunnel, each TCP session being designated for a different priority of service (e.g., high, medium, low), plus a control stream. Each TCP session has its own TCP stack and its own settings for VLAN Tagging (IEEE 802.1Q), quality of service (IEEE 802.1P) and Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP). By distributing data streams assigned to different priorities of service into different TCP sessions within the FCIP tunnel, an IP gateway device can preserve the distinctions between the data stream priorities while the data traffic is within the IP network. By further distributing the data streams between different circuits and trunks by use of multiple circuits, failover and load balancing can occur within the FCIP tunnels.09-15-2011
20110145417COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE CONNECTION CONTROL METHOD - There are provided a portable terminal device and a communication device connect control method that enable lessening of a time for waiting device search processing and processing for acquiring a DDD or an SDD of a normally-connected device. A device connect management unit 06-16-2011
20090198818Terminal apparatus and recording medium on which program is recorded, as well as reconnection process method, in information distribution system - To provide a terminal apparatus and a program thereof, as well as a reconnection process method, in an information distribution system which enables a swifter completion of a reconnection process in the information distribution system. The terminal apparatus includes a connection condition detection module which detects that it has become necessary to reconnect to another terminal apparatus different from an apparatus connected upstream in a hierarchical structure, a connection process module which, on detecting that the reconnection has become necessary, starts a process of connecting to another terminal apparatus configuring the hierarchical structure, a connection request module which, on detecting that the reconnection has become necessary, requests of an apparatus connected downstream a process of connecting to another terminal apparatus configuring the hierarchical structure, and a reception control module which, on the connection process of the apparatus connected downstream finishing before the connection process using the connection process module finishes, receives information with the apparatus connected downstream as an upstream apparatus.08-06-2009
20090198817SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR VIRTUAL SERVER MIGRATION ACROSS NETWORKS USING DNS AND ROUTE TRIANGULATION - A first virtual server is moved from a first network location to a second network location without interrupting service to users of the first virtual server. The state and data of the first virtual server are copied and transmitted to the second network location to create a copy of the first virtual server. The first virtual server copy is then updated to duplicate the first virtual server and all connections or packets directed to the first virtual server are intercepted and directed to the first virtual server copy at the second network location. A DNS entry for the symbolic name of the first virtual server is updated to reflect a shortened TTL value and then the address field of the DNS entry is set to the address of the first virtual server copy after the changeover and subsequent connections are directed to the first virtual server copy.08-06-2009
20090083427COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RELAY APPARATUS, RELAY METHOD AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - The communication system includes: an apparatus that mounts a processing unit which executes transmission and reception of a signal with an external apparatus and which processes the received signal; and a relay apparatus that relays transmission and reception of a signal between the external apparatus and the apparatus. The relay apparatus is provided with: a transmission and reception unit that receives a signal from the external apparatus and transmits a signal to the external apparatus; an analysis unit that analyzes whether or not the signal received by the transmission and reception unit is a signal to be processed by the processing unit of the apparatus; and a determination unit that determines whether or not to execute transfer processing of the received signal to the apparatus based on a result of the analysis by the analysis unit.03-26-2009
20090049179Establishing of a semantic multilayer network - A semantic multilayer network is established, wherein a first layer in said semantic multilayer network including tag annotations, and a second layer in said semantic multilayer network including data structured by an ontology, are established and wherein the first layer and the second layer are connected. Thus, connecting of two entirely different worlds of the dynamic, emergent “social tagging” (e.g., web applications like Web 2.0) and of the regular “ontology engineering” (e.g. Semantic Web) data, dynamic data tag annotations and ontology, seen as too opposed or conflictive, therefore being treated separately and independently so far, becomes possible. Here, by utilizing advantages of both worlds, computer aided handling of large amounts of data, including e.g. processing, management, or querying of data, becomes considerably efficient and effective, wherein said data may be distributed in different areas, locations, or systems.02-19-2009
20090055538Content commentary - Techniques involving content commentaries are described. In an implementation, a commentary is made at a client during output of content. The commentary is to be output concurrently with a subsequent output of the content. A communication is formed that includes the commentary to be communicated over a network such that the commentary is available to be output at another client.02-26-2009
20090282154CONTROL SYSTEM AND CONTROL METHOD, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING INFORMATION, INFORMATION PROCESSING TERMINAL AND METHOD THEREOF, STORAGE MEDIUM, AND PROGRAM - A client (such as a PC, portable telephone, PDA, electrical appliances), to which a device such as a IC card is connected, starts a handshake protocol to request a server to start communication. When communication is established via the handshake protocol, the initiative of communication is transferred to the server, and the state changes into a neutral state. In this neutral state, a control packet including a particular number of messages and a finished message is transmitted from the server to the client. If the client receives the control packet, the client performs a process according to the messages included in the control packet. This makes it possible to remotely control a device via a network in a highly reliable and efficient manner.11-12-2009
20090063685SECURE COMPUTER WORKING ENVIRONMENT UTILIZING A READ-ONLY BOOTABLE MEDIA - A read-only bootable media is provided in which a remote agent loads the read-only bootable media onto a computer. The read-only bootable media provides a customized operating system that is run in the computer's volatile memory. The read-only media also disables any persistent storage connected to the agent computer or devices connected to the agent computer. This protects the agent's computer and any networks that the agent connects to from malicious software. Also, by disabling persistent storage, confidential information is protected from unauthorized retention by the agent.03-05-2009
20090063686AUTOMATED SERVICE DISCOVERY AND DYNAMIC CONNECTION MANAGEMENT - In some embodiments, an apparatus includes device functional circuitry to perform at least one service; and network interface control circuitry to control interaction between the apparatus and a network. The network interface control circuitry includes a service discovery module to (1) send a presence announcement message to be transmitted outside the device to let other devices outside the device know of services the device may perform and (2) to receive presence announcement messages from the other devices outside the device to learn what services to the other devices may perform. In some embodiments, the network interface control circuitry includes a dynamic connection management module. Other embodiments are described and claimed.03-05-2009
20090055536SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PLUG AND PLAY BETWEEN HOST AND CLIENT - A host client plug-and-play system and method capable of controlling a client at the same time that the client is connected to a host through wired/wireless communication means are provided. The host client plug-and-play method in a host client communication system where at least one client is controlled by at least one host, includes: (a) a step of performing device connection between the client and the host; (b) a step of performing communication compatible operation step between the client and the host; (c) a step where the host receives a device driver and control software for allowing the host to identify and control the client; (d) a step where the host installs the received device driver and control software; (e) a step of performing device identification and communication compatible operation between the host and the client by using the device deriver installed in the host; and (f) a step where the host controls the client by using the control software installed in the host.02-26-2009
20090083426 METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR ENABLING MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION - A method and arrangement in a multimedia gateway connected to a multimedia service network, for providing access to multimedia services for communication devices connected to a private network. The multimedia gateway may include a device database, a communication unit and a logic unit. A service identity is associated with the multimedia gateway and is valid in the multimedia service network. When a session request is received, a session is established on behalf of at least one device in the private network using said service identity and capabilities of said at least one device. Thereby, no individual service identity is necessary for the selected device(s). If the session request is a session invitation of an incoming request, said at least one device is selected based on capability requirements for the session.03-26-2009
20120079122DYNAMIC SWITCHING OF A NETWORK CONNECTION BASED ON SECURITY RESTRICTIONS - Systems and methods for providing access to an enterprise network from a remote computer are described. In one example, a system includes a mobile device configurable for connection to the remote computer, the mobile device adapted to establish secure communication to the enterprise network and a connection server application located on the mobile device for receiving a request from the remote computer specifying a location and a connection path and selectively providing to the remote computer access to the enterprise network via the mobile device based on the request. Other implementations are possible.03-29-2012
20120079121System and method for dynamic adaptive player cells for multi-player environments - There is provided a system and method for dynamic adaptive player cells for multi-player environments. There is provided a method comprising establishing connections to host clients over a network, evaluating matching criteria to assign the clients to player cells, reevaluating the matching criteria to determine client transitions of the clients within the player cells, and sending, using the connections, data of the client transitions to output a visual translation of the client transitions to displays connected to the clients. By continually reevaluating the matching criteria and reconfiguring the composition of the player cells using low cost distributed server infrastructure, users may be optimally matched to the most relevant and interesting users. Additionally, by using the visual translation to depict the client transitions in a natural looking manner, the operation of the player cells can be made transparent to users, thereby removing interface complexity and attracting novice users.03-29-2012
20120079120CONTENT SHARING FOR SOCIAL ENGAGEMENT - A user is provided the ability to request through a set top box or other terminal that a media session be replicated to another terminal. The control channel associated with the replicated media session is assigned to the requesting terminal so that the user of the requesting terminal can control the playback experience of a plurality of different terminals.03-29-2012
20120079119INTERACTING WITH CLOUD-BASED APPLICATIONS USING UNRELATED DEVICES - Systems and method provide logic facilitating an interaction between a networked server and multiple, unrelated devices. In one implementation, a computer-implemented method enables a user of a device to interact with or control multiple, unrelated devices across a could computing environment using a networked server. The method includes receiving, at the networked server, an instruction from the control device. A corresponding instruction understandable by an unrelated controlled device is generated by the networked server, and the corresponding instruction is operable to cause the controlled device to perform the received instruction. The networked server may transmit the corresponding instruction to the controlled device.03-29-2012
20080263211SYSTEM AND ARTICLE OF MANUFACTURE FOR CONTROLLING CLIENT ACCESS - Provided are a method, system, and article of manufacture, wherein in certain embodiments a request is received to initiate a session. A determination is made whether the session should be initiated with addressing information provided by a client. The session is initiated with trusted addressing information corresponding to the client, in response to determining that the session should not be initiated with the addressing information provided by the client.10-23-2008
20080263210Method and System for Notifying Updating of Terminal Capability Information for Combination Service - A method and system for notifying updating of terminal capability information for a combination service for simultaneously performing two or more services between first and second users are disclosed. Each terminal recognizes whether or not its terminal capability information has been updated to inform the other terminal accordingly when the first service for the combination service is connected. When a terminal, which has received update indication information informing that the terminal capability information has been updated, request and obtains the updated terminal capability information from the other terminal.10-23-2008
20080263209Active-active operation for a cluster of SSL virtual private network (VPN) devices with load distribution - A method of load distribution for a cluster of two or more nodes. The method comprises receiving an initial request packet on a network device having a virtual IP address; forwarding the request packet from the network device to a cluster of at least two nodes, wherein each of the at least two nodes has an internal dispatcher module and an unique and non-conflicting virtual IP address; establishing one of the at least two nodes as a priority dispatcher or dispatcher endpoint, wherein if any one node fails, the virtual IP address of the one node which is no longer active falls back to another node within the cluster based on cluster priorities; dispatching the request packet to one of the nodes associated with the cluster; and forwarding the request from one of the nodes to a switching device.10-23-2008
20110231558Method and Apparatus for Establishing a POC Session - According to a first aspect of the present invention there is provided a method of establishing a Push-to-talk over Cellular (PoC) communication session between an inviting PoC client and at least one invited PoC client using an IP Multimedia Subsystem network. The method comprises using the pre-established session procedure to negotiate media parameters between the inviting PoC client and a participating PoC server for the inviting PoC client. At the inviting PoC client, sending a Talk Burst Control Protocol (TBCP) or Media Burst Control Protocol (MBCP) message directly to its participating PoC server, the TBCP or MBCP message containing the PoC address of the at least one invited PoC client. At said participating PoC Server, in response to receipt of the TBCP or MBCP message, generating a SIP INVITE message and sending the SIP INVITE message towards a participating PoC server for the at least one invited PoC client.09-22-2011
20110231557Automatic Notification System and Process - Receiving a notification message by a mobile subscriber can include establishing a session with a notification service; maintaining a persistent communication connection with the notification service after the session is established; subscribing to a node hosted by the notification service, wherein the node is pre-provisioned for use by a mobile subscriber; and receiving from the notification service a notification message corresponding to the subscribed node. Further, a message can be transmitted over the communication connection to the notification service at a predetermined interval and it can be determined whether the communication connection is viable. Additionally, it can be determined that the communication connection is no longer viable if no response is received from the notification service, the period of the predetermined interval can be decreased, and another session with the notification service can be established.09-22-2011
20110231556USING A PROPERTY OF A RECEIVED SIGNAL TO DETERMINE A DEVICE FOR FORMING A NETWORK CONNECTION - The described embodiments include an electronic device that uses a property of received signals to determine another device for forming a network connection. During operation, the electronic device receives a signal from each of two or more other devices. The electronic device then compares a property of each received signal to the other received signals to determine a signal that has a property most like a target property. Next, the electronic device selects the other device that was the source of the determined signal and forms the network connection with the selected other device.09-22-2011
20090210536METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR FACILITATING TRANSFER OF SESSIONS BETWEEN USER DEVICES - Methods and systems for facilitating transfer of an active session from a first device to a second device associated with the same user. A network server is configured to enable the switching or swapping of an active session from one device to another device, where both devices are associated with a common user address. The switching or swapping is implemented with no or minimal effect on the active session or awareness of the remote party. The device switch may be performed in relation to any active session, including VoIP, video conferencing, or other media sessions.08-20-2009
20090204712Content Aware Routing of Subscriptions For Streaming and Static Data - The invention relates to integration of streaming data, and more specifically relates to subscription routing: distributing the load of streaming data subscriptions across multiple servers in a session-oriented client-server architecture. In one embodiment the invention provides, in a client-server architecture, a method of implementing the client-side architecture whereby a logical connection and session may be mapped to one or more physical connections and sessions. The invention provides mobility of subscriptions from one physical session/connection to another based on directives from a server; and further permit a client to blend multiple physical subscriptions for different data streams into a single logical data stream based on directives from a server.08-13-2009
20090106430SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A SHARED I/O SUBSYSTEM - A computer system that includes a plurality of servers, and a shared I/O subsystem coupled to each of the servers and to one or more I/O interfaces. The shared I/O subsystem services I/O requests made by two or more of the servers. Each I/O interface may couple to a network, appliance, or other device. The I/O requests serviced by the shared I/O subsystem may alternatively include software initiated or hardware initiated I/O requests. Different servers coupled to the shared I/O subsystem may use different operating systems, and each I/O interface may be used by two or more servers.04-23-2009
20090222563Method of Establishing a Connection on a Communication Network - A method of establishing connections between at least a first and a second terminal on a communication network includes: sending to the second terminal a network signal requesting the network availability to establish the connection and a terminal signal requesting the availability of the second terminal to run an application exchanging data between the first and second terminals; receiving at the second terminal the network signal and the terminal signal; and sending on the network a response signal carrying information based on the network and terminal signals and assuming a content corresponding to the availability/unavailability of the network to establish the connection combined the availability/unavailability of the second terminal to run the application.09-03-2009
20120198078ADAPTIVE NETWORK COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES - Adaptive network communication techniques are described. In one or more implementations, a determination is made by a client device that a request, which is to be communicated to a content provider via a network, is for content that is accessible via the content provider upon authentication of credentials transmitted to the content provider from the client device. Responsive to the determination, an initial communication is formed by the client device for receipt by the content provider that includes the credentials without waiting for the content provider to request the credentials from the client device.08-02-2012
20090248881Method, Server And System For Controlling A Virtual Role - A method for controlling a virtual role includes: initiating, by a source virtual role client, a virtual role trip request carrying an identification of a destination virtual role client to a control server on the network side; establishing, by the control server, a session between the source virtual role client and the destination virtual role client, and sending attribute information of the virtual role to the destination virtual role client through the network; displaying, by the destination virtual role client, the virtual role in a local user interface. Structures of the control server and systems for controlling virtual role are also provided. According to the present invention, a virtual role of a source virtual role client can make a trip to a destination virtual role client through the network without relying on a user client.10-01-2009
20090248880DIGITAL BROADCAST SERVICE METHOD AND SYSTEM - A method and system for providing digital broadcast services are disclosed. The digital broadcast service method, using a service server and user terminal, includes establishing connections between a user terminal and a service server through a wireless network and a broadcast distribution system, performing, by the user terminal, service registration through the wireless network, purchasing, by the user terminal, a broadcast service from the service server through the wireless network, transmitting, by the user terminal, an authentication key request for the purchased broadcast service through the wireless network, and releasing the connection made through the wireless network after one of the performing of the service registration, the purchasing of the service, or the transmitting of the authentication key request.10-01-2009
20090248878AGGREGATING CONNECTION MAINTENANCE TO OPTIMIZE RESOURCE CONSUMPTION - Combining network connection maintenance operations that use a resource to extend battery life. Each of the network connections has a timer and a defined tolerance for early connection maintenance. After receiving notification of an event, the network connections are accessed to identify the connections for which a maintenance operation may be performed early based on the timer and the tolerance. In an embodiment, the maintenance operation includes sending a transmission control protocol (TCP) keep-alive packet on the connection.10-01-2009
20090248879System and method for collecting, cataloging, and sharing product information - In accordance with the principles of the invention a network based social cataloging service is provided that automatically catalogs product information for products that a user views while “window shopping” on the network for retrieval at a later time. Further in accordance with the principles of the invention, a network-based community is provided where a user's cataloged information saved while window-shopping, is shared with other members of the community.10-01-2009
20100274902System and Method for N-Way Communication with and between Locking/Unlocking Morphing Game Peripherals - A system and method for actuating a visible persistent physical change to a game peripheral during interaction with an online game server having multiple game states. The method includes steps for establishing a connection between a game peripheral and an online game server, associating the game peripheral with at least one game state, retrieving from the online game server at least one bit for downloading to the game peripheral, and actuating at least one electro-mechanical component of the game peripheral for morphing the game peripheral. Morphing of the game peripheral produces at least one visible persistent change to the game peripheral, including locking or unlocking components of the game peripheral, changing physical shape, or other mode of changing the visible appearance of the game peripheral. Some embodiments include a second game peripheral for communicating state to a first game peripheral, and actuating an electro-mechanical component of the first game peripheral.10-28-2010
20090240814Unified pairing for wireless devices - A framework for users to connect to wireless devices, regardless of the underlying wireless technology. The framework has a modular structure, including discovery handlers, pairing handlers, and pairing ceremony modules. Discovery and pairing handlers are specific to each wireless technology, enabling discovery of wireless devices, and connection to the device. Pairing ceremony modules are technology independent, and may be invoked by any pairing handler, regardless of the wireless technology employed by a device. The framework provides an aggregation of wireless technologies into a common user interface, improving the user's experience and expanding possibilities for use of wireless technologies.09-24-2009
20090282152METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING COUNTERFEITING OF A NETWORK-SIDE MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL ADDRESS - A method and apparatus is provided for preventing the counterfeiting of a network-side Media Access Control (MAC) address. The method includes: receiving a message from a user equipment (UE) and resolving the message from the UE in order to obtain a MAC address of the UE; learning the MAC address of the UE if the MAC address of the UE is different from a known MAC address of a network-side equipment; learning the MAC address of the network-side equipment; and generating a MAC address learning table by utilizing the learned MAC address of the network-side equipment and setting the MAC address learning table to be a static address table, and/or filtering messages having source MAC addresses being the MAC address of the network-side equipment and from other user-side ports by utilizing the learned MAC address of the network-side equipment.11-12-2009
20090144431GUARANTEED QUALITY MULTIMEDIA SERVICE OVER MANAGED PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK OR NGN - Methods and systems are provided for guaranteed quality multimedia service over managed peer-to-peer networks (also known as super peer-to-peer, sP2P, networks). A managed peer-to-peer network (06-04-2009
20090254664SESSION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - A session management system enabling network resources to be efficiently utilized or saved when communication addresses are assigned to a network interface. The system manages sessions between a server having a plurality of addresses and a client. It is determined, in a case where an application provided with the client requests to communicate with the server, whether or not a session in which an address different from an address designated by the application is used is already established between the client and the server. The application is caused to communicate with the server by using the already established session when it is determined that the session is already established, and communicate with the server by using a newly established session when it is determined that the session is not established.10-08-2009
20090013079Disconnecting selected participant in multicast session - A slow client that participates in a reliable multicast session may reduce the speed of data transfer for other clients in the session. A multicast server can mitigate the effect of a slow client by identifying and disconnecting one or more clients that are slowing down the session, or by using other criteria to identify clients to be disconnected. The server may monitor the performance of clients in the session based on factors such as the rate at which each of the clients is able to receive data, the number or rate of packets lost by a client, the amount of time that a client has spent as the slowest client in the session, the identity of a particular client, etc. A client that has been identified for disconnection based on the server's detection efforts, or that has been identified by an administrator, may be disconnected.01-08-2009
20100180037Method and apparatus for optimizing and prioritizing the creation of a large number of VPN tunnels - There is provided a communications network including a server forming part of a virtual private network, a plurality of client computers operative to request connection to the server and to be connected to the server when a request for connection is granted, thereby to be added to the virtual private network and a server response module, operative, in response to a connection request from at least one of the plurality of client computers which connection request cannot be processed by the server, to provide to the at least one of said plurality of client computers a server response indicating that the connection request should be retransmitted only after at least one criterion is met.07-15-2010
20100153561 METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OUT-OF-BAND SIGNALING FOR TCP CONNECTION SETUP - Embodiments of this invention improve TCP performance over unreliable links and allow TCP connections to be set up when otherwise not possible. Embodiments of this invention include the use of out-of-band signaling for TCP to synchronizing and establishing a connection between two TCP endpoints without modification to the TCP/IP protocol suite. Embodiments of this invention provide a system that creates a control channel to enable out-of-band signaling for TCP connection establishment between two TCP endpoints. In embodiments of this invention, the control channel used for the out-of-band signaling traffic between the TCP endpoints (or peers) is achieved using a system that consists of a signaling broker, an agent application, and a virtual network interface and capture module that together create control channel for the TCP signaling traffic. Embodiments of this invention include a protocol to execute out-of-band signaling for TCP.06-17-2010
20100153560PROTOCOL AND SYSTEM FOR FIREWALL AND NAT TRAVERSAL FOR TCP CONNECTIONS - Embodiments of this invention provides a system and a protocol to enable two transmission control protocol TCP peers that exist behind one or more firewalls and network address translators NATs to automatically setup a true peer-to-peer TCP connection and exchange data without making changes to the firewall or NAT devices or existing TCP-based applications. In embodiments of this invention, the synchronization between the blind TCP peers is achieved using a system that consists of a registration server, an agent application, and a virtual network interface that together relay and replicate the control signals between the two TCP peers. In addition, embodiments of this invention are also used to traverse the NAT and establish a bi-directional peer-to-peer TCP connection in the firewall.06-17-2010
20080307096Using a remote handheld device as a local device - A data connection can be established between a handheld device (e.g., a mobile phone or smartphone) and a computerized second device. For example, an action associated with a keyboard scancode can be mapped to a key on the keypad of the handheld device. A key press on a keypad of the handheld device can be translated into key press data. The key press data can be sent to the second device over the data connection, causing the action to be executed on the second device.12-11-2008
20100161808IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS AND SERVICE PROVIDING METHOD - An image forming apparatus, comprising a communication interface unit to communicate with outside, a plurality of web-based applications to use web page information received via the communication interface unit, and a control unit to provide service on an open platform having a web server which shares session information of each of the plurality of web-based applications. Accordingly, session information can be shared between web-based applications.06-24-2010
20100161807METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADDRESS BOOK UPDATES - A method comprises receiving an indication of a list of contacts in an address book to receive an automatic update; submitting a subscription request for the contacts; receiving updates for contact information for the subscribed contacts; and synchronizing the updates with the address book, wherein the synchronizing includes synchronizing only the updated contacts.06-24-2010
20130219070RESOLVING DEVICE SPECIFIC IDENTIFIERS TO A USER IDENTIFIER TO INITIATE A DIALOG ESTABLISHMENT WITH DEVICES OF A USER - Systems and methods are described that allow a calling party to establish a dialog, or attempt to establish a dialog, with multiple devices associated with the party being called, even when the calling party does not know a user identifier associated with the multiple devices. A calling party may provide a device specific identifier, which can be resolved to a user identifier associated with the multiple devices.08-22-2013
20100185769Methods for Downloading a File to Consumer Electronic Devices via a Peer-to-peer Network - This invention relates to methods for downloading a user requested file via a peer-to-peer network, comprising the steps of: generating a second queue for containing one or more trying-to-connect peers, a third queue for containing currently-connected peers, and a forth queue for containing previously-connected peers; requesting from said servers one or more available peers, wherein said available peers having one or more blocks of said user requested file; placing said available peers in said second queue; connecting to the peers in the second queue, wherein upon successfully connecting to a peer in the second queue, placing such peer in said third queue; and downloading one or more blocks from the peers in said third queue.07-22-2010
20100262700DISTRIBUTED CALL SERVER SUPPORTING COMMUNICATION SESSIONS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - An apparatus, method, and computer program manage communication sessions that include a plurality of portions. Different processors handle each portion of a communication session. The apparatus, method, and computer program transfer the communication session from one of the processors to another of the processors during the different portions of the communication session.10-14-2010
20120198080Method of Performing Multiple Connection and Related Communication Device - A method of performing multiple connections for a vehicle head unit in a telematic system is disclosed. The method comprises assigning at least one internet protocol (IP) address to at least one mobile device (MD); and connecting to the least one MD.08-02-2012
20080215740SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A DESTINATION NUMBER UPON RECEIVING A DIALED NUMBER FROM A CALLING PARTY - A method, system and computer program for utilizing destination information stored in a database are disclosed. The database is queried for information about a service located at a destination, and location information of a requesting party is determined. Routing information is determined based upon the location information of the requesting party and the destination information of the service. The routing information is utilized to establish a route between the requesting party and the destination of the service.09-04-2008
20080215739Marketing Method and Communication System for Implementing the Marketing Method - In one aspect, a database in which target subscribers of different subscriber classes that can be reached via a communications system are allocated, and one respective marketer is assigned to each of the subscriber classes. When the communications system establishes a first communications relation between a first subscriber and a target subscriber while using a destination address given by the first subscriber, the subscriber class of the target subscriber is determined based on the destination address. The determination of the subscriber class results in the establishment of a second communications relation between the first subscriber and a marketer assigned to the determined subscriber class.09-04-2008
20100262697A METHOD FOR EVENT PACKET HANDLING - A method of delivering information from a Notifying node of a SIP/IMS network to a Watcher Client, via an intermediate Watcher Proxy. A connection is established between the Watcher Proxy and the Watcher Client, using a SIP session, wherein the established connection is used for forwarding a request for a SIP subscription to the Watcher Proxy as an embedded SIP subscribe message. Once a backend SIP subscription has been setup between the Watcher Proxy and the Notifying node, SIP notify messages delivered from the Notifying node will be forwarded from the Watcher Proxy to the Watcher Client via the established connection, thereby separating SIP subscribe traffic from SIP control traffic.10-14-2010
20100185773ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND BASE STATION FOR MAINTAINING A NETWORK CONNECTION - An electronic device and wireless base station for maintaining a persistent connection are provided. In an embodiment, a system includes an electronic device that connects to a web-server via a physical link that is bandwidth-constrained. The physical link also includes a wireless base station and at least one network address translation (“NAT”) router that is configured to terminate idle connections between the client and the web-server. One of the electronic device and the wireless base station is configured to send keep-alive packets to the web-server in order to reduce the likelihood of the NAT router terminating the connection. The keep-alive packets are sent on a variable basis that is intended to reduce bandwidth consumption while ensuring that the NAT router does not deem the connection idle and terminate the connection.07-22-2010
20100185772METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING SERVICE INTERACTION IN THE IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - A method for implementing service interaction in the IP multimedia subsystem is disclosed in the present invention, wherein each service logic has a unique service identifier. The method comprises the following steps: (a) a Serving-Call Session Control Function (S-CSCF) sends a session initiation protocol (SIP) request message to the service capability interaction manager (SCIM) or to the application server (AS) to which a user requests for a service; (b) after the AS or SCIM has received the request and has executed this service, it inserts the service identifier of this service into the SIP request, and returns the SIP request with the service identifier to said S-CSCF. With the present invention, most of the service interaction requirements can be satisfied.07-22-2010
20100185770PRESENCE CAPABILITIES AND PREFERENCES - Architecture for gathering and presentation to a remote user (watcher) of presence, preferences, and capabilities information of a local user (publisher). An extensible presence document is employed, as transmitted by the publisher, that contains specific information about the capabilities of the publisher endpoint and preferences that are for the publisher overall. The document is aggregated, and the aggregated capabilities are transmitted to watchers. The watchers render this information in a user experience.07-22-2010
20100262699SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING TRUST FOR SIP MESSAGES - A method for performing initial registration is provided. The method includes receiving a server timeout message, the server timeout message including at least a field set to a value equal to a value received during a first registration. The method further includes initiating restoration procedures by performing an initial registration.10-14-2010
20100262698METHOD FOR NEGOTIATING REDUNDANT TRANSMISSION - The present invention provides a method for negotiating redundant transmission during IP bearer establishment and modification processes, wherein the method of negotiating redundant transmission in the establishment process comprises: an IP bearer control module judges whether a proactive MGW supports redundant transmission; a bearer establishment request tunnel message is carried with redundant transmission parameters and sent to a reactive media gateway of two media gateways; the reactive media gateway resolves the bearer establishment request tunnel message and sends a reactive end bearer establishment request to a RTP/IP protocol processing module via the IP bearer control module, and the IP bearer control module sends a bearer establishment response tunnel message carrying a redundant transmission parameter to the proactive media gateway; and the proactive media gateway sends a proactive end bearer establishment request to the RTP/IP protocol processing module via the IP bearer control module so as to realize a bearer connection between the proactive end media gateway and the reactive end media gateway.10-14-2010
20100262696PAIRING SYSTEM, PAIRING MANAGEMENT DEVICE, PAIRING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - To provide a pairing system which requires no special hardware and is capable of easily pairing terminals intended by a user. A pairing management device includes a pairing control module which receives pairing requests from communication terminals and data terminals, and generates tentative pairs from the communication terminals and the data terminals which transmitted the pairing request, and a confirmation data control module which allots and transmits pair confirmation data which corresponds on one-on-one basis to the communication terminals and the data terminals forming the tentative pairs, and allows the pairing control module to update the tentative pairs to final pairs when the pairing control module receives pair alteration data corresponding to the pair confirmation data from the communication terminals or the data terminals.10-14-2010
20100161809METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR REGULATING NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATOR (NAT) AND FIREWALL PINHOLE PRESERVATION TRAFFIC IN A SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) NETWORK - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for regulating pinhole preservation traffic generated or received by firewall or network address translator (NAT) session initiation protocol (SIP) user agent clients (UACs) are disclosed. One method includes, maintaining a list of contact information for a plurality of SIP UACs registering from behind at least one of a firewall and a NAT. The method further includes iterating through the list to generate SIP messages to the different UACs such that the SIP messages to the different UACs are spaced at substantially regular intervals with respect to each other, wherein the SIP messages to the different UACs trigger responses from the UACs such that the responses are spaced at substantially regular intervals with respect each other.06-24-2010
20090300188WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD FOR DISCONNECTION PROCESS THEREOF, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A wireless communication apparatus (for example, a wireless LAN access point) sends to an opposite apparatus during connection (for example, a wireless LAN terminal) advance notice of disconnection that notifies disconnection to a transmission frame before sending a disconnection frame (a deauthentication frame). After the advance notice of disconnection, the disconnection frame is sent and a disconnection process is executed. Since advance notice of disconnection is executed before the disconnection frame is sent, unless the wireless communication apparatus or the opposite apparatus during connection receives advance notice of disconnection before the disconnection frame is received, the disconnection frame is ignored, that is, disconnection frames from apparatuses except the apparatus during connection is ignored, then, illegal connection disconnection can be prevented.12-03-2009
20100228865Method And System For Administering A Concurrent User Licensing Agreement On A Manufacturing/Process Control Information Portal Server - Disclosed is a server that provides session-persistent concurrent licenses for resources accessed by clients. In one embodiment, rather than requiring a license when the server is initially accessed, a license is not requested until a client seeks access to a licensed resource. In one implementation, scripts for Web pages associated with licensed resources include requests for licenses from a license management facility. Certain resources conditionally request a license based upon the origin of the access request: the license request may be bypassed for access requests from “pre-licensed” applications. Session-based licensing allows equitable assessment of compensation to a service provider for use of the services. The server includes many resources, some of which require a license for access while others do not. The services of premium value are the only ones for which customers are expected to obtain/claim a license.09-09-2010
20120246325NETWORK NODE AND METHOD TO CONTROL ROUTING OR BYPASSING OF DEPLOYED TRAFFIC DETECTION FUNCTION NODES - A network is described herein which can control, through subscriber profile data and/or policy preconfigured control data, whether deep packet inspection for data flow/s for an Internet Protocol-Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session established by an end user should take place, or not, according to a defined “User Privacy Policy”, and, in the former case, to which traffic detection function (TDF) node the data flow(s) should be directed.09-27-2012
20100250752COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD OF STARTING COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus, comprising has a generator which generates format information of a start instruction message, a memory which stores the format information, a communication unit which transmits the format information and receives a start instruction message via a network, and a controller which detects whether or not the received start instruction message corresponds to the format information stored in the memory, and performs start processing and initialization processing based on a content of the start instruction message when the received start instruction message corresponds to the format information.09-30-2010
20100153559Method and Apparatus for Suspending Network Based Services - Disclosed is a method for de-registering user equipment from a network in response to notification that the user equipment will cease using network services. An Interruption Service Manager (ISM) notifies the network to suspend services as the IMS network conditions or the user equipment conditions change. The ISM may also notify the user equipment to re-register onto the IMS core network when the connection is re-established.06-17-2010
20100146125Communication Method Capable of Connecting With a Communication Application Service and Gateway Thereof - A communication method capable of connecting with a communication application service for an Internet protocol private branch exchange includes establishing a communication channel in the Internet protocol private branch exchange, transmitting a communication message to a channel proxy through the communication channel, and starting to communicate with the communication application service according to the communication message and transmitting the communication message to the communication application service.06-10-2010
20090077239SERVER APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL, ELECTRIC APPLIANCE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A server apparatus, a mobile terminal, an electric appliance, a communication system, a communication method and a program for notifying a mobile terminal user in the open of the cause of a failure of P2P connection. In a communication system, an electric appliance (03-19-2009
20090077242METHOD, TERMINAL, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR OBTAINING ID INFORMATION OF APPLICATION SERVICE - The present invention discloses a method, a terminal, a device, and a system for obtaining ID information of an application service to solve the problem of the prior art that a terminal cannot automatically obtain the ID information of a target application service. In the invention, a first device sends an ID request to a second device, and the second device returns the ID information of the target application service to the first device. By the technical solution of the invention, a terminal which acts as the first device may automatically obtain the ID information of the target application service, and the user experience satisfaction is improved.03-19-2009
20090077241METHOD OF FORWARDING/SHARING SERVICE AND DEVICE OF ENABLING THE METHOD - A terminal apparatus for forwarding/sharing a data service is provided. The terminal apparatus for forwarding/sharing the data service includes a service receiver to receive the data service from a service provision apparatus; a connector to perform a connection with a corresponding terminal; and a service forwarding unit to forward the data service to the corresponding terminal via the connection with the corresponding terminal03-19-2009
20090077240METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING A MOBILE SERVER - Methods and apparatus are provided for transmitting data to a client device from a computer module in a vehicle. Data is transmitted from the computer module over an in-vehicle network to an in-vehicle communications gateway module. The data from the computer module is destined for the client device. A request for a software component is transmitted to the client device from a standard port of the in-vehicle communications gateway module. The software component comprises a non-standard transfer protocol module. The in-vehicle communications gateway module loads the non-standard transfer protocol module, and the data is exchanged between the in-vehicle communications gateway module and the client device according to the non-standard transfer protocol.03-19-2009
20100228864SERIAL DEVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - The serial device management system is a new and innovative method of aiding the deployment and troubleshooting of POS terminals serially connected to IP enabled devices. Various messages and other data may be sent through a pipe from the IP enabled device to a serially connected POS terminal. This will allow the POS terminal to behave as if it has a direct IP connection.09-09-2010
20100241752PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DOWNLOADING A FIRMWARE LOADER FROM A HOST COMPUTER - A method for downloading a firmware loader from a host computer to a portable electronic device establishes a communication connection between the host computer and the portable electronic device. Transmission parameters between the portable electronic device and the portable electronic device are configured. The firmware loader is transmitted from the host computer to the portable electronic device according to the transmission parameters. The firmware loader is verified, where the portable electronic device obtains a start address of the firmware loader.09-23-2010
20100228866METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZING DATA, SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS THEREOF - A method for synchronizing data is disclosed: a synchronization initiator sends a synchronization session request to a synchronization recipient to create a synchronization session connection with the synchronization recipient; and a synchronization process is started in the synchronization session, and the synchronization initiator synchronizes data with the synchronization recipient through the synchronization process. A synchronization process is started in the synchronization session, and the synchronization initiator synchronizes data with the synchronization recipient through the synchronization process, thus synchronizing the data between both parties flexibly.09-09-2010
20100250753PARTIAL SESSION TRANSFER METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR THE SAME - A session transfer procedure not for all ongoing multimedia components but for some media components in a wireless communication system and an apparatus for the same are provided. In a partial session transfer procedure, a user equipment establishing a first session to transmit a plurality of media components transmits a partial attach request message to a mobility control entity of a network core. The partial attach request message may be an attach request message whose attach type is set to ‘partial handover’. Upon receiving an attach accept message containing information regarding a gateway of the network core from the mobility control entity, a second session is established with the gateway by using the gateway information. After the establishing of the second session, the user equipment does not release the previously established first session. The user equipment transmits partial session transfer information indicating a media component to be transmitted using each of the first session and the second session among the plurality of media components to a counterpart user equipment, and thereafter exchanges multimedia data with the counterpart user equipment through both of the first session and the second session on the basis of the partial session transfer information.09-30-2010
20120036270IP Multimedia Subsystem User Identity Handling - A method of handling IP Multimedia Public Identity registration within an IP Multimedia Subsystem network. The method comprises receiving at a Call Session Control Function a SIP REGISTER message including a completed IP Multimedia Public Identity Attribute-Value-Pair and no IP Multimedia Private Identity. The method further comprises deriving at the Call Session Control Function an IP Multimedia Private Identity using the IP Multimedia Public Identity and sending a Cx query from the Call Session Control Function to a Home Subscriber Server, the query including the IP Multimedia Public Identity and the derived IP Multimedia Private Identity. The Home Subscriber Server identifies a subsubscription using the IP Multimedia Public Identity, and determines that the derived IP Multimedia Private Identity is not associated with said subscription. The HSS the identifies a default IP Multimedia Private Identity associated with subscription associated with said subscription, and returns a Cx response to said Call Session Control Function including said default IP Multimedia Private Identity. The Call Session Control Function uses the received, default IP Multimedia Private Identity to further handle said SIP message.02-09-2012
20100235518CONNECTION TO MULTIPLE ACCESSORIES WITH MULTIPLE ACCESSORY-SPECIFIC PROTOCOLS - Embodiments of the present invention provide various communication techniques for communication between a mobile computing device and an accessory. An accessory protocol that is generic to the mobile computing device can be used for some communication. An application executing at the mobile computing device can communicate with the accessory using an application communication protocol. In some embodiments, the application communication protocol can be different from the accessory communication protocol. In other embodiments the application protocol may only be recognized by the application and the accessory. In some embodiments, messages conforming to an application protocol can be communicated between the application and the accessory by packaging the messages inside a message conforming to the accessory communication protocol.09-16-2010
20100235516COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SERVER - A SOAP-SIP adapter 09-16-2010
20100235517INTELLIGENT ROUTING OF COORDINATED AUDIO, VIDEO, WEB SERVICES AND MEASUREMENT DATA STREAMS - A system may receive a request from a client station to communicate with any available expert that matches at least one criterion. The system determines an identity of an expert station associated with an expert matching the at least one criterion. The system may then establish a session between the client station and the expert station, where the session includes a first connection and a second connection, the first connection is for transmission of audio/video, and the second connection is for transmission of telemetry data during the transmission of the audio/video. The telemetry data is measured at the client station.09-16-2010
20100235514Securing a network connection by way of an endpoint computing device - Methods and apparatus involve securing a network connection by way of mobile, endpoint computing assets. The endpoints have one or more pre-defined security policies governing the connection that are balanced against competing interests of actually maintaining connections between devices, especially in WiMAX, MANET, MESH, or other ad hoc computing environments where poor security, signal strength, fragile connections or mobility issues are of traditional concern. In this manner, connections will not be lost over security enforcement in an otherwise hostile environment. The security policies are enforced in a variety of ways, but may be altered to lesser policies or not-so-strictly enforced so as to maintain satisfactory connections between devices. Other embodiments contemplate analyzing connectivity components before connection and selecting only those components that enable full or best compliance with the policies. Still other embodiments contemplate altering connections in order to maintain full enforcement of policies. Computer program products are also disclosed.09-16-2010
20100235515Method and apparatus for managing connection - A method and apparatus for managing connection is disclosed, which is capable of realizing an efficient management through a bi-directional connection, the method comprising pairing two uni-directional connections between a receiver and a transmitter, if Internet service to be provided requires bi-directional data delivery capability; and creating a second uni-directional connection by assigning the second uni-directional connection at the time of creating a first uni-directional connection for the Internet service, wherein the first uni-directional connection is opposite to the second uni-directional connection.09-16-2010
20100228862MULTI-TIERED SCALABLE MEDIA STREAMING SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Embodiments disclosed herein relate generally to systems and methods for delivering a scalable media stream from a media server to a media client, wherein thinning is performed at more than one location in the network between the media server and the media client. The system includes at least a session management node located close to the media server, and a client management node located close to the media client. The session management node receives the scalable media stream from the media sever and performs steady state thinning on the scalable media stream to produce a session media stream. The client management node receives a client input media stream, which is at least a portion of the scalable media stream, and performs dynamic thinning on the client input media stream to produce a client output media stream that is streamed to the media client.09-09-2010
20100217873METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SIP ACCESS TO MEDIA AND CONFERENCES - A method and system for SIP access to media and conferences using a Media Server provides multiple connections to a resource while at the same time releasing the connection from the Media Server, therefore minimizing resources required on the Media Server and providing an increased number of connections. A method for providing media services may comprise receiving a request for media services from an initiating client device at a Media Server, determining, at the Media Server, a type of media resource needed to service the request and selecting a Resource Server based on the determined type of media resource, and establishing, by the Media Server, a media service connection between at least the initiating client device and the selected Resource Server to provide the requested media service, wherein the established media service connection does not include the Media Server.08-26-2010
20100211686User Plane Control in IMS - From a user a request for a session is received. Information on an access network via which the request is received is determined. A media type or an application requested in the request is determined. A decision on media path handling is made based on the information on the access network determined and the media type or the application determined.08-19-2010
20100211685PAIRING EXCHANGE - A computing device capable of communicating over multiple types of communication channel pairing data for use with a further type of communication channel, the device being arranged to communicate pairing data with another device in response to a pairing stimulus and to communicate that pairing data over each of said multiple types of communication channel.08-19-2010
20100211684METHOD AND COMMUNICATIONS ARRANGEMENT FOR OPERATING A COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION - The invention relates to a method and a communications arrangement for operating a communications connection between a communications terminal device (KE08-19-2010
20100115100Federated configuration data management - A system, implemented as programming on a processor, and a corresponding method, provide for federating data search functions related to configuration of network objects. The system includes external data stores holding data related to the network objects, a configuration management database (CMDB), and a CMDB server coupled to the CMDB and the data stores. The CMDB server includes a federation engine that identifies network objects and a mapping engine that queries external data stores for reconciliation data and creates relationships between the network objects and federated data.05-06-2010
20100205308METHOD FOR SUPPORTING SESSION MOBILITY - A session mobility support is disclosed. An application server (AS) can accurately recognize a session update by checking a Replace header, a user ID and a media element included in a session invitation message (or an SIP-based INVITE message) received from a UE (User Equipment), to thus guarantee successful mobility of a session. In addition, in order to allow the AS to accurately recognize the session update, the UE first transmits the session invitation message including the Replace header via a PS (Packet Switching domain, and then, after a response to the session invitation message is received, the UE transmits a call setup message (e.g., SETUP message) via a CS (Circuit Switching) domain.08-12-2010
20110238844Connection Management for M2M Device in A Mobile Communication Network - There is provided a method that relates to the setting up and/or maintaining of a connection between a machine-to-machine (M2M) device and a mobile communication network. In order to be able to adapt the connection management to the requirements of the M2M device, the M2M device may transmit an indication that it is an M2M device to the mobile communication network. At least one network node of the mobile communication network controls the setting up and/or the maintaining of the connection based on the indication. The network node may route a request for setting up the connection to a further network node based on the indication.09-29-2011
20100082820System and Method for Off Route Processing - A system and method for off route processing is disclosed. The system and method can be used to provide information when an off route condition occurs. The system and method can include provisions to make modifications in the way navigation information is displayed. The system and method can also provide a selectable re-route mode and selectable re-route information.04-01-2010
20120144046Method, Apparatus, and System for Service Control Via I1 Interface - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, an apparatus, and a system for service control via an I1 interface. The method includes: sending a Session Initiation Protocol Invite message to a user equipment through a Gm interface; if receiving a response message returned by the user equipment, where the response message indicates that the user equipment chooses to use a circuit switched bearer and use an I1 interface for control, sending an I1 Invite message to the user equipment through the I1 interface, where I1 Invite message carries information indicating that Gm interface control falls back to the I1 interface control and information used to associate the Session Initiation Protocol Invite message.06-07-2012
20120144045SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING ONE-WAY REMOTE METHOD INVOCATION FOR SESSION REPLICATION IN A SERVER CLUSTER - A system and method can support one-way Remote Method Invocation (RMI) session replication in a middleware machine environment, such as a server cluster. The server cluster can include a primary application server and a secondary application server. The primary application server receives a request with a session from a client, maintain the session information, and replicate the session information to a secondary application server using one-way Remote Method Invocation (RMI). The primary application server can then respond to the client based on the session information after receiving a return message of the one-way RMI from a network socket associate with the primary application server. The benefit of using one-way RMI is that the primary application server does not have to wait for an acknowledgment from the secondary application server instance, since the underlying transport protocol guarantees that the session data has been successfully transmitted to the second server instance.06-07-2012
20120144044SYSTEM FOR AND METHOD OF DYNAMICALLY DEPLOYING SERVERS - A system for and method of dynamically deploying servers is presented. The system and method may include establishing a communication link with a deployment client workstation, capturing data associated with the deployment client workstation, creating a deployment file based at least in part on the data associated with the deployment client workstation, and providing the deployment file to a deployment server engine via a network.06-07-2012
20100198975Method of Discovering Operator-Provided Network-Services using IMS - A method, a session managing node and an arrangement for providing a network-service address of at least one network-service of an IMS network (08-05-2010
20110066735SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IP SESSION KEEPALIVE USING BFD PROTOCOLS - A network device may include logic to establish an IP session, establish a BFD session within the established IP session, transmit BFD packets within the established BFD session, and determine that the established IP session is active based upon reception of the BFD packets. In another embodiment, the logic may also determine that an IP session is active using an inactivity timer that may also trigger transmission of BFD packets.03-17-2011
20110066734NETWORK LINKING METHODS AND APPARATUS - The presenting invention relates generally to indirect linking methods and apparatus. One claim recites a method including: a) using a programmed electronic processor, reading an index from color imagery steganographically modulated with the index; b) accessing a database with the index, the database comprising a plurality of records that link an index to a pointer which identifies a remote computer on a network; c) extracting a pointer from the database as a function of the index; and d) using the pointer to establish communication with the remote computer identified thereby. Of course, other combinations are provided and claimed as well.03-17-2011
20110066733INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, DATA ACQUISITION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Provided is a data acquisition method including the steps of selecting a link destination whose display is at least partially located in a region of a display screen corresponding to an operating tool, acquiring, before the link destination is selected, information relating to a layout of a display screen and display control data including at least a structural unit in which the information is written, the display control data and the information existing at the link destination, extracting structural units included in the display control data, in a case the prefetched link destination is selected, generating first structured data by linking the extracted structural units in which information involving script-process isn't written, generating second structured data by linking the extracted structural units, displaying a display screen using the first structured data, and redisplaying, at a stage the second structured data is generated, the display screen using the second structured data.03-17-2011
20110066732INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, DATA ACQUISITION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Provided is a data acquisition method including the steps of selecting one or more of at least one link destination, acquiring, before the link destination is selected, display control data including at least a structural unit in which information relating to a layout of a display screen is written, the display control data existing at the link destination selected in the previous step, extracting structural units included in the display control data before the prefetched link destination is selected, generating, before the prefetched link destination is selected, first structured data for display control by linking the extracted structural units in which information involving script processing is not written, generating, in a case the prefetched link destination is selected, second structured data for display control by linking the structural units, displaying a display screen using the first structured data, and redisplaying the display screen using the second structured data.03-17-2011
20090210538System and Method for Indicating Supported Session Policy URI Schemes Extensions - A method for negotiating a communication protocol for a policy channel. The method comprises a user agent transmitting information related to a plurality of uniform resource identifier (URI) schemes that the user agent supports for communication over the policy channel. The method further comprises the user agent receiving an indication of a selection of one or more of the plurality of URI schemes. The method further comprises the user agent using at least one communication protocol identified by one of the selected URI scheme for communication over the policy channel.08-20-2009
20090259754METHOD FOR IP CAMERAS CONNECTION - The present invention relates to a method for IP Cameras connection, which comprises the following steps: registering a presetting identification code of a IP Camera and an IP address onto a global service system server; transferring one identification code to the global service system server by one user device; making the global service system server check the identification code with the presetting identification code; based on the checking result, transferring the IP address to the user device by the global service system server; if the IP Camera is connected to one IP Sharing device, then the user device is able to communicate information with the IP Camera through the global service system server, to get the actual IP address and port number of the user device for connecting with the IP Camera.10-15-2009
20090254663Prioritizing Network Traffic - Methods and systems for operation upon one or more data processors for prioritizing transmission of communications associated with an entity based upon reputation information associated with the entity.10-08-2009
20090319671REMOTE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD BASED ON CLIPBOARD DATA MODIFICATIONS - A first computer remotely controls, using a remote control application over a network (such as a WAN), a remote session on a second computer over a first network. The disclosed method (as implemented in a first application in the first computer) involves identifying clipboard data (associated with a copy, cut or paste operation) shared between a first and second computer during the remote session, temporarily storing the shared clipboard data, modifying, (via the first application in a unidirectional manner) the clipboard data associated with said environment, wherein the modified clipboard data is extracted by an interceptor associated with the second computer. The second computer, based on a look-up of clipboard values, executes a pre-defined action affecting the remote session, wherein the pre-defined action is different than the copy, cut, or paste operation. After executing the pre-defined action, the clipboard data is restored from the computer storage.12-24-2009
20090319666Method and Apparatus for Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) Based Information Uploading from an Optical Network Terminal (ONT) - Collecting diagnostic information from a remote device in today's networks is limited to system related information. However, of more interest to vendors of commercial products or services is information related to, for example, how their products, services or advertisement are perceived by end users. Accordingly, a method and corresponding apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention are provided that extends the Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) NOTIFY mechanism. Originally defined for server to client or downstream notification of a state of a resource or of an event, the present invention extends this functionality to include uploading information other than a state of a resource or of an event from the client to the server or upstream. As such, information, such as usage behavior of a user, may now be collected to understand end user perception of products, services or advertisements.12-24-2009
20080313334DATA EXCHANGE PROTOCOL ENHANCEMENT TO QUERY OBJECT PERMISSIONS - Systems and methods are provided to view the properties/attributes of a selected or specified object in the Object Exchange (OBEX) environment. A field, e.g., a Permissions field, is included in a GET request, where the field includes a header portion, e.g., a Permission header set to an arbitrary value.12-18-2008
20090319672Method and Apparatus for Browsing Using Multiple Coordinated Device Sets - Systems and methods for navigating hypermedia using multiple coordinated input/output device sets. Disclosed systems and methods allow a user and/or an author to control what resources are presented on which device sets (whether they are integrated or not), and provide for coordinating browsing activities to enable such a user interface to be employed across multiple independent systems. Disclosed systems and methods also support new and enriched aspects and applications of hypermedia browsing and related business activities.12-24-2009
20090319669METHOD AND DEVICE FOR EDITING WEB CONTENTS BY URL CONVERSION - It is possible to provide a method and device for enabling a WEB server having no WEB edition system inside to edit and update WEB contents directly from a WEB browser by converting and accessing a disclosed WEB contents public URL. For this, a relay server is installed for mediating between a WEB server having file transfer means, such as FTP, and a WEB browser for browsing the WEB contents. By converting the disclosed URL of the contents from the WEB browser based on a predetermined procedure, the connection destination is switched from the WEB server to the relay server. The relay server specifies the WEB server and the positions of the contents data according to the URL accessed by the WEB browser and relays the contents date acquisition and storage for the WEB server in accordance with a request from the WEB browser. Moreover, the relay server provides the WEB browser with an application for editing the contents. Thus, it is possible to acquire, edit and update the contents.12-24-2009
20090138604SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DELIVERING DIGITAL CONTENT - A system for delivering digital content to user devices. The system includes a content delivery server for establishing respective sessions with the user devices and for delivering streams of content to the user devices during the sessions according to a streaming protocol. An asset server is communicatively coupled to the content delivery server through an asset protocol for maintaining an asset scheduling table including asset entries, each asset entry including an asset identifier identifying a given asset in association with a starting time parameter, user identifiers identifying at least one target user device, and a set of session identifiers each identifying a session established with a target user device identified by the user identifiers. The content delivery server inserts, for each asset entry in the asset scheduling table, and for each session identified by a session identifier in the asset entry, the asset identified by the asset identifier of the asset entry into the stream of content delivered during the session, at a predefined insertion time.05-28-2009
20090113060Systems and Methods for Seamless Host Migration - Systems and methods of the present invention for maintaining network data distribution are provided. Network data may be distributed in such as manner as to allow a network session to weather interrupted communications between host and clients without significant loss of data. Embodiments of the present invention provide for one or more clients to serve as backup host(s) for the network session. When the other clients transmit data to the host, they may also transmit the data to one or more backup hosts if there are any indications of interrupted communication.04-30-2009
20090113059METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PEER TO PEER LINK ESTABLISHMENT OVER A NETWORK - A method and apparatus for linking to a Peer-to-Peer (“P2P”) network for VOIP communications. An intermediary peer creates a map to link peers together in the P2P network. A series of messages are generated to open the ports of one peer to be accessible to other peers on the P2P network. Peers are then enabled to communicate directly with other peers. Steward peers can assume the functionality of the intermediary peer.04-30-2009
20090113058Terminal server draining - Techniques are described for managing and controlling connections of server sessions, including systems and methods for managing and controlling connections to a server computer. Connections are monitored to a server computer depending on a “drain state” of the server computer. If the server is in drain mode, requests to initiate a fresh session with the server computer are rejected, or deferred until the server computer comes out of the drain state.04-30-2009
20080275992SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MANAGING CONNECTIONS BETWEEN A COMPUTING SYSTEM AND AN AVAILABLE NETWORK USING A CONNECTION MANAGER - In one aspect, a method of enabling an execution thread of an application running on a communication device to access a communication service is provided. The method includes selecting a connection profile that supports the communication service and attaching the execution thread to a data channel associated with the connection profile. In another aspect, a computing device is provided capable of running an application having one or more execution threads and communication capability. The computing system or device comprises connection management logic including a database for storing a plurality of connection profiles, server logic adapted to receive a request from the application for a communication service, select a connection profile from the database that supports the requested communication service, and attach one of the one or more execution thread of the application to a data channel associated with the connection profile, and a user interface enabling user input for modifying the plurality of connection profiles.11-06-2008
20080270613Method of Processing a Contact for a Mobile Device and Related Device - To add a contact to a mobile device, the mobile device displays a login screen for a first online service, logs into the first online service based on a username and password, retrieves a contact list from the first online service which has a first contact identifier, utilizes the first contact identifier as a search term for finding a second contact identifier on a second online service, and adds the contact including the first contact identifier and the second contact identifier to the mobile device.10-30-2008
20090106427MOBILE SERVER WITH MULTIPLE SERVICE CONNECTIONS - A method of communicating between a mobile communications device and a plurality of services that are used by the mobile communications device. The method includes establishing, through a firewall and a wireless network, a first communications session between the mobile communications device and a mobile server located in an enterprise network with which the mobile communications device is associated; and establishing, concurrent with the first communications session at least one further communications session between the mobile server and a service, the at least one further communications session being established by the mobile server as a session proxy for the mobile communications device.04-23-2009
20090106426METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MODEL-BASED PAGEVIEW LATENCY MANAGEMENT - Within exemplary embodiments of the present invention a methodology for response time management for a web page-view download operation is provided. The methodology providing a server-side approach for optimizing weighted, per class, client perceived web page-view download response time. Further, a model for monitoring web page-views download latency in real-time based upon the behavior typically seen from conventional web browsers.04-23-2009
20100306386PARAMETERIZABLE SELECTION OF A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ON THE BASIS OF NAME RESOLUTION MECHANISMS - The invention relates to a method for establishing a communication link between a communication system and a remote station by means of a communication network, whereby, in the context of the communication link, a parameterized selection of a remote station is made from several available remote stations by utilizing the name resolution mechanism. The communication forms a logical name with the help of parameters used for selecting a remote station or embeds the parameters in a logical name and transmits the formed logical name to a name resolution mechanism located in the communication network. The name resolution mechanism selects a remote station on the basis of the afore-mentioned logical name and a selection function and feeds back the communication address thereof.12-02-2010
20100306388INFORMATION PORTAL - A communication system for providing high-speed wireless access to mobile processing systems a stationary transceiver defining an information portal in its immediate vicinity. A local server in communication with this stationary transceiver is configured to respond to a mobile processing-system present within the information portal.12-02-2010
20100306384Multi-directional secure common data transport system - The improved secure common data transport system features a transport bus, a system bus, and agents operating as software or a combination of hardware and software running on connected computers. Each agent contains various lower-level components for internal operations and modules that provide overall functionality. The agent interfaces with other agents via the system and transport busses. To communicate, Data, Control Logic, IO, and Security modules within an agent allow the agent to create a ticket that is formatted in XML and encrypted for security. Agents connect with other agents utilizing a Multi-IO Socket Engine that allows for true multi-directional communications socket connections. Multi-directional communication allows a first agent to communicate with a second agent simultaneously as the second agent is communicating with the first. The overall network configuration is determined by the types of socket connection the agents establish.12-02-2010
20130132588METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SESSION DESCRIPTION FOR A MEDIA SESSION - In one embodiment, a method includes constructing at a source node, a session description pointer to a session description for a media session, inserting the session description pointer in a packet in a media stream of the media session, and transmitting the packet to a receiver node. The session description pointer is configured for use in obtaining the session description by an intermediate node located between the source node and the receiver node. An apparatus is also disclosed.05-23-2013
20100312898PUBLISH/SUBSCRIBE NETWORKS - A method of making data, published on a first publication/subscribe (pubsub) network, available to hosts within a second publication/subscribe network where the networks are interconnected via the Internet. The method comprises registering a publication identity of said data within a rendezvous system located within the Internet, forwarding Subscribe requests associated with said publication identity from said second network to said rendezvous system and, at the rendezvous system, identifying a location of said data within said first network. The Subscribe request can then be forwarded to said first network, and said data delivered from said first network to said second network via the Internet.12-09-2010
20090070473Method for Data Routing in Networks - An integrated security system integrates broadband and mobile access and control with conventional security systems and premise devices to provide a tri-mode security network having remote connectivity and access. The integrated security system delivers remote premise monitoring and control functionality to conventional monitored premise protection and complements existing premise protection equipment. The integrated security system integrates into the premise network and couples wirelessly with the conventional security panel, enabling broadband access to premise security systems. Automation devices can be added, enabling users to remotely see live video or pictures and control home devices via a personal web portal or other client device. Camera management enables automatic configuration and management of cameras in the premise network. The camera management extends to remote control and monitoring from outside the firewall of the premise network to include routing of images or video from a streaming source device to a requesting client device.03-12-2009
20090070472AUTOMATIC AND SECURE CONFIGURATION OF WIRELESS MEDICAL NETWORKS03-12-2009
20090070471Method for recovering a video-on-demand session - The present invention relates to a method for recovering a downloading section that has been interrupted, in a device comprising an interface with a network enabling access to a remote server and means for implementing a downloading session with the said server, comprising the steps for starting up a downloading session of a content from the remote server, by means of more than one signalling channel with at least the said server, detecting a premature interruption of the downloading session, verifying the availability of all the channels, as long as one of the channels is unavailable, the session is not recovered and when all the channels are again available, the session is recovered.03-12-2009
20090037586Campaign for downloading data into portable communicating objects - The downloading of data from a server into one (Cn) of the portable communicating objects (C02-05-2009
20100306387NETWORK INTERFACE DEVICE - A network interface device is provided. The network interface device is connected to a computer and performs communications via a network includes a first management unit that identifies a communication connection by a port number, and manages a communication connection state of each port by a context that is stored in a storage unit and is associated with a port number, a second management unit that manages a storage state of the context, and a control unit that refers to the context, and performs an exemplary operation to establish a communication connection and an exemplary operation to cut off a communication connection between ports.12-02-2010
20100312897SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING MEDIA AND MEDIA TRANSFER BETWEEN DEVICES - A method to transfer control is presented. The method includes receiving a request to transfer control of a collaborative session from a first user equipment (UE). The method includes sending a request for the transfer of control of the collaborative session in response to the received request to a second UE, and receiving, in response to the sent request to the second UE, an indication of acceptance of the transfer of control of the collaborative session. The method includes sending a notification of status to the first UE of the control of the collaborative session in response to receiving, from the second UE, the indication of acceptance.12-09-2010
20120036271Network Initiated Alerts to Devices Using a Local Connection - Systems and techniques for managing local communication between a network access point and a host device. Upon connection by a host device to an access point, a local connection link is established between the access point and the host device. A network connection may be established between the access point and the host device, with the network connection being able to pass through the host device to enable communication with and beyond an access network to which the access point provides a connection. Local messages may be passed between the access point and the host device over the local connection link, separately from and independent of communication that may occur over the network connection.02-09-2012
20130138819FILE SERVER DEVICE - Communication is established between communication terminals arranged in different LANS while realizing dynamic response to reduction in server load, movement of communication terminal, and the like. A relay server is arranged in a LAN and can communicate with an SIP server arranged in a WAN. For instance, a first relay server exchanges account information of the communication terminals in the respective LAN with a second relay server. If exchanged account information is changed in one relay server, the account information after the change is notified to the other relay server. One relay server determines the other relay server based on the exchanged account information and relays communication data between the communication terminals through the other relay server.05-30-2013
20130138820COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT THAT PERFORMS COMMUNICATIONS VIA NETWORK, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - Communication equipment which is capable of reducing communication time when transmitting a plurality of data using SIP. When a plurality of data are to be transmitted, a connection request message for requesting a plurality of media sessions is transmitted. Upon receiving a connection response message in response to the connection request message, it is determined whether or not the plurality of media sessions have been permitted in the connection request message. When it is determined that the plurality of media sessions have been permitted, the plurality of media sessions are established, and transmit each of the plurality of data is transmitted in each of the media sessions.05-30-2013
20130138821Method and System for Providing Call Waiting Features in a SIP-Based Network - A method that includes receiving a first call request from a second user to a first user, establishing a first dialog between a network element and the first user, establishing a second dialog between the network element and the second user, establishing a third dialog between the network element and a third user in response to a second call request from a third user, establishing a fourth dialog between the network element and the first user as a result of establishing the third dialog, waiting for a response from the first user in the fourth dialog and receiving one or more indications of actions from the first user to manage the disposition of the second call request.05-30-2013
20130138822METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING MEDIA CHANNEL BASED ON RELAY - The disclosure discloses a method and a system for establishing a media channel based on relay. The method comprises: during a session negotiation process between a first User Equipment (UE) and a second UE, a media relay control server allocating a first service identifier and a second service identifier, transmitting the first service identifier to the first UE, transmitting the second service identifier to the second UE, and transmitting the first service identifier and the second service identifier to a media relay device; the media relay device receiving the service identifiers reported by the first UE and the second UE; the media relay device verifying, according to the first service identifier and the second identifier transmitted by the media relay control server, the service identifiers reported by the first UE and the second UE, and establishing a media channel between the first UE and the second UE if the verification is passed. Through this disclosure, the security of connections between network nodes is improved.05-30-2013
20100325284METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY PROVIDING A CLIENT WITH ACCESS TO AN ASSOCIATED VIRTUAL MACHINE - Techniques for automatically providing a client with access to a virtual machine associated with the client are described herein. According to one embodiment, a message is received by a controller from a client over a network indicating that the client is starting up. In response, the controller causes a connection to be automatically established between the client and a virtual machine (VM) associated with the client once the client has started up. The associated VM may be one of a predetermined VM, a member of a group of VMs that are associated with the client, and a VM selected from a pool of VMs. As a result, a user of the client can instantly access contents provided by the associated VM without having to manually log onto a Web portal in order to select the associated VM to be launched. Other methods and apparatuses are also described.12-23-2010
20100325285SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TEARING DOWN INDIVIDUAL IP COMMUNICATION SESSIONS IN MULTIPLE IP STACK DEVICES - Embodiments of the invention are used to provide a system and method for tearing down and reclaiming an IP address from a multi-IP stack device based on configurable timer parameters that provide a network operator with independent control over each protocol-specific IP network layer session. Dedicated idle and session timers for each IP network layer session are implemented at the network layer of various network nodes in order to independently tear down IPv4 and IPv6 network sessions while maintaining the underlying link layer connection. In embodiments, the IP protocol-specific idle and session timers are processed by the Packet Data Serving Node (PDSN) or the Home Agent (HA). To achieve user session level control of IP protocol-specific network layer sessions, embodiments of the invention provide for storing the network layer idle and session timer attributes at the Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) server prior to passing such attributes to the PDSN or the HA for processing during the dual-stack communication session.12-23-2010
20130013791TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL (TCP) THROUGHPUT OPTIMIZATION IN MOBILE WIRELESS NETWORKS - A device establishes a first transmission control protocol (TCP) connection with a client device associated with a wireless network, and establishes a second TCP connection with a server device associated with the wireless network. The device also provides a first TCP window size to the client device via the first TCP connection, and provides a second TCP window size to the server device via the second TCP connection, where the first TCP window size is different than the second TCP window size.01-10-2013
20130145035TCP PROCESSING FOR DEVICES - A data processing system comprising: a host processing device supporting a host transport engine operable to establish one or more transport streams over a network with a remote peer, the host transport engine maintaining state for each transport stream; and device hardware comprising: a device application; a device transport engine operable to perform transport processing of a transport stream on behalf of the device application; wherein the host transport engine is configured to, on establishing a first transport stream for termination at the device application, pass sufficient state to the device transport engine so as to permit the device transport engine to perform transport processing of the first transport stream.06-06-2013
20130145036CONNECTION FORWARDING - Two or more network traffic processors connected with the same LAN and WAN are identified as neighbors. Neighboring network traffic processors cooperate to overcome asymmetric routing, thereby ensuring that related sequences of network traffic are processed by the same network proxy. A network proxy can be included in a network traffic processor or as a standalone unit. A network traffic processor that intercepts a new connection initiation by a client assigns a network proxy to handle all messages associated with that connection. The network traffic processor conveys connection information to neighboring network traffic processors. The neighboring network traffic processors use the connection information to redirect network traffic associated with the connection to the assigned network proxy, thereby overcoming the effects of asymmetric routing. The assigned network proxy handles redirected network traffic in much the same way that it would handle network traffic received directly.06-06-2013
20100325289RE-ACTIVATED GROUP COMMUNICATION - An improved method for re-activating a terminated group session. A server responsible for controlling the connection stores associated participant information identifying clients that participated or were intended to participate the connection. This associated participant information is provided to the client when a negative response to the request for re-joining the connection needs to be given. The client can then re-activate the communication by re-initing the connection. The roles and responsibilities of the continued connection are more consistent and still, the task of storing the information for the continued connection takes place in the element where it is most appropriately done.12-23-2010
20100325288SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF STATE MIGRATION IN A MULTI-CORE SYSTEM - The present application is directed towards systems and methods of state migration in a multi-core system. An external process on a client or server may initiate a plurality of connections with the multi-core system, such that some cores have a plurality of connections and others have none. The present invention provides systems and methods for redirecting a connection or migrating the state of a connection from being associated with a first core with a plurality of connections to a second core with no connections.12-23-2010
20100325287SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF HANDLING NON-HTTP CLIENT OR SERVER PUSH ON HTTP VSERVER - The present application presents systems and methods for handling by an HTTP virtual server (HTTPVS), connections via which non-HTTP data is transmitted between clients and servers. HTTPVS intercepts a request from a client to establish first transport layer connection (TLC) with a server. HTTPVS establishes second TLC with the servers in response to receiving an acknowledgment from a client to establish the first TLC. HTTPVS determines if a first network packet transmitted via first TLC comprises an HTTP payload or non-HTTP payload. If HTTPVP the first network packet includes HTTP payload, HTTPVS may process all transmissions from the first TLC in accordance with connection tracking and forward the processed transmissions to the server via the second TLC. If HTTPVS determines that the first network packet does not include an HTTP payload, HTTPVS may link the first TLC and the second TLC so the client and server exchange non-HTTP communication without interruption.12-23-2010
20100325286SESSION TRANSFER METHOD AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING SESSION CONTINUITY - According to the present invention, a service operator can immediately transfer an ongoing session to another network, accordingly it is capable of dealing with cases that a network is required to be temporarily stopped due to repairing/checking for the network, it is required to perform a network load balancing, it is required to more effectively perform the ongoing session, and the policy of the service operator is changed. And, according to the present invention, when the ongoing session is required to be transferred later even though it is not required to be immediately transferred, or session continuity operator policy is changed, it is capable of sending the session continuity operator policy to the terminal and then allowing the terminal to transfer the ongoing session to another network according to determination by itself.12-23-2010
20100332662Peer-to-peer negotiation in a wireless network - When two wireless communication devices discover each other and prepare to associate with each other, they perform a negotiation with each other to decide which will act as the network controller in that association. The negotiation may include an exchange of information indicating which device is more suitable to act as a network controller.12-30-2010
20110016216Optimized negotiation of coding resources between communication clients - A network (N) device (S) (I01-20-2011
20130159536IMAGE PROCESSING DEVICE, IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM, IMAGE PROCESSING METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - An image processing device executing a job in cooperation with a server, comprises: an external terminal connecting part for establishing connection that allows communication with an external terminal; a server connecting part for conducting a negotiation to execute the job with the server and establishing connection with the server in response to receipt of a request from the external terminal; a transmission part for sending information that is received from the external terminal and addressed to the server after rewriting a source address of the information to an address of the image processing device; a screen image control part for outputting screen image information to the external terminal in response to receipt of the screen image information from the server; and a job execution control part for starting execution of the job with the server in accordance with a control command after receiving the control command from the server.06-20-2013
20110010458Methods and Apparatus for Automated Local Network Formation Using Alternate Connected Interfaces - The described apparatus and methods may include a local network formation module configured to join an overlay network via an available connection, retrieve from the overlay network at least one ad associated with forming a local network, determine if there is at least one matching ad to form the local network, and if no matching ads are determined, then publish an ad with a first local network configuration, or if one or more matching ads are determined, then join a local network according to a second local network configuration corresponding to one of the one or more matching ads.01-13-2011
20110029676PER PRIORITY TCP QUALITY OF SERVICE - An IP gateway device establishes distinct TCP sessions within a single FCIP tunnel, each TCP session being designated for a different priority of service (e.g., high, medium, low), plus a control stream. Each TCP session has its own TCP stack and its own settings for VLAN Tagging (IEEE 802.1Q), quality of service (IEEE 802.1P) and Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP). By distributing data streams assigned to different priorities of service into different TCP sessions within the FCIP tunnel, an IP gateway device can preserve the distinctions between the data stream priorities while the data traffic is within the IP network.02-03-2011
20110119387METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MINIMIZING BANDWIDTH USAGE BETWEEN A COMMUNICATION SERVER AND A MEDIA DEVICE - A communication server implements a method that minimizes bandwidth usage between a media device and the communication server in a communication system where separate session and floor control protocols are used. Where multiple clients have established separate sessions to access a media source at a media device and upon determining that the multiple clients are attempting to access the same media source, the communication server implements floor control logic to tie multiple floor arbiters together across the separate sessions to cause a single media stream to be sent from the media source and received at the communication server for distribution to the clients, thereby minimizing the bandwidth on the uplink between the media device and the communication server.05-19-2011
20110119388Optimization of Multimedia Service Over an IMS Network - Predetermined multimedia services are provided to a plurality of users through a IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). A request is received at a placement server of a multimedia service by at least one user, and the placement server retrieves on a presence server information about the at least one user. The placement server identifies application servers including a multimedia application capable of providing the requested multimedia service, and the placement server selects an application server that is located a minimum average distance from at least one user. In response to the minimum average distance being greater than a predetermined threshold, a local application server is selected with an average distance from the user that is less than the predetermined threshold. A virtual image of the multimedia application is created on the selected local application server, and a connection is established between the user and the selected local application server.05-19-2011
20110035502Distributed Kernel Operating System - An improved distributed operating system over a network of computer systems is described. Existing distributed operating systems have transmission performance limitations dictated by their inability to (1) reliably handle transient communication failures and rapid node reboots, (2) provide a transmission protocol that adapts to link reliability, and (3) allow transmissions to occur over an arbitrary combinations of communication links. The systems and methods described herein solve these problems by providing a reliable node-to-node session protocol that offers high performance message delivery and multi-interface management and support. This is done by transmitting all data between two nodes of the operating system over a single connection that may dynamically exploit multiple interfaces between the nodes.02-10-2011
20110035501TRAVERSAL OF SYMMETRIC NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATOR FOR MULTIPLE SIMULTANEOUS CONNECTIONS - Handling of multiple connections during NAT traversal for a node behind a symmetric NAT is disclosed. The likelihood of connection failure during symmetric NAT traversal may be reduced by serializing critical time windows after port prediction. Once a connection request has been sent for a first connection, port prediction for a subsequent connection may be delayed until a connectivity check has begun for the first connection. This process may be repeated to handle NAT traversal for multiple simultaneous connections to different nodes.02-10-2011
20110035500METHOD FOR CONTROLLING AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE TO OUTPUT ELECTRONIC CONTENT, AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR PERFORMING THE METHOD - In a method for controlling an electronic device to output electronic content stored in a storage medium thereof via an output module thereof, the electronic device is configured to: display a first object associated with the electronic content and a second object associated with the output module on an operation screen of the electronic device; receive a user input command for establishing an operational relationship between the first and second objects; and automatically retrieve the electronic content from the storage medium, and output the electronic content via the output module in response to the user input command. An electronic device to perform the method is also disclosed.02-10-2011
20110113142SMART CLIENT ROUTING - Architecture that facilitates communications between two network nodes of the different networks by providing a routing mechanism that uses alternative modalities driven entirely by policies that are authored and stored in a computing cloud and enforced on the client. This allows the selection of one network path over another path based on criteria such as, physical location of the hosts and service level agreements (SLAs) to be provided, for example. With respect for path selection, a packet can be routed through a datacenter closest to the hosts. With respect to SLAs, there may be different SLAs available to different clients. For clients with the highest bandwidth/uptime or other guarantees, a network path different from other types of clients can be selected. Additionally, connectivity can be allowed or disallowed based on other kinds of policy rules such as a virtual circle to which the hosts may belong.05-12-2011
20110113144TERMINAL CONTROL METHOD AND SERVICE PROVISION SYSTEM USING THE SAME - To realize a service infrastructure capable of being used as a platform for various services to be implemented through a network. In a service provision system, each of a service control server 05-12-2011
20110113143VOICE SESSION AND DATA SESSION COORDINATION IN A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device has a data application and a voice application. The device establishes a data session between the data application and a data system. During the data session, the device receives a voice session request from a voice communication system, and in response, alerts the user of the request. The device receives a user acceptance of the voice session request, and in response, transfers a voice session acceptance indication from the voice application to the data application and tracks elapsed time since the user acceptance. The communication device transfers a voice session acceptance from the voice application to the voice communication system if the voice application receives a data application ready indication from the data application or if the elapsed time since the user acceptance reaches a set time period, whichever occurs first.05-12-2011
20110040881SIP HEADER TO INDICATE MOBILITY TRANSFER OPERATION02-17-2011
20110040879Electroluminescent communication system between articles of apparel and the like - An article of apparel, or household fabric, having a power source, a switch and at least one electroluminescent or fabric strip for illuminating the article of apparel, or household article. In addition, the present invention can be used in a peer to peer network. The article may have a communication system including a transmitter and a receiver. Furthermore, the present invention can have electric circuitry that can be integrated with the electrical components so as to create different visual effects in response to signals from the communication system. The electroluminescent strips of the present invention can be designed to follow the contour of a trademark, logo, or character. Also, the electroluminescent strips can be designed to follow the stitching of the sneaker and follow the sneaker lace path. Switches of the present invention can include, preferably, a toggle switch, or if desired a pressure switch, a reed switch, or the like. The power source implemented is preferably a rechargeable battery.02-17-2011
20090063689METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVISIONING CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPMENT - A method for execution by at least one entity in the service provider network. The method comprises receiving an access request from a communication device; determining a logical identifier intended for use by the communication device during an eventual communication session; and identifying, based on the logical identifier, an object linked to a physical location of the communication device. Finally, in one aspect, the method comprises obtaining account credentials for a customer known to be associated with the object, whereas in another aspect, the method comprises establishing a data session between the communication device and a network entity associated with the object without necessarily obtaining any account credentials.03-05-2009
20110246655Remote Session Control - A method and system for remote session control of IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) sessions, wherein media is established using one or more devices, and multi-media session/session control for multi-media session is provided by a device which may or may not be the same as the device on which the media is established. A method and system is also provided to transfer media from one device to one or more devices retaining multi-media session/session control on a transferring device.10-06-2011
20100023626METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING HOST OVERHEAD IN A SOCKET SERVER IMPLEMENTATION - A network application executing on a host system provides a list of application buffers in host memory stored in a queue to a network services processor coupled to the host system. The application buffers are used for storing data transferred on a socket established between the network application and a remote network application executing in a remote host system. Using the application buffers, data received by the network services processor over the network is transferred between the network services processor and the application buffers. After the transfer, a completion notification is written to one of the two control queues in the host system. The completion notification includes the size of the data transferred and an identifier associated with the socket. The identifier identifies a thread associated with the transferred data and the location of the data in the host system.01-28-2010
20100023624METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT AND APPLICATION SERVER FOR ADDING MEDIA STREAM OF MULTIMEDIA SESSION - A method, user equipment and application server for adding media stream of multimedia session. A UE01-28-2010
20110078314SIGNAL PROCESSING DEVICE, SIGNAL PROCESSING PROGRAM AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is provided a signal processing device including: a packet receiving means for receiving a packet from a transmitting communication device; and a packet processing means for transmitting the received packet received by the packet receiving means, simply as received or after processing by a packet converting means, to a receiving communication device that is a destination of the packet, wherein when a communication session between a first transmitting communication device and the receiving communication device is established and the session is shifted to have a connection between a second transmitting communication device and the receiving communication device, the packet converting means converts the received packet received from the second transmitting communication device so as to maintain a consecutiveness related to a content of packets to be transmitted to the receiving communication device.03-31-2011
20110087788APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING MULTIPLE INPUTS OF USERS OF A HOME NETWORK - Disclosed is a method and apparatus for processing multiple inputs from a plurality of users in a home network. A control point requests electronic devices in the home network to transmit input capability information, receives the input capability information as a response to the request from the electronic devices, and performs session setup using the input capability information by determining a receiver for receiving input signals and at least two senders for sending input signals. The control point transmits input signals transmitted by the at least two senders to the receiver.04-14-2011
20110213887SCHEDULABLE TRANSPORT FOR CONTRIBUTION SERVICES - In one embodiment a method includes receiving a request to schedule an audiovisual data streaming session, the request including an identifier of an encoder, a session time and an identifier of an invitee, generating a command configured to cause the encoder to begin encoding audiovisual content at the session time, and to stream encoded audiovisual content via the network, receiving an indication that the invitee has joined the audiovisual data streaming session, and generating a command configured to cause an audiovisual decoder designated by the invitee to begin decoding the encoded audiovisual content upon receipt of the encoded audiovisual content.09-01-2011
20100235519POLICY AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION MANAGEMENT METHOD, MANAGEMENT NETWORK ELEMENT, AND NETWORK SYSTEM - A Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) management method includes: acquiring information about a policy control session corresponding to a data connection, where the information about the policy control session includes information about policy control session release or result information about policy control session setup, and managing a mapping relation between the data connection and a PCRF according to the information about the policy control session corresponding to the data connection. A management network element includes: a policy control session information acquiring unit, adapted to acquire the information about a policy control session corresponding to a data connection, where the information about the policy control session includes information about policy control session release or result information about policy control session setup; and a managing unit, adapted to manage a mapping relation between the data connection and a PCRF according to the information about the policy control session corresponding to the data connection.09-16-2010
20100228863CONTENT DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AND ITS CONTROL METHOD - A content distribution system in which, when it is detected that an incommunicable area is present in a moving direction of a client terminal, the client terminal transmits a change request signal, requesting an increase of the confirmation interval of a keep-alive signal, to the content distribution server before the client terminal enters the incommunicable area. When the change request signal is received during distribution of content data, the content distribution server increases the confirmation interval of the keep-alive signal, thereby allowing the session of content distribution to be maintained while the client terminal is in motion within the incommunicable area.09-09-2010
20100217871SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USING A PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE AS A SECURE VIRTUAL MASS STORAGE DEVICE OVER A NETWORK - A wireless device is provided. The wireless device has a processor for controlling operation of the wireless device; a first input device coupled to the processor for accepting an input; at least one display device coupled to the processor for communicating an output to the user; a communications subsystem coupled to the processor for communicating with a communications network; a universal serial bus (USB) storage device connected to a USB port of the wireless device; a memory coupled to the processor; and a storage device coupled to the processor. The wireless device includes a USB/network handling module resident in the memory for execution by the processor. The USB/network handling module is configured to establish a secure connection between the wireless device and a server of a network; load a universal serial bus mass storage component; initiate a file share between the wireless device and the server; and mount the USB storage device connected to the USB port of the wireless device as a shared network drive on the network.08-26-2010
20110078317ELECTRONIC APPARATUS WITH ROUTER DEVICE FOR MANAGING CONNECTIONS - A method and electronic apparatus is provided for establishing a connection in a first electronic apparatus to a second electronic apparatus using one of a plurality of clients. The method comprises determining whether the first electronic apparatus and the second electronic apparatus, to which a connection is requested, is operating in the same network; establishing the connection using a first client if the first and second electronic apparatuses are operating in the same network; and establishing the connection using a second client if the second electronic apparatus is operating in a different network than the first electronic apparatus.03-31-2011
20110093598DISPLAY OF PERSONA INFORMATION FOR PEER-TO-PEER SESSIONS - A method of operating a communication system comprises registering a first communication device with a peer-to-peer network as a first node associated with a first session participant and a first entity and registering a second communication device with the peer-to-peer network as a second node associated with a second session participant. The method further comprises initiating a communication session between the first node and the second node, transferring for display by the second communication device first persona information identifying the first session participant and the first entity, and exchanging user communications for the communication session between the first communication device and the second communication device.04-21-2011
20100131657Novel method and system of anonymizing real time Internet communications between peers - A method and system of establishing a direct communication between two peers over the Internet without revealing their real identities and personal information to each other, comprising of a first client node, a second client node, an intermediate anonymizer server node, the first anonymizer interface and the second anonymizer interface.05-27-2010
20100131655SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING LARGE AMOUNT OF DATA IN WEB SERVICE TRANSACTION - A system and associated method for web service data for a web service transaction are disclosed. A client program that employs the web service transaction invokes a pair of web service calls to transfer the web service data to and from a web service program that executes the web service transaction. The web service program establishes a user session between the web service program and a web interface program. During the user session, the web service transaction is performed as a user of the client program directly interacts with the web service program through the web interface program. When the user session is completed, the client program retrieves the web service data resulting from the web service transaction from the web service program.05-27-2010
20100131654PLATFORM FOR ENABLING TERMINAL SERVICES VIRTUALIZATION - Disclosed are techniques for providing a platform and application program interface (API) that leverages a terminal services session broker infrastructure to support third party plug-in applications. In a typical scenario, when a user requests for a connection to access third party plug-in applications, the application program interface may interact with the session broker process to identify sessions or suitable servers to which the user can be connected. The user may access the third party plug-in applications through the identified sessions or suitable servers.05-27-2010
20100131653BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM USER INTERFACE WITH PINNED DISPLAY FEATURE - Building control systems that include a user interface that is configured to help manage relatively large amounts of building control data in an efficient and intuitive manner. In some cases, subsets of building control information can be associated with display elements such as windows or tabs, which can then be pinned to provide a convenient way to selectively display only certain building control information. In some cases, a pinned display element may display one or more building control parameters, which in some cases, can be user selectable and/or updated over time.05-27-2010
20100131652UNIFIED INTERFACE FOR CONFIGURING MULTIPLE NETWORKING TECHNOLOGIES - A network and connection provisioning framework for configuring and provisioning multiple aspects of network connectivity (e.g., multiple networks, media types, and/or connections). The framework may comprise a unified configuration interface that enables an administrator to configure multiple different types of network connectivity. A single configuration file comprising settings for multiple aspects of network connectivity may be generated based on preferences entered by a system administrator, or by exporting current settings from a particular computing device. Global configuration policies or other configuration settings that span multiple types of network connectivity may be also created and stored in one or more configuration files. Stand-alone media managers and/or plug-in modules may implement one or more standardized application programming interface functions so that they may interoperate with the network and connection provisioning framework. The standardized API may be used to ensure that configuration information is handled and stored in a standardized manner by different media managers and/or plug-in modules.05-27-2010
20100185771System and method for hybrid communication mechanism utilizing both communication server-based and direct endpoint-to-endpoint connections - A new approach is proposed that contemplates systems and methods to support a hybrid solution that utilizes a centralized communication server as the main mechanism for communication between two clients (endpoints), but augments the server-based communication with an optional direct connection between the two clients whenever available while hiding the complexities and time spent dealing with the direct connection from the clients. The switch of the communication mode between the clients is kept transparent to them during their communication session without causing any inconvenience and/or disruption of the communication. When a direct endpoint to endpoint connection is not available the approach preserves the advantages of connecting through the intermediate communication server.07-22-2010
20090254665Trigger-Based Session Completion Using External Parties - A method for performing Internet call processing related to the completion of session initiation requests is provided. The session initiation requests include one or more triggers. Based on the detection of one or more triggers, a call processing entity involved with processing the session initiation request transfers call processing to one or more third parties. Each third party performs additional call processing and returns a result to the call processing entity. Based on reception of the result, the call processing entity continues processing the session initiation request. The URI of one or more third parties may be specified in the session initiation request. Also, one or more third parties may be pre-specified. A special trust relationship may exist between a terminal related to the session initiation request and one or more third parties, and the third parties may therefore perform call processing using context specific information or confidential information.10-08-2009
20090254662METHOD FOR UPDATING CONNECTION PROFILE IN CONTENT DELIVERY SERVICE - A method for updating a connection profile in a content delivery service by a dynamic content delivery (DCD) terminal, comprises: receiving, from a server, a connection profile update message including a connection profile; transmitting, to the server, a connection profile update confirmation message in response to the reception; transmitting, to the server, a session deactivation request message based on the connection profile; and transmitting, to another server, a session activation request message base on the connection profile.10-08-2009
20090313378Remote Media IMS Sessions - A system and method is provided for remote session control of IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) sessions. A remote media flow may be established as part of an origination process wherein the controller UE requests that the media flow is established on a remote media UE as part of the origination request. A remote media flow may also be established as part of a termination process wherein the controller UE identified in the termination request identifies a remote media UE on which a remote media is to be established. Embodiments also allow for the session control to be transferred from a first device to a second device, while maintaining one or more media flows on the first device.12-17-2009
20100070632METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TERMINAL SUPPORTING THE METHOD - A method for transmitting information in a wireless communication system and a wireless communication terminal supporting the method, wherein when an application server sends to a receiving terminal a specific message for checking radio environment information or a message including a radio environment capability, the receiving terminal having received the message may send a response message with its own radio environment information to the application server, such that the radio environment information related to the receiving terminal can be sent to the sending terminal after analyzed by the application server.03-18-2010
20100036957Method and System for Implementing Transfer of a Network Session - An improved approach is described for sharing resources such as sessions and connections in database systems. Conduits and templates in shared memory can be employed to facilitate the transfer of network sessions. This provides a very efficient way to share processing entities across multiple users or clients.02-11-2010
20100036958Remote Session Control - A method and system for remote session control of IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) sessions, wherein media is established using one or more devices, and multi-media session/session control for multi-media session is provided by a device which may or may not be the same as the device on which the media is established. A method and system is also provided to transfer media from one device to one or more devices retaining multi-media session/session control on a transferring device.02-11-2010
20090216887METHOD OF ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION - The invention concerns method of establishing a connection in a peer-to-peer network (08-27-2009
20090216886Method of multi-path accessing remote logic device under linux system - A method of multi-path accessing a remote logic device under a Linux system is used to realize a multi-path access between an initiator and a target in a storage area network (SAN). Firstly, a communication is established between the initiator and the target. Next, the initiator requests to establish at least one link session with the target. Then, the initiator obtains an iSCSI-connected host assigned by the target, and also obtains a message about connected devices corresponding to the iSCSI-connected host through transmitting a report logic unit number (LUN) command. Then, the initiator configures a device mapper, and the device mapper generates information about redundant devices according to the connected devices and the corresponding LUNs, and the redundant connected devices are mapped into a unique mapping device.08-27-2009
20090216885Stateless Core Service Transaction Patterns - A connection handler can receive a service request, initiate a temporary proxy state in the connection handler, open a first connection to a service provider from the connection handler to request fulfillment of the service request, and populate the temporary proxy state with a copy of original content received at the connection handler from the service provider in fulfillment of the service request. The populating can include creating a temporary proxy state content. The connection handler can tag the original content object on the service provider with an activity indicator that specifies that the original content has been accessed by the connection handler and then terminate the first connection between the connection handler and the service provider. Related systems, apparatus, methods, and/or articles are also described.08-27-2009
20100070633Method and Apparatus for Improving SIP Parse Performance - The present invention discloses a method and an apparatus for improving SIP parse performance. The method comprising the steps of: receiving a text-based SIP message to be sent to a SIP server; according to a SIP message filter table, determining whether the text-based SIP message needs to be transformed to a token-based message; and in the case that the text-based SIP message needs to be transformed to a token-based message, performing the transformation and sending the transformed token-based message to said SIP server, otherwise directly sending the text-based SIP message to said SIP server. According to the present invention, larger SIP message throughput in a SIP server and better utilization of resources of a front end device can be achieved.03-18-2010
20100064046MANAGEMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS FROM STOLEN DEVICES - A device, method, system and computer readable medium are disclosed for the management of communications provided by a multitude of stolen electronic devices reporting location information to a monitoring center.03-11-2010
20080256244Method, Apparatus, Computer Program Product and Network Node for Providing Remote Client Deactivation - An apparatus for providing remote client deactivation includes a processing element. The processing element may be configured to receive a message associated with a service related to a communication session with a client, determine whether the client is associated with an indication to deactivate the client and communicate a signaling message to deactivate the client in response to a determination that the client is associated with the indication to deactivate the client.10-16-2008
20100057918HTTP STANDBY CONNECTION - An apparatus and a method for requesting data from a server. In one embodiment, a client opens a first HTTP connection and a second HTTP connection with the server. The client requests for data from a random access file from the server with the first HTTP connection. The client receives and reads the data while maintaining the second HTTP connection open. The client requests for additional data at another location in the file on the second HTTP connection. The client maintains the second HTTP connection by occasionally sending requests to the server on the second HTTP connection.03-04-2010
20110082942COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM - A user invited to a session can see the content of the conversation exchanged in the session before participating in the session, so that he/she can easily decide whether or not to join the session. There are provided an invitation request transmitting section 04-07-2011
20110082939METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PROXY DISCOVERY AND NEGOTIATIONS BETWEEN NETWORK ENTITIES TO ESTABLISH PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS - A method for peer to peer communications is provided. The method includes receiving first set of information containing capabilities for a peer-to-peer communication. The method further includes communicating the first information to facilitate a peer-to-peer communication. The method includes utilizing a intermediary node to convey the capabilities and to further update the information/capabilities as the information changes over time.04-07-2011
20110082938SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMICALLY UPDATING A USER INTERFACE WITHIN A VIRTUAL COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - The present invention provides systems and methods for dynamically manipulating and/or reconfiguring a user interface within a virtual computing environment. Specifically, various systems and methods as provided by the present invention allow for dynamic manipulation or reconfiguration of a user interface within a computing session. Depending on the embodiment, the system and method may be used for sessions provided by an application control environment or a virtual computing environment. Embodiments of the invention enable dynamic manipulation, control, and reconfiguration of the user interface within a computing environment based on user interface rules. These user interface rules may be used to implement policy and access control on users of the computing session.04-07-2011
20100241753System and Method For Securely Communicating On-Demand Content From Closed Network to Dedicated Devices, and For Compiling Content Usage Data in Closed Network Securely Communicating Content to Dedicated Devices - A system for securely communicating content as streaming data is provided. The system includes a closed network created on a public network, and a dedicated device for receiving twice-encrypted streamed content from the closed network. Upon authentication of the dedicated device, a content enabling component in the closed network twice-encrypts previously once-encrypted streamed content by using randomly selected encryption algorithms, and streams the twice-encrypted streamed content to the dedicated device during a closed network communication session and through a closed connection established between the closed network and the dedicated device. The dedicated device includes a content enabling component having a unique content enabling component identifier and a unique decryption key. The dedicated device decrypts the twice-encrypted streamed content by using its unique information and decryption key as well as randomly selected information received from the closed network during the closed network communication session and through the closed connection.09-23-2010
20110153842CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR MULTIMEDIA STREAMING OVER A WIRELESS BROADBAND NETWORK - A control device, which is for use during multimedia streaming between a user terminal and a base station over a wireless broadband network, includes a parsing unit, a computing unit and a processing unit. The parsing unit parses a session signal for establishing a multimedia streaming session so as to acquire a call ID and a media descriptor of the multimedia streaming session. The computing unit receives the media descriptor thus acquired by the parsing unit, and computes a bandwidth needed for the multimedia streaming session based on the media descriptor. The processing unit receives the call ID and the bandwidth, and transmits a quality-of-service request signal to the base station according to the bandwidth and corresponding to the multimedia streaming session so as to request the base station to provide a quality of service corresponding to the bandwidth during the multimedia streaming session.06-23-2011
20110153841OPERATION SETTING METHOD OF RELAY APPARATUS, RELAY APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORED WITH PROGRAM - A manipulation terminal is connected to a relay apparatus which is a target of operation setting, through a communication cable, and an address resolution request of which a target is an arbitrary IP address is broadcast-transmitted to the relay apparatus by the manipulation terminal. On the other hand, the relay apparatus performs a process of storing the target address of the address resolution request as a communication address and returning a MAC address of the relay apparatus to the manipulation terminal. A communication session is established between the manipulation terminal and the relay apparatus using the MAC address returned in this way, and the manipulation terminal performs the operation setting process through telnet.06-23-2011
20110153839SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SERVER SURGE PROTECTION IN A MULTI-CORE SYSTEM - The present application is directed towards systems and methods for providing connection surge protection to one or more servers by an intermediary multi-core system. A packet processing engine of a multi-core device deployed as an intermediary between a plurality of clients and one or more servers determines an estimated number of total pending requests received by all packet processing engines based on a value of a local counter of received requests, the total number of pending requests received by all other packet processing engines at a last predetermined interval, and a rate of change of the total number of pending requests received by all other packet processing engines multiplied by the time since the last predetermined interval. The packet processing engine applies a surge protection policy to received pending requests responsive to the determined estimated number of total pending requests.06-23-2011
20110153837SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGEMENT OF ETHERNET PREMISE DEVICES - A system and method for managing customer premise equipment (CPE) devices. A wake signal is issued to the CPE device. Action parameters are communicated to the CPE device in response to receiving acknowledgement of the wake signal from the CPE device. A management session is established with the CPE device utilizing an address for secure communications in response to the CPE device acknowledging the action parameters. Communications are performed through the management session to perform operation, administration, and maintenance of the CPE device. The management session with the CPE device is terminated.06-23-2011
20110153836DYNAMIC ATTRIBUTES FOR MOBILE BUSINESS OBJECTS - Embodiments of the present invention relate to system, method, computer program product embodiments and combinations and sub-combinations thereof for generating dynamic attribute elements and dynamic attributes for MBOs. An embodiment includes generating dynamic attribute elements for MBO metadata in a manner that enables a mobile application to directly access and modify dynamic attributes included within the dynamic attribute elements. In an embodiment, dynamic attributes are included within the dynamic attribute elements arbitrarily to synchronization sessions of a server and a mobile application. The embodiment also allows the mobile application to set a value associated with a dynamic attribute. Another embodiment includes embedding a dynamic attributes entity in generated client code and downloading dynamic MBO attributes and associated metadata when the client synchronizes with the server.06-23-2011
20110153835SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING PEER-TO-PEER CONNECTIONS - The present invention relates to a system and method for controlling peer-to-peer connections in a Peer-to-Peer (P2P) streaming application for individual Internet Service Provider (ISP) networks over a localized overlay. The system may include a tracker local to a first ISP network configured to select edge peers among local peers of the first ISP network. The selected edge peers have external connections to peers outside the first ISP network in order to transfer sub-streams to or from the first ISP network, and the local peers not selected as edge peers have internal connections to other local peers within the first ISP network to transfer the sub-streams over the localized overlay.06-23-2011
20110078315COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication system comprises a NAT device, a terminal device, and a communication control device. The communication control device comprises a first storage unit that stores a NAT address, a first receiving unit that receives a type request signal, a first determination unit that determines whether the NAT address matching a source IP address of the type request signal is stored in the first storage unit, and a first transmitting unit that transmits the type information associated with the NAT address matching the source IP address to the terminal device. The terminal device comprises a second transmitting unit that transmits the type request signal, a second receiving unit that receives the type information, and a communication control unit that performs Peer to Peer communication with another terminal device that is subordinate to another NAT device by performing communication using a method to establish communication based on the received type information.03-31-2011
20110078313METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING A CONNECTION IN A CONNECTION ORIENTED IN-ORDER DELIVERY ENVIRONMENT - The present disclosure provides a system and method of establishing a connection between a client and a server in an in-order delivery environment. The disclosed system and method includes a client configured to request establishing a connection by sending a first type of message to a server, and the server is configured to confirm the ability of establishing the connection by sending to the client a second type of message leading to the server being connected. The first type of message starts a first client timer measuring a first predefined time period as a first maximum response time and receipt of the second type of message or a data message stops the first client timer. The connection is closed by sending a third type of message.03-31-2011
20110078312Method and system for monitoring incoming connection requests in a Peer-to-Peer network - The present invention relates to a system and method for controlling peer-to-peer (P2P) traffic in an internet service provider (ISP) network. The system includes an ISP server configured to determine whether to accept or reject an incoming connection request to connect to a requested peer from a requesting peer in a P2P application. According to one embodiment, the ISP is configured to determine whether to accept or reject the incoming connection request based on current peer connectivity and cost of the incoming connection request. According to another embodiment, the ISP server determines whether to accept or reject the incoming connection request based on preference information available at the ISP server.03-31-2011
20110082941METHOD OF PROVIDING DIRECT COMMUNICATION IN INTERNET PROTOCOL NETWORK - In order for a peer node to perform direct communication with a correspondent peer node in an Internet protocol network, the peer node receives a virtual address of the correspondent peer node from a server, and then when the peer node can directly set a tunnel with the correspondent peer node, the peer node sets a tunnel with the correspondent peer node, and when the peer node cannot directly set a tunnel with the correspondent peer node, the peer node sets a tunnel with a tunnel repeater. Thereafter, the peer node connects a virtual address of the correspondent peer node as route information to the tunnel. Thereby, a packet using a virtual address of the correspondent peer node as a destination is transmitted to the correspondent peer node through a predetermined tunnel.04-07-2011
20110082940METHODS AND APPARATUS TO ESTABLISH PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS - A method and device for peer-to-peer communications is provided. The method includes communication of the capabilities of a device to another device or network component. A peer to peer communication is established based on at least one of the capabilities of the device. The method may also include utilizing a control point or access point in conveying the capabilities of the device to another device.04-07-2011
20110078316Method And Element For Service Control - A service control element stores a user filter criterion. When it receives a session request identifying the user, it checks whether the session request matches the user filter criterion, and outputs the session request to a defined service platform when the session request matches the user filter criterion. The element is arranged to retrieve, before forwarding the request to the service platform, a capability information element that indicates the dynamic capability of a user to utilize the service provided by the service platform. If the information element indicates that the user is not capable to utilize the service provided by the service platform, the session is terminated. Incoming messages can be appropriately managed already in the network element responsible for service control, and thus additional load and unnecessary charging considerations can be avoided.03-31-2011
20120303823SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HOST AND OS AGNOSTIC MANAGEMENT OF CONNECTED DEVICES THROUGH NETWORK CONTROLLED STATE ALTERATION - A method and system for establishing network connectivity with a device is disclosed. A connectivity platform detects a plurality of networks. A network policy of each of the plurality of networks is determined. A signal quality of each of the plurality of networks is determined. The network policy and the signal quality of each of the plurality of networks is analyzed. A connection is established between the device and the first network of the plurality of networks based on the analysis of the network policy and the signal quality of each of the plurality of networks.11-29-2012
20120303824CLOUD-ASSISTED NETWORK DEVICE INTEGRATION - A system for integrating a networked device into a domain is described and includes: a network operation control coupled with a local server and including a device class determiner for establishing a device class for at least one device residing in a domain at a premises, wherein based on the establishing the device class, an action is enabled to be mapped to the device, thereby enabling an application to run on and utilize a capability of said device; and a domain manager coupled with a remote server and the network operation control, the domain manager including, coupled with the remote server: an action identifier; a device driver determiner; a comparer; and a device driver implementer for, based on comparing by the comparer, implementing a device driver associated with the device when a first protocol corresponds to a second protocol such that the action is enabled for performance.11-29-2012
20120303822MULTIPATH OVERLAY NETWORK AND ITS MULTIPATH MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL - A method of wireless communication includes aggregating data in a streaming communication session from a source node in a destination aggregator node, wherein data in the streaming session is transported over multiple paths from the source node to the aggregator node via a multipath overlay network discovered by the source node and the aggregator node.11-29-2012
20130159535Handover Method and System of Dual-Mode Communication Terminal - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a handover method and system of a dual-mode communication terminal. A first mode and a second mode of the dual-mode communication terminal adopt a master-slave universal serial bus USB driver structure. The methods includes: A host triggers initiating of network access to a second network by the dual-mode communication terminal; the host maintains occupation of an IP address which is in a first network by the dual-mode communication terminal, and obtains an Internet protocol IP address which is of the dual-mode communication terminal and in the second network; if the IP address in the second network is the same as a current IP address which is of the dual-mode communication terminal and in the first network, the host uses, in the second network, the IP address.06-20-2013
20130159537DEVICE AND METHOD CAPABLE OF SEARCHING FOR AVAILABLE SERVICE - A method capable of searching for a surrounding device based on a desired service is provided. The method includes transmitting a service search request including information regarding a target service to nearby devices; receiving a service search response from the nearby device supporting the target service; analyzing service information of the nearby device supporting the target service, which is included in the service search response; selecting the nearby device supporting the target service based on a result of the analyzed service information; and performing the target service by establishing a session with the selected device.06-20-2013
20110060837METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT BASED ON LTE/SAE SYSTEM - A method, system and device for establishing connection based on a LTE/SAE system. First, e-NodeB sends an S03-10-2011
20110252149PROXY RESPONSE APPARATUS, PROXY RESPONSE METHOD IN PROXY RESPONSE APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A proxy response apparatus, including: a storage unit which establishes connection with a mobile terminal by TCP and stores message information included in a packet obtained from the mobile terminal; a response processing unit which receives a packet from an external apparatus, and responds whether message information included in the receive packet is effective or not to the message information stored in the storage unit; and a TCP processing unit which transmits a packet including a response message to the external apparatus without establishing radio connection with the mobile terminal, when the TCP processing unit inputs the response indicating effective from the response processing unit.10-13-2011
20110252147METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING AN ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING SYSTEM VIA A MOBILE DEVICE - A method and apparatus for accessing an enterprise resource planning system via a mobile device is described. In one embodiment, the method includes parsing data from a host application access application into at least one object in an application-specific format, converting the data into an intermediate format that is compatible with a mobile device and communicating the converted data to the mobile device.10-13-2011
20120203915NETWORKED MOBILE ROUTER - A method for operating a wireless mobile router comprises the steps of storing information comprising configuration information and main server information utilizable to identify a main network server; establishing initial communication via a wireless link to a network comprising a main server and a plurality of group servers; directing the initial communication to the main server; uploading the configuration information to the main server via said network; establishing a second communication to the main server; receiving group server identification information from said main server during the second communication; storing the group server identification information comprising information identifying one or more servers corresponding with a predetermined group assigned by the main server; and utilizing the group server identification information for subsequent communication via the network.08-09-2012
20110060835COMMUNICATING WITH A USER DEVICE IN A COMPUTER ENVIRONMENT - Communicating with a user device in a computer network. A tracker peer is contacted and obtaining a list of peer nodes at a user device. A subset of peer nodes are selected from the list of peer nodes to act as relay nodes for a communication. A first form of communication is transmitted to at least one relay node for the at least one relay node to forward to at least one other user device, wherein the relay node is one of the subset of the peer nodes. The first form of communication is received at the user device from the at least one relay node forwarded from the at least one other user. A second form of communication is transmitted to the at least one relay node for the at least one relay node to forward to the at least one other user device, wherein the relay node is one of the subset of the peer nodes.03-10-2011
20110060836Method for Establishing a Paired Connection Between Media Devices - A method for establishing a paired connection between first and second media devices across a network includes transmitting a first information message across the network including an identifier that includes a request to pair the first and second media devices. When a second information message is received from the second media device within a first predetermined time period, the first device retrieves an identifier of the second device and transmits a confirmation message across the network including the device identifiers. A paired connection between the media devices is completed after a corresponding confirmation message from the second device is received within a second predetermined time period.03-10-2011
20130013792Triggering With QoS Parameters - The present disclosure relates to a method and system for triggering at least one terminal to establish a communication path between the terminal and a server, the communication path including at least one data connection. The method includes transmitting a trigger message to the terminal, the trigger message including connection information indicating a first type of the data connection.01-10-2013
20120066398SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PLUG AND PLAY BETWEEN HOST AND CLIENT - A system, method, and computer program product are provided for plug and play between a host and client. The system includes a client device configured to be communicatively connected to a host device, the client device including at least a portion of memory configured to store computer code for allowing the host device to identify and control the client device. Additionally, the client device is configured such that the host device is not required to have pre-installed the computer code for allowing the host device to identify and control the client device, prior to being communicatively connected to the client device, and the client device is further configured such that when the client device is communicatively connected to the host device, the client device is configured to transfer the computer code for allowing the host device to identify and control the client device to the host device for installation.03-15-2012
20110252144Apparatus and Method for Establishing and Utilizing Backup Communication Channels - An apparatus, method, and machine-readable medium are described for establishing, maintaining and utilizing backup channels in a peer-to-peer (“P2P”) network. For example, in one embodiment, each mobile device can establish a primary P2P communication channel with one or more other mobile devices. Once the primary channel is established, each mobile device can use the primary channel to exchange secondary channel connection data and can subsequently open one or more secondary P2P communication channels with the other mobile devices. Upon detecting that the primary P2P communication channel has failed or has degraded below a specified threshold (e.g., a bandwidth or bitrate threshold), one of the secondary P2P communication channels can be automatically promoted to a primary P2P communication channel.10-13-2011
20100306385RULE BASED MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ON WEB PAGES - Methods and systems are disclosed for a communication system that automatically initiates a multimedia communication session between a web site visitor and an agent who work for the web site based on predetermined rules while the visitor is browsing the web site.12-02-2010
20130159538Switching Between Connectivity Types to Maintain Connectivity - Techniques are provided for leveraging narrowband connectivity (such as dial-up communications or other types of low bandwidth communications) to provision or configure broadband connectivity between a broadband access provider and a broadband device, such as a DSL modem or a cable modem. Specifically, because narrowband connectivity does not require advance configuration or provisioning by the host system of connectivity parameters for an access-seeking device, a modem at an access-seeking device may be leveraged to establish a narrowband connection between that device and a host system and to enable an exchange or negotiation of connectivity parameters necessary to enable future broadband connectivity. Thus, once established, the narrowband connection may be used as a conduit for communicating required provisioning information between the broadband-enabling host and the access-seeking device to enable broadband connectivity by the device in the future.06-20-2013
20110153838SESSION MONITORING OF VIRTUAL DESKTOPS IN A VIRTUAL MACHINE FARM - Disclosed are techniques for determining the status of virtual machine sessions on a computing device for a user by reading from a memory location written to by a program executing within a virtual machine. The memory location is preferably a registry key that contains the status of a remote user session operating on a guest operating system operational on the virtual machine, the virtual machine executing in a virtual environment comprising a plurality of virtual machines operating on a computing device.06-23-2011
20100115103COOPERATIVE NETWORK FOR MOBILE INTERNET ACCESS - A method and system for connecting mobile users to the Internet using cooperative interconnection. A node consists of a network element that has two connections methodologies—typically a node will have a radio link and a wired link to the Internet. To obtain a connection, a member of the service located themselves in proximity to a network node which is commonly provided by another member and the cooperative tunneling agent requests a secure link. All members of the service agree to give connection to the Internet upon request from another member.05-06-2010
20110252148Methods, Systems, and Software for Providing Service Integration Framework - A preferred embodiment of the subject invention comprises a system for implementing computer network services and applications, comprising a front-end component comprising one or more applications; a back-end component comprising one or more services; and an abstraction layer component operable to communicate with the front-end and back-end components. In another preferred embodiment, the subject invention comprises a system for linking applications and services, comprising: a vendor connectivity component; a business integration component; a security component; a utility component; and a back end connectivity component.10-13-2011
20110161502METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACTIVATING NETWORK STORAGE, MESSAGE PROCESSING SERVER, AND CLIENT - A method for activating network storage includes: a message processing server receives a network storage request from a client; the message processing server establishes a session with a history function (HF) according to the network storage request, and sends the content from the session in which the client participates to the HF through the session with the HF. A system for activating network storage, a message processing server, and a client are also provided. With the present invention, the network storage is implemented more conveniently, and the user experience is improved.06-30-2011
20100100626METHODS AND APPARATUS RELATED TO INTER-WIDGET INTERACTIONS MANAGED BY A CLIENT-SIDE MASTER - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving at a first widget executing at a first client a first signal sent from a second widget executing at a second client. The first signal can be associated with an interactive session between at least the first widget and the second widget. The first widget can be selected to operate as a client-side master. The method can also include defining at the first widget, and based on the first signal, a second signal having a master flag. The second signal can be sent from the first widget to the second widget.04-22-2010
20120203914NETWORKED MOBILE ROUTER - A mobile router, comprises a communications agent operable such that its initial communication to the network utilizes the main server information to establish a first communication with the main server. The mobile router further comprises a microprocessor operable with the communications agent to interact with the main server to upload configuration information to the main server. The communications agent is operable to receive group server identification information from the main server when communicating with the main server a second time. The microprocessor is operable to store the group server identification information. The group server information comprises information identifying one or more servers corresponding with a predetermined group assigned by the main server. The communications agent utilizes the group server identification information for subsequent communication via the network.08-09-2012
20110258330IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE, STORAGE DEVICE, IMAGE DISPLAY SYSTEM AND NETWORK SETUP METHOD - An image display system 10-20-2011
20110258327D2D Communications Considering Different Network Operators - There is stored a database of registration information associating UEs with cells under control of different network operators. In response to a inquiry from a first network operator that a first UE desires direct communications with a second UE, the registration information is used to coordinate between the first network operator and the second network operator to facilitate establishment of a direct communication link between the first UE and the second UE. In various embodiments the facilitating is enhancing the inquiry/page by adding a cell ID of the first UE's cell and adding pre-allocated radio resources in the first UE's cell for use by the second UE in responding to the page, and determining a single network which is not highly loaded and which can allocate resources for the D2D communications and directing one or both UEs to that single network.10-20-2011
20110153834Transparent Recovery of Transport Connections Using Packet Translation Techniques - Methods and apparatuses, including computer program products, are described for transparent recovery of transport connections. The method includes collecting a state associated with a first connection between a first server and a remote server via a first network socket and transmitting the state from a first networking module to a second networking module. The method includes storing the state, opening a second network socket based on failure of the first networking module, intercepting outbound packets associated with a request to initiate a second connection between the first server and the remote server via the second socket, modifying the intercepted packets based on the state, and transmitting the modified packets to the remote server to elicit an acknowledgement to maintain the first connection. The method includes receiving packets associated with the acknowledgment from the remote server, and modifying the received packets to acknowledge the request to initiate the second connection.06-23-2011
20090319665MANAGEMENT OF DUPLICATE TCP CONNECTIONS USING SEQUENCE AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT NUMBERS - A method for managing a first TCP connection with a second computer is disclosed. The method can include associating the first TCP connection with a first set of numbers. The method can further include receiving a SYN message from an unidentified computer, wherein the SYN message is associated with a second set. The method can further include creating a record representing a new TCP connection with the unidentified computer, wherein the new TCP connection is associated with the second set, sending a SYN/ACK message to the second computer and receiving an ACK message from the second computer, wherein the ACK message is associated with a third set. The method can further include verifying the first TCP connection and deleting the record if the third set matches the first set. Alternatively, if the third set matches the second set, then the first TCP connection is replaced with the new TCP connection.12-24-2009
20120203916APPARATUS AND METHOD OF PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION - An apparatus and method of communication include establishing, by a first communication device, a proximity-based connection with a another communication device, transmitting a first public network address of the first communication device over the proximity-based connection, receiving a second public network address of another communication device over the proximity-based connection, and establishing a communication session over a wide area connection using the first public network address and the second public network address.08-09-2012
20120203913METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FEDERATION OF PROXY-BASED AND PROXY-FREE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - A method and system for federation of proxy-based and proxy-free communications systems is disclosed. In one embodiment, a computer-executable method comprises broadcasting a network address of a federation computer with an identification of the federation computer as a server for domains operating on a proxy-less protocol. The method includes establishing communications with a server on the network according to a proxy-less communications protocol to receive data bound for a destination domain that operates according to a proxy-based communications protocol and to receive data bound for a destination domain that operates according to a proxy-less communications protocol. Further, the method calls for establishing communications with a proxy on the network according to a proxy-based protocol to receive data bound for a destination domain.08-09-2012
20090259755METHOD FOR SETTING UP A COMMUNICATIONS PATH IN AN EXTENDED COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM AND CORRESPONDING TUNNEL END-POINTS - A method is proposed for setting up a communications path between a first communications sub-network and a second communications sub-network by means of an intermediate communications sub-network in an extended communications network.10-15-2009
20090240816METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING A REMOTE LOCATION WITH AN OPTICAL READER HAVING A PROGRAMMABLE MEMORY SYSTEM - An optical reader for accessing a remote location on a network includes an optical scanning system, a memory system, an output circuit for interfacing to a first computer disposed on the network, and a switching device for switching between a scan mode, a record mode and a playback mode. The optical reader further includes a transmitter for transmitting code information representative of a code to the first computer. In the scan mode, the code information is indicative of information representative of an encoded indicia scanned by the optical scanning system. In the playback mode the code information is indicative of information retrieved from a user-selectable memory in the memory system. The code information is configured to cause the first computer to determine routing information to the remote location, and access the remote location on the network in accordance with the determined routing information.09-24-2009
20090240815UPNP APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING REMOTE ACCESS SERVICE - A universal plug and play (UPnP) device and method of providing a remote access service, the method including: receiving product identification number (PIN) information that is an identifier provided to a remote access server (RAS) device when manufactured and a uniform resource locator (URL) of the RAS device from the outside; generating WPS messages including a credential ID and remote access transport agent (RATA) capability information, which are generated based on the PIN information; encapsulating an extensible authentication protocol (EAP) packet including the WPS messages as an IP based application protocol packet; and transmitting the IP based application protocol packet to the RAS device.09-24-2009
20090240813COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM OF BUS NETWORK STRUCTURE AND METHOD USING THE COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM - Disclosed is a communication network system in a bus network structure, the system including: a broker processing a message routing; a connector, and a plurality of services connected to the broker via the connector, wherein: the service is a communicable terminal node and each of the plurality of services is connected to the broker via one connector, the connector is a module for mediating a connection between the service and the broker, each connector connected to only one broker, and the broker is a module for setting up a routing path or the connection with the connector, and to process the message routing, all brokers connected to each other in a full mesh topology.09-24-2009
20080244076Method and Apparatus for Tagging Network Traffic Using Extensible Fields in Message Headers - Embodiments of a system and method of tagging network traffic with relevant user demographic and location information for facilitating the delivery of directed media are described. A tag processing module within a router device coupling a client computer to a destination site served by a server computer intercepts a request from a client computer to a server computer over a network. The tag processing module determines a unique device identifier corresponding to the client computer, generates a local user identifier for the client computer by performing a one-way hashing operation on the unique device identifier, derives demographic and location information for a user of the client computer, generates a request identifier associated with the intercepted request by encrypting the local user identifier, demographic information and geographic location information in an alphanumeric string, and embeds the alphanumeric string in an extensible field of a packet within the request to generate a tagged request identifier.10-02-2008
20110131330COLLOCATING DESKTOP VIRTUAL MACHINES TO PROXIMITY OF THE USER - A plurality of master desktop images for a plurality of users are stored at a plurality of geographically diverse data centers. At a first one of the data centers, a virtual desktop is constructed for a remote client. The virtual desktop is constructed from a given one of the master desktop images at the first one of the data centers and an individualized delta image for a user associated with the remote client. When it is determined that the remote client is at a geographical location wherein the first one of the data centers is not the closest one of the data centers to the remote client, the virtual desktop for the remote client is reconstructed at a second, closest, one of the data centers. The virtual desktop is reconstructed from a given one of the master desktop images at the second one of the data centers and the individualized delta image for the user associated with the remote client. A copy of the individualized delta image is moved from the first one of the data centers to the second one of the data centers to facilitate reconstructing the virtual desktop.06-02-2011
20090019165METHODS FOR SENDING SMALL PACKETS IN A PEER-TO-PEER (P2P) NETWORK - An improved mechanism is provided that facilitates transmission of small packets within an ad hoc peer-to-peer network. A small packet is identified to a receiver within a control channel so that its lower power can be considered in an interference management protocol implemented among local peer devices. In a traffic slot, a transmitter voluntarily backs down on the transmitter power as a smaller packet will require much lower signal-to-noise ratio. This will improve the signal energy per bit per noise power density for the transmission as well as minimize the interference caused to other wireless communications happening in the same spectrum.01-15-2009
20090138602 Secured agent communications - A server communicates with a network appliance. The server includes an agent. The network appliance sends a request to the agent. The request includes an identification of a port. The agent negotiates a secured communication channel with the network appliance on the identified port to retrieve further instructions from the network appliance. The instructions includes one or more commands. The server reports the results of the executed command to the network appliance on the initial channel.05-28-2009
20080320146Establishing interaction between a process and a server process - A method for establishing interaction between a process and a server process. In one implementation, a request may be sent to a server. The request may have a pointer and a registration for an object. The object may be designated to receive responses from the server. The object may receive the pointer and an indication that the server has instantiated a server process. The process may then interact with the server process.12-25-2008
20080320145Methods and Servers for Displaying and Activating Disconnected Sessions - A method for displaying and activating disconnected sessions includes the step of receiving information associated with a user. At least one disconnected session already associated with the user is identified in response to the information. A graphical representation of the at least one disconnected session associated with the user is displayed to the user. A request to connect to the at least one disconnected session is received from the user. A connection is established between a client computer operated by the user and the requested at least one disconnected session.12-25-2008
20080307098METHOD FOR INTELLIGENT, SELF-MANAGED, DECENTRALIZED CONNECTION POOL MANAGEMENT POOL - A server can be connected to a set of other servers using a connection pool of connections. When information is to be sent to one of the set of other servers, the server can obtain a connection from the connection pool.12-11-2008
20080307097Method and apparatus for refactoring a graph in a graphical programming language - One embodiment of the present invention provides a system that refactors a port of a node in a graph, wherein the node has one or more input ports and one or more output ports. During operation, the system identifies an input port of the node to be refactored. The system then creates a pass-through node, wherein the value on an output port of the pass-through node equals the value on an input port of the pass-through node. Next, the system connects the output port of the pass-through node to the input port to be refactored, so that the refactored input port receives a value that is set on the input port of the pass-through node.12-11-2008
20080228925METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR SELECTING MEDIA CONTENT BASED ON TECHNICAL ENVIRONMENT INFORMATION - The present disclosure includes methods and systems for selecting media content based on technical environment information. A connection over a network between a server and a client is established. The e connection is associated with the technical environment information and the technical environment information is associated with an the ability of the client to playback media content locally. The method includes selecting, at the server, a version of media content appropriate for playback at the client locally based on the ability of the client.09-18-2008
20080228922System and Method for Providing Client Awareness in High-Availability Application Architecture - System and method for providing client awareness in a high-availability application architecture. One embodiment is a method of servicing a service request in a network maintained by an organization and comprising a plurality of servers. The method comprises responsive to an initial request for service by a client via a service broker, providing to the client through the service broker a response identifying an available one of the servers; and connecting the client directly to the available server, the client thereafter sending successive requests for service directly to the available server without involvement of the service broker.09-18-2008
20080228924SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CREATION OF AUTOMATED CONTENT DEPENDENT PROCEDURES IN AN ONLINE ENVIRONMENT - There is provided a system and method for creating automated content dependent procedures in an online environment, wherein the user will be able to create graphical objects representing a collection of operations and desired online services, wherein both the editing operations and desired online services are associated with a specific type file, preferably a file type of a data file. The process is based on selection of a file type by the user and is illustrated to the user by a graphical user interface containing the content dependent information. With this approach the user will be able to create automated procedures for processing of computer file types.09-18-2008
20110047277SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING TRUST FOR SIP MESSAGES - A method for performing initial registration is provided. The method includes receiving a server timeout message, the server timeout message including at least a field set to a value equal to a value received during a first registration. The method further includes initiating restoration procedures by performing an initial registration.02-24-2011
20110047278DATA SYNCHRONISATION - A data synchronisation system comprising: 02-24-2011
20110047276ACCEPT AND RECEIVE ENHANCEMENTS - A server issues an enhanced accept and receive call to a client computer. The enhanced accept and receive call requires the server to subsequently receive a block of data from the client computer in order to establish a session connection between the client computer and a server resource. In response to the block of data from the client computer failing to be received by the server, the server prevents the session connection from being pushed onto an accept queue on the server until the server executes a corrective process.02-24-2011
20100332664LOAD-BALANCING CLUSTER - A load-balancing cluster includes a switch having a plurality of ports; and a plurality of servers connected to at least some of the plurality of ports of the switch. Each server is addressable by the same virtual Internet Protocol (VIP) address. Each server in the cluster has a mechanism constructed and adapted to respond to connection requests at the VIP by selecting one of the plurality of servers to handle that connection, wherein the selecting is based, at least in part, on a given function of information used to request the connection; and a firewall mechanism constructed and adapted to accept all requests for the VIP address for a particular connection only on the server that has been selected to handle that particular connection. The selected server determines whether it is responsible for the request and may hand it off to another cluster member.12-30-2010
20110055406Maintaining session states within virtual machine environments - Sessions states within virtual machine (VM) environments are maintained. Each VM environment hosts a guest operating system (OS) and one or more application programs running. The guest OS and the application computer programs of each VM environment constitute a session. A connection broker maintains a state machine as to states of the sessions and permits transitions among the states in response to messages, commands, and internal decisions. Different types of agents may send the messages, and the commands. The states of the sessions may include a pending state and a number of other states. The pending state is an interim state that indicates a session is being transitioned from one of the other states to another of the other states. These other states may include an offline state, an online-down state, an online-up state, a suspended state, an active state, an idle state, a disconnected state, and a failed state.03-03-2011
20110055405System, method and apparatus for establishing interactive media session based on IP multimedia subsystem - A method and system for establishing an interactive media session based on IP Multimedia Subsystem, including: a terminal adapted to initiate an interactive media session request and receive a media session response; a serving-CSCF adapted to trigger the request to the application server according to a triggering rule and route the message; a proxy-CSCF adapted to forward the request and the response between the terminal and the serving-CSCF; an application server adapted to process the service request; a media control entity adapted to control resource allocation of the media carrier entity; and a media carrier entity adapted to allocate address ports for RTSP connection and RTP connection with the terminal. The present invention can be applied to a NGN network where the carrier and control are separated to improve the media delivery efficiency.03-03-2011
20110055404Device Management - A method for managing communication in a system having a device in communication with a server via a communication path which includes gateway. A communication session is initiated by transmitting a request signal from the device to the gateway. The signal is then routed through the gateway, and the signal is then transmitted from the gateway to the server.03-03-2011
20110055403Collaboration agent based system architecture to support collaborative multimedia applications over wireless networks - In one embodiment, a method of sending data from a first node participating in a session of a collaborative application via a wireless network to a plurality of second nodes participating in the session of the collaborative application via a wired network includes generating a plurality of data streams corresponding to the plurality of second nodes at the first node, reducing the plurality of data streams to a single stream from among the plurality of data streams, and sending the single data stream to a collaboration agent associated with the first node and connected to the wired network. In another embodiment instances of the collaborative application are run at both the first node and the collaboration agent. In yet another embodiment, an instance of the collaborative application is run only at the collaboration agent which is connected to the first node via a bi-directional windows sharing link.03-03-2011
20110055402EXPOSING AUTOMATON INFORMATION BASED ON AGGREGATION OF MEMBER INFORMATION - Architecture that exposes automaton information of an automaton based on aggregation of a set of member information and according to aggregation logic. The aggregation logic can include presence state, supported communications modalities, and time availability (e.g., business hours). The aggregation logic for presence state member information can be defined by the most available presence state of all persons the automaton it is hiding. The aggregation logic for capabilities member information can be the capabilities of the most available person the automaton is hiding. The aggregation logic for business hours member information can be defined by the largest interval possible covered by the persons hidden by the automaton. Other types of member information can be considered.03-03-2011
20110055401Method For Asynchronous Multimedia Retrieval - The present invention relates to a method for asynchronous multimedia content retrieval, which can be applied to TV-Anytime standard or MPEG standard. In summary, an asynchronous multimedia retrieval method is provided as including: a client establishing the first session as requesting to the server; transmitting to the server the retrieval inquiry message for contents that the server needs; terminating the first session after the retrieval inquiry; establishing the second session and requesting to the server the result for the retrieval inquiry at a certain point in time that the previously set time has passed; and receiving the retrieval result from the server and terminating the second session.03-03-2011
20110258329METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING ONLINE SERVICES CORRESPONDING TO MULTIPLE MOBILE DEVICES, SERVER, MOBILE DEVICE, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A method and a system for providing online services corresponding to multiple mobile devices, a server, a mobile device, and a computer program product are provided. The server provides a service website. In the present method, a login request of a user account of the service website is received from a terminal device. A first connection with a first mobile device of the user account is established, and a first device data of the first mobile device is obtained. A second connection with a second mobile device of the user account is established while maintaining the first connection, and a second device data of the second mobile device is obtained. A first online service corresponding to the first mobile device and a second online service corresponding to the second mobile device are provided on the service website according to the first device data and the second device data.10-20-2011
20110258328Secure location session manager - A Secure Location Session Manager (SLSM) is an intelligent router for open mobile alliance (OMA) Secure User Plane Location (SUPL) Version 1.0 (and later) messages best implemented when multiple, geo-diverse SUPL servers are deployed in a distributed environment, such as an active-active redundant configuration within a wireless carrier's network. In a standalone option, the SLSM acts as a “middleman” for all SUPL positioning messages between a mobile device and a responsible SUPL server. In an embedded option, the SLSM resides within an existing server. The SLSM manages and stores session information for all pending and ongoing SUPL positioning sessions in internal tables for routing and load balancing purposes. The external interfaces of the SLSM consist of OMA ULP messages.10-20-2011
20110264811SIGNAL RELAY METHOD AND RELAY SERVER PERFORMING A RELAY OPERATION BETWEEN A PLURALITY OF FIRST TERMINALS AND A SECOND TERMINAL VIA A NETWORK - The present invention has an object to provide a server apparatus capable of accessing a terminal apparatus connected via an IP network to a router from an externally provided terminal apparatus in a simple and firm manner without previously performing complex setting operation.10-27-2011
20110264808Refresh Requests in Soft-State Signalling - A power-saving synchronization of refresh requesting messages transmitted from a client terminal (10-27-2011
20110264807Method of Operating a Signalling Gateway and an Application Server, and Signalling Gateway and Application Server - A method of operating a signalling gateway in a decoupled mode of operation for routing signalling messages between an SS7 and an IP-based network is provided. Further, the invention relates to a method of processing a connection oriented signalling message at an application server process, wherein the message is exchanged via a signalling gateway between an SS7 network node and the application server process. The application server process serves at least one application server in an IP-based network. The invention further provides a signalling gateway for routing signalling messages between an SS7 network and an IP-based network and an application server comprising an application server process for processing signalling messages, in particular connection oriented messages.10-27-2011
20080320148Session initiation protocol adaptor - A SIP adaptor modifies the format of a session initiation protocol (SIP) message. A SIP message in a first format is received by the SIP adaptor from a first SIP server that is based on the first message format. The SIP adaptor modifies the SIP message to a second format and forwards the modified SIP message to a second SIP server that is based on the second message format. By modifying SIP messages, the SIP adaptor allows communications sessions to be established between clients of SIP servers that utilize dissimilar SIP message formats.12-25-2008
20110119386DIRECTING DATA IN A WEB BROWSER FROM A PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - Some embodiments provide a system for interacting with a web browser. During operation, the system establishes a network connection with the web browser from a portable electronic device. Next, the system provides data to the web browser using a web server on the portable electronic device. Finally, the system sends a set of control instructions from the web server to the web browser, wherein the control instructions direct the web browser to obtain and display the data.05-19-2011
20110179182METHOD FOR PAIRING A COMPUTER WITH A VIDEO CONFERENCE DEVICE - A method including: generating a random identification token on a computer, said identification token identifying the computer; modulating the identification token to an audio signal on the computer; causing, with the computer, a speaker to emit the audio signal; receiving, at video conference device, the audio signal with a microphone associated with the video conference device; demodulating the audio signal to the identification token in the video conference device; sending at least the identification token and a unique identifier of the video conference device to the computer; and establishing a communication session through a communication network, that both the computer and video conference device are communicatively connected to, from the computer to the video conference device enabling control of, and data transfer to, the video conference device from the computer.07-21-2011
20110179180COMMUNICATION SESSIONS AMONG DEVICES AND INTERFACES WITH MIXED CAPABILITIES - Users of various devices may participate in communication sessions, but only if the interfaces and components of such devices feature a minimum set of capabilities involved in the communication session type; e.g., in order to participate in a teleconference, the device of every user has to be capable of sending and receiving audio. Instead, a communication session server may automatically convert session items received from each user into interface-specific representations for each other user, based on the capabilities of the interface and device of the other user. For example, speech recognition may transform speech to text output; speech synthesis may transform text input to speech; and video recognition may identify individuals and gestures in a video stream and represent this information as text. The server may therefore host a “mixed” communication session, where each user may fully participate irrespective of the capabilities of the chosen device and interface.07-21-2011
20110125909In-Session Continuation of a Streaming Media Session - Methods and systems are provided for forwarding a media streaming session from one node to another node while the session is in progress. A streaming server may store data sent between nodes in the session. When one node is forwarded to a new node, the stored data may be used to transition to the new node with little or no interruption in data sent between nodes in the session. A user interface may allow a user to set preferences and control other aspects of the session forwarding features.05-26-2011
20110125911SIMULTANEOUS VISUAL AND TELEPHONIC ACCESS TO INTERACTIVE INFORMATION DELIVERY - A method and system for providing a visual interactive voice response session are provided. A visual interactive voice response server determines whether a session identifier database includes a session identifier that is associated with a first device. The visual interactive voice response server initiates the visual interactive voice response session with the first device when the session identifier database includes the session identifier that is associated with the first device. The session identifier that is associated with the first device is removed from the session identifier database when the visual interactive voice response session is terminated.05-26-2011
20110125910COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, CALL CONTROL SERVER DEVICE, AND CALL CONTROL PROGRAM - Upon receipt of an access request from a Web terminal, a service providing server transmits a shop ID stored in an external information database to the Web terminal. When the shop ID is selected by the Web terminal, the service providing server acquires external connection destination information, and notifies a SIP proxy server of the information via the Web terminal. When notified of the information, the SIP proxy server identifies internal connection destination information in an internal information database, based on an IP address added at the time of the notification of the external connection destination information. After making a call to a telephone device with the use of the identified internal connection destination information, the SIP proxy server makes a call to the shop with the use of the external connection destination information. After that, the SIP proxy server establishes a connection between the telephone device and the shop.05-26-2011
20120311164METHOD OF CONTROLLING CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of controlling connection establishment to transmit or receive A/V data in a wireless network is provided. The method of controlling connection establishment to transmit or receive A/V data in a first device of a wireless network that includes a coordinator and at least one device comprises transmitting connection request information required to request connection establishment with a second device and a connection request message which includes capability information of the first device to the second device and receiving a connection response message from the second device in response to the connection request message.12-06-2012
20120311163PROVIDING TELEPHONY SERVICES TO TERMINALS BEHIND A FIREWALL AND/OR A NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATOR - A method and apparatus for allowing telephony or other types of media communications and services to be provided for a device (12-06-2012
20120311162SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR VALIDATING TRANSACTION ACTIVITY WITH AT LEAST ONE SESSION IDENTIFIER - Various embodiments provide systems for validating transaction activity a user may perform on a website in which the user has engaged in an initial interactive session. According to particular embodiments, the system comprises a memory and at least one processor configured to: (a) receive, from the website, information identifying the user and information that the user is engaging in the initial interactive session with the website; and (b) after receiving the information: (1) validate one or more transaction activities the user can engage in during an interactive session with the website; (2) issue a session identifier that is associated with the plurality of validated transaction activities, the website, and the initial interactive session with the website; and (3) store the session identifier along with the information identifying the user, the website, and the initial interactive session in the memory. Associated methods are also provided.12-06-2012
20090210537Mobile communications device and associated application for use thereon - An application manager configured for use on a resource-limited device, the application manager including: an application engine configured to effect communications between a plurality of applications installed on the resource limited device and one or more external network sites; and a connection manager configured to control and/or coordinate when the plurality of applications are able to attempt to establish communications with the one or more external network sites. The resource-limited device may be a mobile terminal.08-20-2009
20120210007DENIAL OF SERVICE DETECTION AND PREVENTION USING DIALOG LEVEL FILTERING - A method may include receiving a session initiation protocol (SIP) request message and determining whether a dialog exists corresponding to the request message. The method may also include determining whether the dialog is in a first phase or a second phase when a dialog exists corresponding to the session control protocol message and querying a table indicating valid protocol requests for the determined phase to determine whether the received request message is valid. The method may include rejecting the request message when determined that the request message is not valid.08-16-2012
20100217872NOTIFICATION MODEL OVER A SERVER-TO-SERVER CONNECTION POOL - A server-to-server notification model that employs a connection pool such that an asynchronous request issued from the pool can access any session of the remote server for pending notifications on all of the sessions. Only one asynchronous request (or call) is issued to the remote server for all sessions in the connection pool, and the call is completed if any notifications to any participating sessions occur on the remote server. When the asynchronous request completes, the returned data provides a set of the sessions that have pending notifications.08-26-2010
20110145418METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING TO VIRTUAL MACHINES, VIA A DESIGNATED WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DRIVER, ACCESS TO DATA ASSOCIATED WITH A CONNECTION TO A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - The methods and systems described herein are directed to providing, to virtual machines, access to data associated with a connection to a wireless local area network, in a computing device executing a hypervisor hosting a first virtual machine and a second virtual machine. A first driver executed by a first virtual machine of the first physical computing device establishes a network connection to a second physical computing device, via a wireless local area network interface of the first physical computing device. The first driver receives from a second driver executed by a second virtual machine of the first physical computing device, a request for a characteristic of the network connection. The first driver provides, responsive to the request, data comprising the requested characteristic to the second driver.06-16-2011
20110138063Method and Apparatus for Reporting Uniform Resource Locator, Method and Apparatus for Setting Up Connection, and Communication System - A method and apparatus for reporting a Uniform Resource Locator (URL), a method and apparatus for setting up a connection, and a communication system are disclosed. The URL reporting method includes obtaining an Internet Protocol (IP) address and static information; registering the IP address and the static information with a Dynamic Domain Name System (DDNS) server; constructing a first connection request URL that carries the static information; and reporting the first connection request URL to an Auto Configuration Server (ACS).06-09-2011
20110138062RECIPROCAL PUBLIC TRUST RELATIONSHIP - Publicly accessible linking information is to establish a trusted relationship between reciprocally linked entities controlling web resources, such as websites or web logs. A method of establishing a trust relationship between two entities identifying a user-installed link to a second web resource in a first web resource. Next, the method determines when a reciprocal link is made in the second web resource directed to the first web resource and creates a trust relationship between the entities based on the reciprocal link.06-09-2011
20110138061ESTABLISHING AND UTILIZING TERMINAL SERVER DYNAMIC VIRTUAL CHANNELS - The present invention extends to methods, systems, and computer program products for establishing and utilizing terminal server dynamic virtual channels. In some embodiments, a terminal server sends a new channel request to a terminal server. The client receives the new channel request and forwards the new channel request to a listener for a plug-in. The listener creates an instance of the client side plug-in and sends a channel accept to the terminal server. The terminal server receives the channel accept and creates an instance of a server side plug-in. The server and the client agree to use a unique identifier for identifying the established dynamic virtual channel. In other embodiments, data for a dynamic virtual channel is tunneled between computers over a static virtual channel.06-09-2011
20110138060METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SESSION DUPLICATION AND SESSION SHARING - A method and apparatus for session duplication within the advanced multimedia system (AMS) framework are disclosed. The method includes duplicating a session running on a first application or device on a second application or device. A method and apparatus for sharing media is disclosed. The method includes sharing media running on a first application or device with a second application or device.06-09-2011
20110138058Server for routing connection to client device - The purpose of the present invention is to provide an Internet connection system capable of performing bidirectional communications between a home network and the Internet by relatively simple means and enabling manufacturers of client-side home network appliances to find a unique added value.06-09-2011
20110138059COMMUNICATION CHANNEL BETWEEN WEB APPLICATION AND PROCESS OUTSIDE BROWSER - One or more techniques and/or systems are disclosed herein for relaying a request to a process running on a computing device from a web client and receiving a response from the process. A bridge message client disposed in a web application, running in a browser on a computer, opens a local connection to a process running outside the browser. The bridge message client comprises a communication channel ID that identifies a communication channel to host the local connection to a bridge server, and a bridge message client ID facilitates communications from the bridge server to the web application. The bridge server is disposed outside of the browser environment, and can receive a request from the bridge message client and forward it to the process, and/or can receive a response to the request from the process and forward it to the bridge message client over the local connection.06-09-2011
20090300189COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a cooperating system of a Web server and a communication service control server, information of an error in a communication network is not notified until the Web server inquires the communication service control server. To solve the problem, provided is a communication system comprising a session control server for controlling communication sessions from/to a plurality of terminals, an application server for communicating with the session control server, a Web server for communicating with the application server, and a network for coupling the session control server, the application server and the Web server. The application server is configured to transmit status related information including information on each communication session status of the plurality of terminals to the Web server. The Web server is configured to detect each communication session status of the plurality of terminals based on the received status related information.12-03-2009
20090300186METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A COMMUNICATION BETWEEN AN OBJECT, A USER DEVICE AND A SERVICE DEVICE - A method and a system for establishing communication between an object (12-03-2009
20110153843Multimedia Communication Using Co-Located Care of Address for Bearer Traffic - In a wireless communications system in which a mobile node seeks a communication session with a correspondent node by first signaling for initialization of the communication session through a first data path via an intermediate node. Thereafter, contents of the communication is established through a second data path in which the mobile node and the correspondent node communicate straightforwardly without going through the intermediate node.06-23-2011
20110153840SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR GSLB MEP CONNECTION MANAGEMENT ACROSS MULTIPLE CORE APPLIANCES - The present disclosure presents systems and methods for obtaining metric information by a multi-core GSLB intermediary device and providing global server load balancing services using the obtained information. A first core of a multi-core GSLB appliance establishes a transport layer connection to a remote load balancer at a site of a plurality of sites. The first core transmits a message to each of the other cores of the multi-core GSLB appliance that that the first core is a master core for receiving metric information from the load balancer. The first core receives metric information of the remote site from the load balancer. The first core propagates the metric information to each of the other cores of the GSLB appliance. A GSLB virtual server on a slave core receives a DNS request. The GSLB virtual server determines a DNS resolution for the DNS request based on the metric information.06-23-2011
20110191478QUICK ACCESS DISPLAY - A quick access display with a small screen is physically attached to the outside of a laptop computer. Selected and key information in formatted display frames is electronically pushed to the quick access display by an application program loaded to run on the laptop computer's operating system. The formatted display frames are communicated over a universal serial bus (USB), or wirelessly by radio frequency identification (RFID) chips, BLUETOOTH, or IEEE-802.11 Wi-Fi. Operating power for the quick access display is provided by long-life watch batteries and the electronics are implemented in low power MOS technologies.08-04-2011
20110264809METHOD FOR EXCHANGING DATA - The present invention relates to a method for exchanging data between at least two servers with use of a gateway. Preferably the method is applied to healthcare systems. Each server holds a unique federated identifier, which identifier identifies a single patient (P). Thus, it is possible for the servers to communicate with each other without having to reveal the true identity of patient. By creating one session pseudonym for each pair of providing server (10-27-2011
20100030899Methods, Systems, and Software for Providing Service Integration Framework - A preferred embodiment of the subject invention comprises a system for implementing computer network services and applications, comprising a front-end component comprising one or more applications; a back-end component comprising one or more services; and an abstraction layer component operable to communicate with the front-end and back-end components. In another preferred embodiment, the subject invention comprises a system for linking applications and services, comprising: a vendor connectivity component; a business integration component; a security component; a utility component; and a back end connectivity component.02-04-2010
20100030900Peer-to-Peer Identity Management Interfaces and Methods - Peer-to-peer (P2P) application programming interfaces (APIs) that allow an application to create, import, export, manage, enumerate, and delete P2P identities are presented. Further, the management of group identity information is provided. APIs abstract away from low level credential and cryptographic functions required to create and manage P2P identities. This management includes retrieval and setting of a friendly name, generation of a cryptographic public/private key pair, retrieval of security information in the form of an XML fragment, and creation of a new name based on an existing identity. Since the P2P environment also allows for the existence of multiple separate groups of peers within the P2P cloud, a preferred embodiment of the present invention also allows for the enumeration of all groups associated with a given identity, for each identity existing for the user.02-04-2010
20100017521QoS CHANNELS FOR MULTIMEDIA SERVICES ON A GENERAL PURPOSE OPERATING SYSTEM PLATFORM USING DATA CARDS - A SIP (session initiation protocol) service activation abstraction layer that provides a unified interface to upper layer applications for discovering, establishing, and managing the QoS connectivity. In one implementation, this is IP Multimedia Subsystem-centric, further supporting applications that utilize SIP for session control. This capability extends to the data card universe allowing UMTS data card vendors to establish concurrent QoS-based sessions using multiple primary PDP (packet data protocol) contexts based on a set of SIP triggers, further allowing applications running on a computing system to transparently utilize the established pipes based on the individual QoS requirements.01-21-2010
20100017520DATA SYNCHRONIZATION - The invention relates to a method of limiting the size of synchronization messages between a first synchronization device and a second synchronization device. The first device specifies a maximum message size for synchronization messages to be sent to the first device and transmits information on the maximum message size to the second device. The second device transmits to the first device one or more synchronization messages which are equal to or smaller than the maximum message size of the first device.01-21-2010
20100017519METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMICALLY DETERMINING CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT MECHANISM BASED ON THE RELATIVE LOCATIONS - An apparatus and a method for dynamically determining a connection establishment mechanism between virtual machines (VMs) based on locations of the VMs. The apparatus includes a communication agent unit for receiving messages relating to the locations of the VMs, a control unit for determining the connection establishment mechanism between the VMs based on the received messages and a controlling mechanism to establish a connection between the VMs according to the determined connection establishment mechanism. The method includes receiving messages relating to the locations of the VMs, determining the connection establishment mechanism between the VMs based on the received messages, and establishing a connection between the VMs according to the determined connection establishment mechanism.01-21-2010
20080281969Controlling access to versions of application software by a server, based on site ID - A plurality of versions of software application programs can be handled by a single server serving multiple user-clients who each need access to specific ones of the plurality of versions. Thus such different versions can run simultaneously without requiring upgrading of early versions and no interference between versions. A particular version is given a SiteID that a user request calls, and a table in the server is consulted to keep track of which SiteID corresponds to which version and to assign each request to the appropriate version. A directory or registry must be set up to accommodate the table which must be consulted for each request. No significant change need be made in any version of the software application program since the table is created at installation time on the server and the SiteID's are assigned to the users when they get rights to the particular version of interest by an administrator. In a preferred embodiment, a SiteID identifies (and the “site” embodies) a collection of databases that the user may need access to. One and only one application software version is associated with a SiteID. Accessing a table that maps the SiteID to a particular version can be monitored and additional programs run responsive to information about such access.11-13-2008
20110307616LOW-LEVEL REMOTE SHARING OF LOCAL DEVICES IN A REMOTE ACCESS SESSION ACROSS A COMPUTER NETWORK - In one embodiment, a device is connected to a first computer via a first local communication port of the first computer. If the device is configured to autoconnect with a second computer upon connection of the device to the first computer, a remote access session is established between the first computer and the second computer. Low-level local communication from the device is intercepted at the first local communication port of the first computer. The low-level local communication is transmitted from the first computer to the second computer via the remote access session. The low-level local communication is injected to a second local communication port of the second computer to thereby provide an autoconnection of the device to the second computer.12-15-2011
20110307615METHOD AND MECHANISM FOR IMPLEMENTING TAGGED SESSION POOLS - An improved method, mechanism, and system for implementing, generating, and maintaining for implementing session pools is disclosed. A session in a session pool can be customized to with a specific set of affinities and attributes. Tags can be associated with the customized sessions. When a later request is made for a session having a set of desired characteristics, the tags can be used to search for and identify a session in the session pool having the requested characteristics. Also disclosed is a method, mechanism, and system for dynamic sizing of session pools.12-15-2011
20120042081COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USING A MULTI-TIERED REGISTRATION SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL - A communication system for using a multi-tiered registration session initiation protocol (SIP) includes: a client, a relay server and a plurality of SIP servers. The relay server is connected with the SIP servers and the client. The relay server is configured to establish a connection with the client and register with each of the SIP servers so as to select at least one of the SIP servers for direct communication with the client, thereby solving the conventional problem of incompatibilities existing between the client and SIP servers and between the SIP servers and further saving communication costs for the client in dialing various numbers.02-16-2012
20120042083METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING A LARGE MESSAGE MODE CPM MESSAGE TO GROUP - The present invention provides a method and a system for sending a large message mode converged IP messaging (CPM) message. The method is used for sending a large message mode CPM message to a target group; a sender CPM client sends a session invitation message of the large message mode CPM message; after receiving the session invitation message, a CPM controlling function entity sends the session invitation message to each receiver address in the target group; a receiver CPM client receives the session invitation message and carries out a media negotiation with the controlling function entity; the controlling function entity carries out a media negotiation with the sender CPM client to determine a media transmission link between the sender CPM client and the receiver CPM client; and the sender CPM client sends the content of the large message mode CPM message to the receiver CPM client via the media transmission link. According to the technical solutions provided in the present invention, the large message mode CPM message can be sent to the target group.02-16-2012
20120042082COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USING SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL IN A NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION ENVIRONMENT - A communication system for using the session initiation protocol (SIP) in a network address translation (NAT) environment is provided, which includes a client, a relay server and a SIP server. The relay server is connected to the SIP server and connected to the client through a NAT server. The relay server is configured to establish connection with the client and register with the SIP server so as to allow direct communication between the client and the SIP server, thereby conducting authentication and management of the client and further solving the conventional problem of incompatibility between the SIP server and the client.02-16-2012
20090150549Dynamic communication stack - A method of facilitating communication between a resource and a computer is described. The computer employs a software application that allows the computer to communicate with the resource. The resource may comprise a medical device such as a blood glucose meter or an insulin pump. In order to facilitate communication between the computer and the resource, the software constructs a communication protocol particular to the type of resource connected to the computer. The stack comprising the communication protocol allows the computer to communicate with the resource. Once the resource and computer cease communication, the stack may be removed from the memory of the computer.06-11-2009
20090172172SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ENABLING PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION AMONG VISITORS TO A COMMON WEBSITE - In one aspect, a method for methods and systems for enabling peer-to-peer communication among visitors to a common website includes determining, by a server unaffiliated with a first URL, that a first computer is accessing the first URL via a first web browser. The method includes determining, by a server, that a second computer is accessing a second URL via a second web browser, the second URL sharing at least a hostname with the first URL. The method includes sending, from a server to the second computer, address information identifying the first computer. The method includes establishing a connection between the second computer and the first computer. In one embodiment, the method includes displaying, to a user of the first computer, a three-dimensional environment incorporating the first web browser.07-02-2009
20090172171METHOD AND AN APPARATUS FOR DISGUISING DIGITAL CONTENT - A method for establishing a disguised communication session between communicating user terminals. The method comprises at a first communicating user terminal, providing data for a communication session with a second communicating user terminal, distributing the data among a plurality of proxy network nodes, and using the plurality of proxy network nodes for forwarding a plurality of flows to the second communicating user terminal, each the flow comprising a portion of the data. The distributing and forwarding is performed so as to disguise at least one characteristic of the communication session from at least one inspection entity probing the plurality of flows.07-02-2009
20090172170ESTABLISHMENT OF MEDIA SESSIONS WITH MEDIA ADAPTATION - The present invention relates to a method and terminal for reporting media format adaptation resources to convert a media format of a media stream of a media session to be established between terminals through a packet switched communications network towards a requesting terminal. The invention further relates to a method and NSIS router for reporting media format adaptation resources for converting a media format of a media stream of a media session to be established between terminals. To allow terminals to establish a media session utilizing media adaptation, the invention provides a NSIS (Next Step In Signaling) based signaling framework facilitating the detection and reservation of media adaptation resources on (and off) a media data path on which media data are transported utilizing a media transport protocol among terminals participating in the session.07-02-2009
20090172169SECURE PROXIES FOR FLAT NETWORKS - A proxy is in communication with an internet protocol network and a mobile operator network. The proxy receives first communications from access points via the internet protocol network, transmits content from the first communications to the mobile operator network, receives second communications from the mobile operator network, and transmits content from the second communications to the access points via the internet protocol network. The proxy may perform operations based on the first and second communications received from either the access points, or from the mobile operator network. The operations performed by the proxy may include modifying the communications, saving certain information regarding the communications, performing authentication, encryption, or decryption of the communications, determining a destination for the communications, or sending the communications to a destination.07-02-2009
20120151069PROTOCOL LINK LAYER - A link is a software abstraction that represents a direct connection between two CoCo nodes. The link layer detects the presence of neighboring devices and establishes links to them. A protocol abstraction layer converts data frames that arrive on network interfaces into packet objects used by the COCO Protocol Suite.06-14-2012
20110320615PROFILE AND CAPABILITY OF WAP-TERMINAL WITH EXTERNAL DEVICES CONNECTED - Data communication system and a method in a data communication system comprising a terminal, e.g. a mobile phone, adapted to communicate with an application server using a wireless transmission protocol, preferably WAP, including a terminal profile. The wireless transmission protocol also includes an attached device's profile that is dynamically updated with data related to a device attached to the terminal.12-29-2011
20110320614Device, System and Method for Providing Distributed Online Services - A device, system, and method is provided for running mobile applications, including a server for running applications and a client installed in a mobile device. The client may connect to the server via a network. The client may display content, receive user input, and send user input to the server. The server may use the client to receive user input and to display content for running applications for the mobile device.12-29-2011
20110320610PROVIDING CONTENT TO CLIENT DEVICE - Content is provided to a client device. A request is received from the client device at a content management service which has access to a database of content and a database of devices on a network. The request identifies content requested by a client. The content management service designates a content source. Capability information is received from the client device. The content management service determines whether the client device has capabilities corresponding to the content identified by the request, using the capability information. Responsive to a determination that the client device has the capabilities, the client device is provided with information to facilitate direct communication between the client device and the content source. Responsive to a determination that the client device does not have the capabilities, a communication channel is constructed between the client device and one or more other devices which have capabilities corresponding to the content.12-29-2011
20120047272ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND BASE STATION FOR MAINTAINING A NETWORK CONNECTION - An electronic device and wireless base station for maintaining a persistent connection are provided. In an embodiment, a system includes an electronic device that connects to a web-server via a physical link that is bandwidth-constrained. The physical link also includes a wireless base station and at least one network address translation (“NAT”) router that is configured to terminate idle connections between the client and the web-server. One of the electronic device and the wireless base station is configured to send keep-alive packets to the web-server in order to reduce the likelihood of the NAT router terminating the connection. The keep-alive packets are sent on a variable basis that is intended to reduce bandwidth consumption while ensuring that the NAT router does not deem the connection idle and terminate the connection.02-23-2012
20120047271NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF PASSING DATA PACKETS THROUGH THE NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION DEVICE - A network address translation (NAT) device requests a network server to transmit an invitation packet sent by a first client to a second client, receives a reply invitation packet transmitted by the network server, and passes the reply invitation packet to the first client. The NAT device requests the network server to transmit a session packet sent by the first client to the second client, and receives a reply session packet directly sent from the second client. The NAT device passes the reply session packet through the NAT device to reach the first client on condition that a destination port in the reply session packet is the same as a source port in the session packet, so as to establish communication between the first client and the second client.02-23-2012
20120047269Network Selection Methods And Apparatus With Use Of A Master Service Management Module And A Prioritized List Of Multiple Aggregator Service Profiles - A communication device is configured to store one or more aggregator service application modules for use in accessing one or more different aggregator services. Each aggregator service offers access through a plurality of offered wireless networks identified by a plurality of offered wireless network identifiers. The communication device maintains a prioritized list of profiles which include one or more aggregator service profiles associated with the one or more aggregator services. A scanning operation is performed for identifying one or more available wireless networks in a geographic area of the device, for producing a scan list of one or more available wireless network identifiers corresponding to the one or more available wireless networks. One of the aggregator service profiles is selected from the prioritized list, causing one of the aggregator service application modules corresponding to the selected profile to be invoked. The invoked module causes one of the available wireless network identifiers from the scan list that matches one of the offered wireless network identifiers to be selected, if such matching identifier exists. A connection is established with one of the available wireless networks corresponding to the selected available wireless network identifier, for accessing a selected aggregator service corresponding to the selected aggregator service profile.02-23-2012
20120210008Method and Mobile Communication System Capable of Establishing Peer-to-Peer Transmission - A method for establishing peer-to-peer (P2P) transmission in a mobile communication system includes a first mobile station requesting the mobile communication system for a first Internet Protocol (IP) address and transmitting a message to a second mobile station to indicate the second mobile station to trigger the P2P transmission when the first mobile station starts to establish the P2P transmission with the second mobile station, the second mobile station requesting the mobile communication system for a second IP address according to the message, the first and second mobile stations updating receiving statuses of the first and second IP addresses to a server device, and the server device outputting information of the second IP address to the first mobile station after the first and second mobile stations obtain the first and second IP addresses, to allow the first mobile station to establish the P2P transmission with the second mobile station accordingly.08-16-2012
20120005353NETWORKED COMPUTER SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATING AND OPERATING IN A VIRTUAL REALITY ENVIRONMENT - The present invention relates to interactive virtual reality networked computer systems and methods that facilitate communication and operation in a virtual reality environment. The virtual reality networked computer system has an infrastructure that includes a number of users, hosts and servers. The interconnected hosts and servers allow users to effectively locate, activate, access and interact within virtual reality environments in a variety of different ways. For example, users can establish user groups such that interaction within the virtual reality environment occurs between hosts (accessed by users) without the need of a central or dedicated server.01-05-2012
20120005351METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AN APPLICATION IDENTIFIER ACROSS APPLICATION ELEMENTS - In one embodiment, a method includes generating a Session Description Protocol (SDP) construct, the SDP construct being arranged to be included in a first signaling flow. The method also includes providing an attribute in the SDP construct. The attribute identifies an application type associated with a first traffic flow. Finally, the SDP construct is forwarded on the first signaling flow.01-05-2012
20120005352INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, PROGRAM, AND METHOD - An information processing method for transmitting a provisional response signal, the information processing method includes: receiving a request signal indicating a request for processing; determining whether a load to be processed in a local device exceeds or equals to a threshold value; transmitting a provisional response signal that stops re-transmission of the request signal to a transmission source of the request signal when it is determined that the load to be processed exceeds or equals to the threshold value in the determining operation and the request signal is received; and transmiting the provisional response signal to the transmission source of the request signal when it is determined that the load to be processed falls below the threshold value in the determining operation and a specific time period elapses after the request signal is received.01-05-2012
20130185442METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR USER PERSONA MANAGEMENT - Systems and techniques for managing a user persona presented in a communication session. In response to a request from an originating user for a communication session, a persona manager for the originating user is invoked, examining request details and the nature and context of the requested communication session and selecting a persona for the user, selection of the persona being employed to indicate services associated with the communication. Similarly, in response to a request from an originating user for a communication session, a persona manager for the receiving user to whom the request is directed examines details of the request and the nature and context of the communication session and makes decisions relating to persona selection for the receiving user. The decision may involve accepting a persona indicated in the originating user's request, or selecting a different persona and creating routing a request to be routed to the receiving user.07-18-2013
20120117249MOBILE DEVICE AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed are a mobile device and a control method thereof. The mobile device includes: a communication section or unit which communicates with a plurality of external devices on a predetermined network; a sensor section or unit which detects an indication direction of the mobile device with reference to a specific part of a casing of the mobile device; and a control section or unit which selects external device location information corresponding to the indication direction of the mobile device detected by the sensor section or unit among a plurality of external device location information corresponding to the plurality of respective external devices, and controls the communication section to start communication with an external device corresponding to the selected external device location information.05-10-2012
20120117248Restarting Network Reachability Protocol Sessions Based on Transport Layer Authentication - In an embodiment, a method comprises establishing a first data communications session with a first router. In response to receiving a first request to establish a second data communications session, a probe message that is configured to test whether the first data communications session or the first router is responsive is sent to the first router. In response to determining that the first router has not acknowledged the probe message before a probe timer has expired, and receiving a second request to establish the second data communications session, the second data communications session with the first router is established and a state for the first data communications session is deleted.05-10-2012
20120011257METHOD FOR PERFORMING TRANSFER OF COLLABORATIVE SESSION CONTROL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM BASED ON INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - A method for performing inter-user equipment (UE) transfer (IUT) of collaborative session control performed by a UE in a network system based on an Internet protocol (IP) multimedia subsystem (IMS) is provided. The method includes transmitting to an IMS network element a subscription message for requesting notification of information regarding other UE, receiving from the IMS network element a subscription acceptance message in response to the subscription message, receiving from the IMS network element a notification message comprising information regarding at least one different UE, and if a UE for transferring the collaborative session control is selected by the at least one different UE, performing a process of transferring the collaborative session control to the selected UE. A signaling overhead caused by a failure in the transfer of collaborative session control can be reduced.01-12-2012
20120047270DIRECTING MODALITIES OVER DIFFERENT NETWORKS IN MULTIMODAL COMMUNICATIONS - Selected modalities of a multimodal communication session may be diverted over different networks by an administrator or automatically to reduce burden on utilized networks. Modalities may be selected and diverted over different networks including the Internet for the same multimodal communication session based on network conditions, communication session attributes, participant attributes, and similar factors.02-23-2012
20110167162System for the Internet Connections, and Server for Routing Connection to a Client Machine - The purpose of the present invention is to provide an Internet connection system which is capable of benefiting from the IPv6 by relatively easy means and in which manufacturers of client-side devices can create added values for users. IPv6 packets are transmitted by a tunneling connection between a home network and a server on the Internet. Also terminal devices present in the home network can be uniquely recognized and controlled from outside via the server. Since all communications are performed via the server on the Internet regardless of the carrier and the ISP, the terminal device and all connections to the terminal device can be freely configured and controlled by the owner or the manufacturer of the server on the Internet.07-07-2011
20110167161METHOD OF LOCATING NAS CONTEXT - A method of locating NAS context relating to a network access server session in a communication network is provided, the method comprising receiving an Accounting Stop Request for a PDP context associated to a network access server session, comparing an Accounting Session ID implemented in the Accounting Stop Request with Accounting Session IDs associated with active network access server sessions, in case that no matching Accounting Session ID is found, determining whether a value of an identification parameter implemented in the received Accounting Stop Request matches a value of a corresponding identification parameter associated with an active network access server session, and locating a NAS context based on the result of matching identification parameters.07-07-2011
20110167160METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING A MULTIMEDIA GATEWAY COMPRISING AN IMSI - A multimedia gateway that has an ISIM is provided. The multimedia gateway comprises: request receiving means for receiving, from a client terminal, a request message that specifies a destination IMS AS and a communications protocol, and identifying an IMPU assigned to the client terminal, establishing means for establishing a session for communication with the IMS AS by means of the communications protocol, and establishing a connection with the IMS AS over the session, authentication information sending means for sending authentication information derived from the ISIM that contains the identified IMPU to the IMS AS, request sending means for sending the request message together with the identified IMPU to the IMS AS through the connection, response receiving means for receiving a response message from the IMS AS through the connection as a response to the request message, and response sending means for sending the response message to the client terminal.07-07-2011
20120011256INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING INFORMATION PROCESSING PROGRAM STORED THEREIN, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - An information processing apparatus acquires operation information of a user, and executes an application based on the operation information. While the application is being executed, the information processing apparatus repeatedly searches for other unspecified information processing apparatuses by using a wireless communication function, and establishes a connection with the one or more of the other information processing apparatuses having been searched for. The information processing apparatus executes a communication application to communicate with the connected one or more of the other information processing apparatuses, based on the operation information and on operation information relating to the one or more of the other information processing apparatuses.01-12-2012
20120016996SIP-BASED CALL SESSION SERVER AND MESSAGE-ROUTING METHOD - A method and SIP-based Call Session Server for routing SIP messages. A Network and Transport layer receives an incoming SIP message and forwards it to one of a plurality of SIP message routing process instances in a SIP Message Routing Framework. The receiving SIP message routing process instance determines a Routing-Key based upon at least one header field in the incoming message, and based upon the Routing-Key, forwards the incoming message to a selected one of a plurality of Back-to-Back User Agent (B2BUA) instances in a Call Session Control Framework. The selected B2BUA instance creates an outgoing SIP message utilizing the Routing-Key to generate a From-Tag in an outgoing request message, or to generate a To-Tag in an outgoing response message, and then forwards the outgoing message to the Network and Transport layer, which transmits the outgoing message.01-19-2012
20120016997RECORDING MEDIUM STORING COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE - A computer acquires correspondence data including a plurality of combinations of identifiers of selected computers, in which parallel processes are started, and identifiers of the parallel processes, wherein the selected computers are among a plurality of computers connected to a multipath network having relay devices extending over two or more hierarchies. The computer specifies a network identifier to be used for distributing communication paths among the selected computers for every selected computer that includes an identifier in the correspondence data, wherein the specified network identifiers is among network identifiers of respective communication paths in the multipath network, and the specified network identifier corresponds to each identifier of a plurality of computers, and is used for routing.01-19-2012
20120023240METHOD FOR GENERATING A COMMUNICATION LINK BETWEEN DEVICES, AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - A method and apparatus for establishing a communication link between a first device and a second device are provided. The method includes transmitting, to the second device, a connection request frame requesting to set a communication link; and receiving, from the second device, the connection request frame including first encoding selection information selecting an encoding method to be applied to content to be transmitted between the first and second devices from among a digital transmission content protection (DTCP) technology and a high-bandwidth digital content protection (HDCP) technology, a connection response frame approving a request to set the communication link by the connection request frame, the connection response frame including second encoding selection information selecting an encoding method identical to the encoding method selected by the connection request frame.01-26-2012
20120023238HOME HUB FOR IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS)/WEB SERVICES INTERACTION - Systems and methods for home hub for IMS/Web services interaction are described. In one aspect, a data communication gateway operating as a home hub includes a processor that executes computer program instructions to provide IMS/Web services interaction to one or more client computing devices. The client computing device(s) are operatively coupled to the home hub. The client computing device(s) are not Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)-enabled devices. To provide SIP- or IMS-based services to such client computing devices, the home hub registers on behalf of the client computing device(s) to a SIP network. The home hub replies to SIP messages on behalf of the SIP network registered device(s) to process all SIP request(s) and provide the registered device(s) with corresponding SIP-based service(s).01-26-2012
20120059942Method and System for Session Modification - A method and system for session modification are provided. The method includes these steps: A home policy and charging rules function (h-PCRF) sends a policy and charging control (PCC) rule providing message to a policy and charging enforcement function (PCEF) b according to a received PCC rule request message, an application layer service message, or an h-PCRF self-trigger event; and the h-PCRF sends a PCC rule providing message to the PCEF a according to a PCC rule response message received from the PCEF b. With this present disclosure, session modification may be implemented when two or more PCEFs are included in the PCC architecture of a system architecture evolution (SAE) system.03-08-2012
20120059941MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION IN A VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENT - To set up a multimedia communication between a visiting user and a visited user who are initially present respectively in different virtual spaces in a virtual environment managed by a server (SC) to which the respective terminals (TC) of the visiting user and the visited user are connected via a packet network (RP), the server sets up a video communication between the visited user and the visiting user, following a virtual movement of the visiting user within a virtual space providing access to the space in which the visited user is present, and sets up an audio communication between the visited user and the visiting user, following a virtual movement of the visiting user into the space in which the visited user is present.03-08-2012
20120059940TERMINAL DEVICE AND DATA SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD - A data synchronization method establishes a communication channel between a terminal device and a cloud server through a network. The terminal device accesses the cloud server through the communication channel, and registers a private data space in a data center of the cloud server. Then the method transmits data of the terminal device to the private data space through the communication channel according to user requirements, to back up the data of the terminal device to the private data space.03-08-2012
20120059939EFFICIENT CONNECTION MANAGEMENT AND DATA SYNCHRONIZATION - Call admission control (“CAC”) servers in a pool are fully connected to one another. Session data received at one of the CAC servers in a pool is synchronized to each of the other CAC servers in the pool by way of the connections. Each CAC server in a first pool may also establish a connection with exactly one CAC server in a second pool. Status updates and commit data is synchronized from a CAC server in the first pool to a CAC server in the second pool. The commit data may then be synchronized to each of the CAC servers in the second pool.03-08-2012
20120059943Establishing a Communication Session - According to a first aspect of the present invention there is provided a method of operating an IP Multimedia Subsystem Application Server to facilitate a communication session between a first user and a second user at a required Quality of Service. The method comprises receiving a notification that a Policy and Charging Rules function associated with the first user has not authorised said required Quality of Service (B03-08-2012
20120210006SESSION BASED SUPPORT OF MULIPLE 3GPP STANDARDS VERSIONS - Embodiments are disclosed that enable a device such as a policy and charging rules function (PCRF) node to operate with other nodes in a long term evolution (LTE) network that are operating at different respective major-minor release combinations of the 308-16-2012
20120124220Method for Implementing Policy and Charging Control in a Roaming Scene - A method for performing policy and charging control in different roaming scenarios includes: establishing multiple Packet Data Network (PDN) connections to the same Access Point Name (APN), and performing relocation of a Bearer Binding and Event Report Function (BBERF) after establishing multiple PDN connections to the same APN. This method implements the policy and charging control on multiple PDN connections established to one APN in the roaming scenarios of the home routed and local breakout.05-17-2012
20120124219Full-Duplex Bi-Directional Communication Over a Remote Procedure Call Based Communications Protocol, and Applications Thereof - Systems and methods for reducing the cost but increasing the performance caused in streaming data between a client and a server are described herein. Embodiments of the present invention relate to reducing the cost but increasing the performance by the traditional data streaming where two TCP connections, one for each direction of traffic is used. Further embodiments allow a server in communication with one or more clients using a RPC based communication protocol to bi-directional stream not on two TCP connections but a single TCP connection. In one embodiment, this is achieved, by transmitting from the client to the server an initial handshake. If the server receives the handshake, then the client streams a request stream to the server and the server streams a response stream to the client simultaneously over the same single TCP connection establishing full-duplex streaming.05-17-2012
20120124218COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SERVER - A communication system and server includes a first memory for storing terminal information of a first terminal and a second terminal, a second memory for storing outgoing call history information of at least either the first terminal or the second terminal, a third memory for storing incoming call history information of at least either the first terminal or the second terminal; and a processing unit for reading out the information from the first memory to control at least either information of the second memory or the third memory in accordance with information contained in a notification from the communication device when setting the connection between at least either the first terminal or the second terminal and the communication device, therefore, two parties to be communicated with each other specify a connection terminal of a call source.05-17-2012
20120124217Adjusting The Connection Idle Timeout In Connection Pools - An approach is provided that responds to a connection request to connect to an external network entity using a connection from a managed connection pool. The connection pool is managed by selecting connections from the connection pool that includes one or more currently unused connections with the external network entity. One of the selected connections is validated by comparing an idle time associated with each of the selected connections to a maximum idle time value corresponding to the external network entity. The maximum idle time value being previously identified at the information handling system. The validated connection is then used to connect to the external network entity to satisfy the connection request.05-17-2012
20120110192LIGHT WEIGHT PROTOCOL AND AGENT IN A NETWORK COMMUNICATION - Systems and methods are provided for using a light weight protocol (LWP) and protocol agent in a network communication system. A protocol agent receives a message in LWP from an end node. The message in LWP is directed to a destination network node that uses a network protocol that the end node is incapable of supporting, such as Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP), Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) or other network protocols. The protocol agent determines a network protocol to map the message to, and generates a message in the determined network protocol based on the received LWP message. The protocol agent then sends the generated message to the destination network node.05-03-2012
20120110193RESELECTION SYSTEM FOR BEARER BINDING AND EVENT REPORTING FUNCTION AND METHOD THEREOF - The present invention discloses a method for a bearer binding and event report function relocation so as to implement deferred linking of the policy and charging control session in the roaming scenario. The present invention implements the deferred linking of the policy and charging control session in roaming scenarios of home roaming and local breakout by establishing a new subsession of the S9 session between a visited PCRF and a home PCRF in a process of the BBERF relocation, and linking the new subsession of the S9 session to the Gxx session established between the destination BBERF and the visited PCRF and the corresponding Gx session.05-03-2012
20120110191NETWORK NODES THAT ESTABLISH SESSIONS USING EXISTING CONNECTIONS IDENTIFIED IN A CENTRAL DATABASE - Network nodes can add information to a central database that identifies their connections to other network nodes. The central database can thereby serve as a repository of information indicating connections between network nodes. When a first network node needs to establish a session to a second network node, it can interrogate the central database to learn what existing connections, if any, can be used for the session. When existing connections provide more than one available pathway between the first and second network nodes, the first network node may select among the existing connections in response to quality of service values that are provided by the central database for those connections.05-03-2012
20100121957PERFORMANCE ENHANCING PROXY HANDOVER - An approach is provided for graceful shutdown and startup of spoofing when a handover procedure is performed. A handover of a performance enhancing proxy (PEP) session associated with a transport connection is detected. A shutdown procedure is initiated to stop spoofing of the transport connection in response to the detected handover. The shutdown procedure avoids teardown of the transport connection during the handover from a first link to a second link of a communication system.05-13-2010
20120158974INTER-WORKING BETWEEN NETWORK ADDRESS TYPE (ANAT) ENDPOINTS AND INTERATIVE CONNECTIVITY ESTABLISHMENT (ICE) ENDPOINTS - A method for inter-working between an alternative network address type (ANAT) endpoint and an interactive connectivity establishment (ICE) is provided. The method may include identifying one or more network addresses operable to be used to communicate with a alternative network address type (ANAT) endpoint. One or more candidates operable to be used for interactive connectivity establishment (ICE) traversal may also be identified. A preferred network address may be determined from the one or more network addresses based on an ANAT endpoint preference. A corresponding candidate may be determined based on the ANAT endpoint preference. The corresponding candidate may use a candidate address to communicate. A media stream may be established between the preferred network address and the corresponding candidate address.06-21-2012
20120158973CUSTODIAN-BASED ROUTING IN CONTENT-CENTRIC NETWORKS - One embodiment of the present invention provides a system for facilitating custodian-based routing. During operation, the system receives, at a computing device, a request for a piece of content from a user, and determines whether the content is available locally. In response to the content not being available locally, the system identifies a remote custodian device that stores the content. The custodian device is not identified by its physical address. The system then identifies a communication endpoint associated with the identified custodian device, and maps a physical address corresponding to the identified communication endpoint. The system establishes a connection to the communication endpoint using the mapped physical address to obtain the requested content.06-21-2012
20120158972ENHANCED CONTENT CONSUMPTION - Enhanced content consumption is provided by establishing a pairing between two computing devices, wherein at least one of the two computing devices provides a primary consumption experience of a digital content item, so that a secondary consumption experience can be provided via operation of at least one of the two computing devices. The method further comprises presenting, using at least one of the two computing devices, the digital content item for consumption by a user. The method further comprises performing one or more supplemental consumption functions with the other of the two computing devices.06-21-2012
20090138605CONNECTION METHOD AND CONFERENCING APPARATUS - In a conferencing system having a first conferencing apparatus and a plurality of second conferencing apparatuses, the plurality of second conferencing apparatuses transmit connection requests, which are for connecting to the first conferencing apparatus, to the first conferencing apparatus based upon first connection information, which is for connecting to the first conferencing apparatus and which a plurality of second communication devices have received from a first communication device. The first conferencing apparatus detects second connection information, which is for connecting to the second conferencing apparatuses that have transmitted the connection requests, and instructs the plurality of second conferencing apparatuses to connect themselves together based upon the second connection information.05-28-2009
20110106955DATA COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, PROXY DEVICE, DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD - A technique for easily realizing data communication without limiting the application layer protocol during data communication while maintaining the proxy function. A mobile communication terminal (05-05-2011
20110106954SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INDUCTIVELY PAIRING DEVICES TO SHARE DATA OR RESOURCES - A computing device is configured to inductively communicate with one or more other devices. The device inductively communicates to (i) determine an identity or class of the second device, and (ii) perform a function that includes communicating with the second device. The function is performed automatically, and is based on the identity or class of the second device.05-05-2011
20100095007Systems and Methods for Dynamic Creation and Release of Proxy Mobile IP Connections - Disclosed are systems, methods and computer program products for facilitating dynamic addition and release of IP addresses in an established Proxy Mobile IPv6 (PMIP) sessions, for example, based on the demand of a mobile device. An example method comprises receiving from the mobile device a request to add a second IP interface type to a current communication session associated with a first IP interface type, wherein the second IP interface type is different from the first IP interface type. The method further includes receiving from the home network a set of IP addresses of the second IP interface type and establishing one or more IP flows of the second IP interface type using one or more received IP addresses. The method further includes associating the one or more IP flows of the second IP interface type with the current communication session for the mobile device.04-15-2010
20100095006EFFICIENT SELECTION OF A MESSAGING MULTIPLEXED CHANNEL INSTANCE - A method, system and article of manufacture are disclosed for selecting a channel instance for connecting a client application with a server application in a multi-channel computer system. In this computer system, when a new channel instance is used to connect one of the client applications with one of the server applications, defined channel instance information is established for the channel instance. The method of this invention comprises the steps of when a new application connection request is made, locking existing channel instance information; and after said locking, scanning through a list of channel instance connections for one of the channel instances that is a candidate channel instance for that new application connection request. The method comprises the further steps of, in response to finding a candidate channel instance, determining whether the candidate channel instance is suitable for the new application connection request.04-15-2010
20110099279Method and system for verifying logical connection - A method and system for maintaining a high reliability logical connection between hosts employs adaptive transparent pinging, clone blocking and bandwidth leveling to realize improvements in the areas of connection status verification, security and bandwidth management. In adaptive transparent pinging, a ping interval that defines a frequency at which ping messages are transmitted from an initiating host to a receiving host to check connection status is dynamically regulated based on data indicative of the reliability of a connection. In clone blocking, the receiving host verifies that a new connection that appears redundant is a re-established connection from the initiating host rather than a cloned connection. In bandwidth leveling, data bursts pending on initiating hosts that exceed a predetermined size are scheduled for transmission to receiving hosts.04-28-2011
20090132715SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONDUCTING SECURE IP TRANSACTION SESSIONS WITH PERSISTENCE - A method for providing a persistent network session is disclosed. The method includes conducting a first session between a terminal and a server via a communication gateway. The first session includes a session between the communication gateway and the server. The method also includes issuing a notification to the communication gateway to continue a session between the terminal and the communication gateway upon closure of the first session.05-21-2009
20090132713SINGLE-ROUNDTRIP EXCHANGE FOR CROSS-DOMAIN DATA ACCESS - An anonymous cross-domain data request message is sent to a target domain, the request message including a cross-domain data request header. A cross-domain response message is also received from the target domain if cross-domain data requests are supported by the computing device and if the data requested by the anonymous cross-domain data request message is available for cross-domain data requests. The cross-domain response message includes a cross-domain request allowed header as well as the data requested by the anonymous cross-domain data request message. The requested data can be thoroughly examined, without restriction, by a Web page initiating the request. The target domain is a different domain than the domain that includes a Web page that requested that the anonymous cross-domain data request message be sent.05-21-2009
20090132714Method and System for Providing Connection Resiliency - A system, method and device for providing connection resiliency. The method including maintaining, by a first proxy, a TCP connection with a TCP client and a TCP connection with a TCP server through one or more TCP networks; maintaining information of both TCP connections by a forwarding component between the TCP networks and the first proxy; establishing, by the forwarding component, a new TCP connection with a second proxy for each of the TCP connections maintained by the first proxy; and forwarding data, to and from both the client and the server, to and from the second proxy without disconnection of the TCP connections of the TCP client and TCP server.05-21-2009
20090132712METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SESSION MOBILITY BETWEEN END USER COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A method and system for providing session mobility between end user communication devices, such as between session initiation protocol (SIP) devices and universal plug and play (UPnP) devices. The session mobility methods and systems make use of a session manager, which can be part of a bridge coupled between the communication devices involved in a communication session, that allows the session to be moved to another end user communication device. The session manager controls the transfer of communication sessions between the end user communication devices. The session manager also is configured to control and manage the addition of end user communication devices to existing sessions between communication devices. As part of this session mobility between communication devices, the session manager can create a virtual device within the bridge to represent an actual communication device that is communicating with a different communication device in a different domain within the communication session.05-21-2009
20120124223GENERALIZED PROXIMITY SERVICE - A system and method for identifying network endpoints that provide a service of interest orders endpoints according to their network proximity to a requesting client. The requesting client may then contact the closest available providing endpoint, thus increasing the efficiency of usage of network resources while decreasing latency and enhancing reliability. In an embodiment of the invention, when a connection to the nearest providing endpoint cannot be established, a mechanism for locating a next-closest alternative endpoint is provided.05-17-2012
20120124222METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSFER OF CALL CONTROL - Means and methodology for a SIP Invite receiving node to withdraw from the SIP session set-up loop by replying a redirect message to the SIP Invite sending node. The redirect message contains information for setting up alternative SIP session, said information being available in the SIP Invite receiving node. This information is needed by the SIP invite sending node for establishing an alternative SIP session as well as information needed by other nodes and applications further on in the SIP session set-up loop. The SIP Invite sending node is specially adapted to retrieve the information from the redirect message for establishing a new SIP session based on and containing the information from the redirect message. Several implementations are given for use in an IP Multimedia Subsystem of a telecommunication network.05-17-2012
20120124221ELEMENT TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A terminal allows immediate receipt of notification, while holding down the load on a management control device. The terminal has a timer value storage for storing a timer value, a counter for counting the cycle indicated by the timer value, a connection request part for transmitting a connection request to the management control device every time when the counting is finished, an event detector for detecting an event, and a timer value modifier for modifying the timer value to a value indicating a shorter cycle, upon occurrence of the event. The connection request part further transmits the connection request to the management control device, upon occurrence of detecting the event, and the timer value modifier modifies the timer value a value indicating a longer cycle, upon receiving a message indicating that there is no processing request from the management control device.05-17-2012
20120166654Card Toolkit Support for IP Multimedia Subsystem - A method, system and computer-usable medium are provide for managing the Open Channel for IMS command correctly the UICC to have knowledge about the specific status codes the ME received from IMS. This knowledge allows the UICC to make a smarter decision on what it attempts to do to access IMS. Accordingly, the UICC is provided with detailed information about the status codes from the IMS service to allow the UICC to make an informed decision. If the UICC does not have such knowledge, it is possible that the UICC will send potentially unwanted commands to the ME to establish access to IMS.06-28-2012
20120166653FACILITATING NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS WITH CONTROL SERVER AND DEVICES UTILIZING VIRTUAL NETWORK CONNECTIONS - A method includes communicating network connection information from a control server to each of a subset of devices for enabling an open network connection between each of the devices; spawning, by each device of the subset, a plurality of virtual machines for network connections that virtualize network capabilities of the device; establishing, by each device of the subset, a respective open network connection with each of the other devices of the subset using a respective spawned virtual machine and network connection information received from the control server; and communicating, by one or more devices of the subset, via each of the open network connections that are established with such one or more devices, data, whereby each such one or more devices of the subset functions in part as a server by serving data to other devices of the subset.06-28-2012
20120221736DEVICE CONTROL APPARATUS, CLIENT APPARATUS, DEVICE CONTROL METHOD, AND DEVICE CONTROL SYSTEM - There is provided a device control apparatus which makes it possible to dispense with device monitoring (polling) by a client apparatus to thereby reduce traffic on a network. A device server 08-30-2012
20120221735MULTIDEVICE SESSION ESTABLISHMENT FOR MULTIMODAL BROWSING - Systems, methods, apparatuses and computer program products for establishing a single session for processing a multimodal application with multiple devices and for distributing the multimodal application amongst the multiple devices participating in the single session based on the respective capabilities of each device are provided. A system, method and computer program product for allowing new devices operated by the same user to join in the previously established session for processing the multimodal application where the capabilities of the new device exceed that of all devices currently participating in the session are also provided.08-30-2012
20120221734INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING INFORMATION PROCESSING PROGRAM STORED THEREIN, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - A search for another information processing apparatus and a predetermined access point is automatically performed. When a result of the search is the other portable information processing apparatus, a process of automatically performing data communication with the other information processing apparatus is performed. On the other hand, when the result of the search is the access point, a process of automatically performing data communication via the access point is performed.08-30-2012
20120215927SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DECODING TRAFFIC OVER PROXY SERVERS - Methods and systems for applying surveillance to client computers that communicate via proxy servers. A decoding system accepts communication packets from a communication network. Based on the received packets, the decoding system identifies that a certain client computer conducts a communication session with a target server via a proxy server. The decoding system processes the packets so as to correlate the identity of the client computer with the identity of the target server. The correlated identities may comprise, for example, Internet Protocol (IP) addresses or Uniform Resource Locators (URLs).08-23-2012
20120215929SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTIONS BETWEEN DEVICES COMMUNICATING OVER A NETWORK - Systems and methods are described for establishing a connection between a client and a server that are each communicating via a network. The methods and techniques may be used, for example, to establish a media streaming connection between a media player and a placeshifting device when a firewall or other impediment to direct network connections exists. A relay server receives connection requests from the client and from the server via the network. In response to receiving the requests, a first connection is established between the relay server and the client and a second connection between the relay server and the server. Data received by the relay server on each of the first and second connections is relayed to the other of the first and second connections to thereby establish the connection between the client and the server via the relay server.08-23-2012
20120131208SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING A PLURALITY OF USER SESSIONS IN A VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - Methods for establishing an SSL/VPN session on behalf of a user of a client where the user has a previously existing session are described. Methods include receiving, by an appliance, a request from a first client operated by a user to establish a virtual private network session; creating, by the appliance, a temporary virtual private network session with the client; identifying, by the appliance, an existing virtual private network session previously established on behalf of the user; terminating the previous session; and creating a new virtual private network session with the client using the temporary session. Other methods may further include transmitting a request to a user corresponding to whether to terminate one or more previous sessions, and transferring session data from a previously existing session to a current session. Corresponding systems are also described.05-24-2012
20120131207METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR RELEASING RESOURCES - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, an apparatus, and a system for releasing resources. The method includes: querying a reservation record according to information about a current session; judging whether a reservation record exists according to a result of the query; judging whether a conflicting session exists according to reservation information in the reservation record if the reservation record exists; obtaining reservation information of the conflicting session if the conflicting session exists, and releasing a corresponding reserved service unit according to the reservation information of the conflicting session; and reserving a service unit for the current session, storing reservation information of the current session, and forming a reservation record for the current session if no reservation record exists or no conflicting session exists or the corresponding reserved service unit is released.05-24-2012
20120131206SYSTEM, METHOD, AND PROGRAM FOR COMMUNICATION CONNECTION BY POLLING - A communication connection system, a communication connection method, and a communication connection program is capable of establishing push-type communication by not connection request from a client side but a server side, in communication between terminals or a terminal and a server. A polling server 05-24-2012
20120131205Predetermined Ports for Multi-Core Architectures - Methods, computing devices, and computer readable storage media to test network connections using a port unit having a plurality of processors. A plurality of transmission control protocol (TCP) connections to be initiated by the port unit during a test session may be defined. For each processor, an associated set of predetermined source port numbers corresponding to the plurality of TCP connections may be determined. A first processor of the plurality of processors may open TCP connections, via the network, from the defined plurality of TCP connections, wherein each TCP connection may be opened using the corresponding source port number from the set of source port numbers associated with the first processor.05-24-2012
20120131204SELECTIVELY GRANTING A FLOOR DURING SET-UP OF A COMMUNICATION SESSION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - An embodiment is directed to an application server configured to set-up a communication session within a wireless communications system. The application server receives, from a session originator, a request to initiate the communication session with a set of session targets, and then transmits one or more call announcement messages for announcing the communication session to the set of session targets. The application server determines information associated with a probability that the set of session targets will fail to accept the announced communication session, and/or delay information associated with when call responses will arrive from the set of session targets in response to the one or more call announcement messages. The application server selectively grants a floor of the communication session to the session originator based on the determined information.05-24-2012
20120131203Processor Allocation for Multi-Core Architectures - Methods, computing devices, and computer readable storage media for testing network connections are disclosed. A first processor of a plurality of processors may define a new TCP connection. The first processor may apply a hash function to determine an appropriate one of the plurality of processors to open the new TCP connection. The first processor may write data defining the new TCP connection to a queue associated with the appropriate processor. The appropriate processor may retrieve the data defining the new TCP connection from the queue and open the new TCP connection.05-24-2012
20120131202COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR CONFIGURING FAILOVER COMMUNICATION SERVICES - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a Home Subscriber Server having a processor adapted to receive from a Serving CSCF (S-CSCF) device a request for a subscription profile of a communication device to register the communication device, to detect from the request that the communication device is registered with a primary communication resource and that the communication device is to be registered with the S-CSCF device as a secondary communication resource, and to provide the S-CSCF device the subscription profile without de-registering the communication device from the primary communication resource and without directing the S-CSCF device to the primary communication resource. Other embodiments are disclosed.05-24-2012
20120166652ADVANCED SIMULTANEOUS AND SEQUENTIAL SIP FORKING - Systems and methods for simultaneous and sequential routing are described. In one aspect, at least one computing device in an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network implements a method for improving simultaneous and sequential Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) forking. More specifically, the message is received from a first device associated with a first user to establish a session with a second device of multiple devices associated with a second user. Responsive to receiving the message, and independent of whether the multiple devices are registered to a same SIP registrar (Serving Call Session Control Function) in the IMS network, a simultaneous or parallel SIP session is established to ring respective ones of the multiple devices.06-28-2012
20120215926Mechanism for Quick Data Path Setup by Cloning Session Content - A custom interface depth may be provided. A content stream, such as a three-dimensional television signal, comprising a plurality of video planes may be displayed. In response to receiving a request to adjust a depth of at least one of the video planes, the display depth of the requested video plane may be adjusted relative to at least one other video plane.08-23-2012
20100205309Method and Arrangement of a Multimedia Gateway and Communication Terminals - A multimedia gateway for enabling a remote device to access a local device located in a private network via a residential gateway of the private network is provided. The multimedia gateway includes: connecting means for connecting to the private network and a multimedia service network, first receiving means for receiving authentication information from the remote device over the private network, storing means for storing the authentication information in a memory, second receiving means for receiving a session invite message from the remote device over the multimedia service network, the session invite message including authentication information, and authenticating means for authenticating the remote device by determining whether or not the authentication information included in the session invite message has been stored in the memory by the storing means.08-12-2010
20100205307COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM - A communication control system includes external equipment for making a request for required data, a plurality of control units each for transmitting the required data according to the request from the external equipment, and communication control equipment disposed between the external equipment and the control units, for establishing a communication path with the control units according to the request from the external equipment, and for instructing a corresponding one of the control units to transmit the required data.08-12-2010
20110179181Identifying User Role in IP Multimedia Subsystem - A Session Initiation Protocol Application Server for use within an IP Multimedia Subsystem. The Application Server comprises a receiving unit for receiving a Session Initiation Protocol message from a Serving Call Session Control Function, the Serving Call Session Control Function serving an IP Multimedia Subsystem user and the message containing within a message header an explicit identification of said user. A processing unit determines an action to be applied to said message and includes within a header of the message a role value defining a role of said user in respect of the action. A transmitter unit returns the message including the role value to said Serving Call Session Control Function.07-21-2011
20120137009APPARATUS, SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING INCOMING AND OUTGOING COMMUNICATION - A system and method for managing incoming and outgoing communications may include a definition of if, when, and who may communicate with a recipient. The identification of the communication may be concealed in that no actual addresses, phone numbers, or other addressing identifications are required to be exchanged by the communication initiator and recipient. In an example, if the database contains call management settings for a call recipient, the application logic may evaluate the rules to determine if a particular caller is authorized to connect with the call recipient at the current time and date. The application logic may connect the call utilizing the public telephone switch. The caller and call recipient phone numbers may be stored in a database.05-31-2012
20120137008APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR INTER-USER EQUIPMENT TRANSFERS - A method for identifying an incoming request for an inter user equipment (UE) transfer. The method may include, but is not limited to, any one or combination of receiving an indicator for an inter-UE transfer (IUT) request from a subscription for which a first media and a second media communication session between a first UE and a second UE has been established, the IUT request associated with a third UE using at least one of XML and a media feature tag within a portion of a message request; and routing the IUT request to a service centralization and continuity application server.05-31-2012
20110185069Method For Establishing A Local Media Connection In A Communication System - The present invention relates to a method for deciding, in an IP-based communication system, whether a local media/media release is allowed between a first and at least a second terminal. The method is characterized in that the decision is based on information established by an application server in an multimedia core network. The present invention further also relates to a session border controller unit, a session border controller, an application server and a computer program product for performing said method.07-28-2011
20110185068MULTI-LINK REMOTE PROTOCOL - In various embodiments, a remote client is allowed to access at least a part of a connection service located on alternate sources other than the primary remote presentation server. In some embodiments, the remote presentation virtual channels may be split into multiple connections with the purpose of allowing better flow control. Some embodiments may be implemented in a virtual machine environment for cases in which the data to be transferred through a data channel is located in the host virtual machine partition but the remote endpoint is located on the guest virtual machine partition.07-28-2011
20110185070 METHOD AND DEVICE OF SESSION CONTROL - A method and device of session control are used to resolve the problem that when there is a failure in the session control function bound with the user, the UE can not re-login in time or the session can not be continued. In the flow of the user initial login, an address information of P-CSCF bound with the user in HSS is saved, so that when the user is called, an available S-CSCF can get the address information of P-CSCF bound with the called user from the HSS, and inform the user to do re-initial login according to the address information of P-CSCF or complete the session continuation; further, the address information of the user in D-HSS is saved, so that when the user is called, an available A-CSCF can get the address information of the called user from the D-HSS, and inform the user to do re-initial login according to the address information of the called user or complete the session continuation.07-28-2011
20100174819METHOD FOR PROCESSING REGISTER REQUEST, NETWORK ELEMENT, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention provides a method for processing register request, network element, and a communication system. The method for processing a register request of a terminal in a communication system that comprises a first network element (GSN) for providing IP networking service to said terminal, a second network element (P-CSCF) for providing SIP proxy service to said terminal, a third network element (S-CSCF) for providing SIP subscriber service to said terminal, and a fourth network element (HSS) for storing information about said terminal including said terminal's address; wherein the communication system further comprises a fifth network element (NAPT) for translating said terminal's address in between said first network element and said second network element; said method comprise: determining whether a message issued by said terminal for said register request has undergone Network Address Port Translation; indicating an address for address verification in said message based on the determination whether said message has undergone Network Address Port Translation; and verifying the address for address verification in said message against the information stored in said fourth network element.07-08-2010
20100174818Input Service for Client Devices - An input service for client devices is described. In embodiment(s), a session request can be received at a network service from a client device to establish an input service session. An applicable character input service can be determined which is then utilized by the client device where the character input service generates a character input interface for display at the client device. The character input interface of the character input service is communicated to the client device from which characters can be selected for input, and character inputs are received from the client device when initiated via the character input interface. The character inputs can be resolved at the network service for display updates that are then communicated to the client device for display in the character input interface.07-08-2010
20100174817SPLICING PROXIED WEB REQUESTS WITH CALLBACK FOR SUBSEQUENT REQUESTS - The present invention provides a method, system, and computer program product for splicing proxied web requests with callback for subsequent requests. The method comprises: initiating by a proxy a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) splice between first and second socket connections in order to service a request; and returning control of the first and second socket connections to the proxy in response to a completion event associated with the TCP splice.07-08-2010
20100174816On-Demand Network Connection - An on-demand network connection for a remote user is provided. Responsive to a failure to receive an electronic communication via an established network connection, a remote user device receives a connection request that indicates that the on-demand network connection is to be established. Responsive to receiving the connection request, the on-demand network connection is established from the remote user device to a network. Then, the electronic communication is received on the remote user device via the on-demand network connection.07-08-2010
20120173737METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DATA PROCESSING - A computer-implemented method for protecting data being transferred during a session with an application is presented. In response to receiving a session request that includes an application identifier for an application, a data processing node establishes a session with the application and assigns a session identifier for that session. A session response, which includes the session identifier, to the session request is sent. In response to receiving a first request that includes the session identifier, a first pipe in the session is established. This first pipe enables data related to the first request to be isolated according to an assigned first pipe identifier for the first pipe. A first response to the first request is sent, wherein the first response comprises the session identifier and the first pipe identifier.07-05-2012
20120173735Radio Tool and Method for the Operation Thereof - A method for wireless communication between at least two portable tools is disclosed. The tools each comprise a mechanism for wireless communication and also a data memory and a tool controller. The first tool is configured as a server and the second tool is configured as a client, wherein the second tool sets up a communication link to the first tool.07-05-2012
20120173736METHOD FOR SUPPORTING A USER EQUIPMENT LACKING GLOBALLY ROUTABLE USER AGENT URI - GRUU SUPPORT IN AN INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - IMS - A Core Network is provided for supporting an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) enabled User Equipment (UE), the UE lacking Globally Routable User Agent URI (GRUU) support in an IMS of a communication network. The Core Network includes: an interworking entity, configured to receive a first Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message from the UE, wherein the first message lacks GRUU-related data, to modify the first SIP message by adding GRUU-related data, to receive a second SIP message to be sent to the UE, wherein the second message includes GRUU-related data, and to modify the second message by removing GRUU-related data. The interworking entity is one of: a Proxy-Call State Control Function (P-CSCF) entity; a Serving-Call State Control Function (S-CSCF) entity; and a Session Border Controller (SBC).07-05-2012
20120173738System And Method For Communicating With An Electronic Exchange In An Electronic Trading Environment - System and methods for a connection proxy server are described. According to an example method described herein, a connection proxy server stores subscription, product tables as well as other downloads that are provided to a client terminal during initialization stage as well as later during a trading session. Upon detecting that a connection between the client terminal and a gateway is lost, the connection proxy maintains a communication session created for the client terminal at the gateway and receives data intended for the client terminal. If the connection is re-established between the client terminal and the gateway during a predetermined period of time, the connection proxy provides the stored data to the client terminal thus avoiding a surge in processing resources at the gateway due to the necessary downloads.07-05-2012
20120215928Methods and Systems for Presence Publication Using SIP Register Feature Tags - Systems and methods for publishing presence information can be performed to reduce the amount of signaling associated with presence publication. A method for publishing presence service information to a presence server includes: receiving, at a registrar node, a session initiation protocol (SIP) message originated by a user equipment (UE) over the air interface; and transmitting a third party register message based upon the received SIP message, from the registrar node, toward a presence server using network signaling, wherein the third party register message includes at least one of information associated with the user of the UE, capabilities of the UE and presence related services offered by the UE.08-23-2012
20110208866ADVANCED NETWORK CHARACTERIZATION - Some embodiments include a method for determining whether to establish a connection between a computer and a network. In some embodiments, the method includes: receiving first network information from a network; determining a first trust level for the network by matching the network information to provisioning information, wherein the provisioning information indicates the first trust level and an authentication method of the network; verifying that network supports the authentication method, wherein the verifying includes exchanging information with the network; after verifying that the network supports the authentication method, establishing a connection to the network, wherein the connection provides access to an Internet.08-25-2011
20100049856SIP-Based Session Control Among A Plurality OF Multimedia Devices - These exemplary embodiments utilize Sessions Initiation Protocol (SIP) for admission control among a plurality of multimedia devices. The use of the SIP allows a SIP server to perform admission control functions. The use of RSVP linkages is reduced. The use of SIP for admission control allows an application to communicate, or “talk,” to a network and other multimedia devices and to request that resources within the network be reserved. Any communications device that uses sessions may utilize the SIP protocol for admission control. The SIP protocol may be used for unicast and multicast media sessions including video-on-demand and/or multicast video access control.02-25-2010
20100049855Distributed Network Communication System Which Selectively Provides Data to Different Network Destinations - A system and method for providing access and/or roaming features on a network system. The network system includes a plurality of wireless and/or wired access points coupled to a network. Access points (APs) for the network may be widely distributed in various facilities, such as airports, mass-transit stations, and various businesses. The network may couple to a wide area network, such as the Internet. In one embodiment, a portable computing device (PCD) of a user may store identification information which uniquely indicates a network provider of a plurality of possible network providers. The identification information may also or instead indicate an access or privilege level of the user. Each of the access points are operable to “listen for” or detect identification information associated with numerous different providers. When the access point receives the identification information from a PCD of a user, the access point may determine the appropriate network provider for the portable computing device using the identification information. Network access may then be provided to the portable computing device through the determined network provider. Thus the network system is useable by subscribers of each of the plurality of possible network providers, thereby enabling subscribers to “roam” on various wireless networks, including networks maintained by other providers. The access information may also include an access level which indicates the user's access or privilege level. Thus, the local network may provide various local resources which are available to users having a first access level, and users with a second access level may not be entitled to view or utilize these network resources on the network, but may be simply provided external Internet access.02-25-2010
20100049854Network device and interceptor module system and method for controlling remote communications - A remote communication system and method are disclosed. An environment in an electronic device, such as a computer based device, is identified defining a plurality of parameters communicated between the electronic device and a remote computer as part of a remote session (i.e., the electronic device remotely controlling the remote computer via the remote session), with each parameter defining an action associated with the remote session. A first application, via a unidirectional communication with the environment, modifies at least one parameter associated with the environment (e.g., modifying keyboard scan codes, cursor position, mouse position, clipboard data, screen resolution, or channel administration). A network device (e.g., a router, a switch, a hub, a repeater, a multilayer switch, etc.) monitors communication between the electronic device and the remote computer and extracts the modified parameter and, based on a look-up, executes a pre-defined action affecting the remote session, wherein the pre-defined action is different than the modified parameter's associated action.02-25-2010
20100049853Electronic device and remote computer system and method for controlling remote communications - A remote communication system and method are disclosed. An environment is identified defining a plurality of parameters communicated between an electronic device (or a computer-based device) and a remote computer as part of a remote session (i.e., the electronic device remotely controlling the remote computer via the remote session), with each parameter defining an action associated with the remote session. A first application (associated with the electronic device), via a unidirectional communication with the environment, modifies at least one parameter associated with the environment (e.g., modifying keyboard scan codes, cursor position, mouse position, clipboard data, screen resolution, or channel administration), wherein the modified parameter is extracted by an interceptor associated with the remote computer and, the interceptor, based on a look-up, executes a pre-defined action affecting the remote session, wherein the pre-defined action being different than the modified parameter's associated action.02-25-2010
20120179829System and Method for Enabling a Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection - A system and method are provided that enable a registrar or other server or proxy device to be used to provide a path between a pair of endpoint devices for exchanging addressing information, in order to establish a direct P2P connection. Once that connection is established, the connection may be used for any P2P data communications, e.g. SIP establishment of a VoIP call, instant messaging, online gaming, file transfer, multimedia streaming, etc. In this way, each endpoint device possesses a list of candidate addresses to establish a direct P2P connection, which may then be used for any type of communication. By relying on a registrar or other server to enable the candidate lists to be exchanged, control can still be maintained if necessary, since the candidate lists can be modified, e.g. to enable a transparent interception, to impose or remove security restrictions, etc.07-12-2012
20120179828SERVER APPARATUS, SESSION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, METHOD, SYSTEM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM OF PROGRAM - An apparatus includes a memory and a processor to executes a procedure, the procedure including storing, in the memory of the apparatus, identification information for identifying a session used for first access made to the server apparatus, until a certain length of time elapses from access time of the first access, obtaining the time information which indicates access time of an access made to another server apparatus, and when time information, which indicates access time of second access made to the another server apparatus after the first access by using the same session as the session used for the first access, is obtained by the obtaining until the certain length of time elapses from access time of the first access, controlling the memory to store the identification information until the certain length of time further elapses from the access time indicated by the obtained time information.07-12-2012
20120179827ACCESS SESSION CONTROLLER, IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM AND REGISTRATION AND SESSION METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed are an access session controller, an IP multimedia subsystem and registration and session establishment methods thereof, where the access session controller includes a message reception module, a service trigger configuration module, a session control module and a message transmission module. The IP multimedia subsystem includes the access session controller and a network-wide home subscriber server system. The registration method includes: initiating, by the access session controller, an authentication information request to the network-wide home subscriber server system. The session establishment method includes: directly process, by the access session controller, the request message initiated from a user to establish a session. The foregoing solutions can simplify the signaling processing flow and reduce the network complexity.07-12-2012
20100274909CONNECTION DEVICE AND CONNECTION METHOD - A connection device that does not require complicated operation by a user an interconnects a single-display conference terminal and the multi-display conference terminal includes an address holding unit (10-28-2010
20100274908LOCATION TAGGING METHOD FOR PACKET BASED SIGNALLING - Location information is tagged in a packet based network. SIP signaling messages are used to initiate a communication session between at least two end user devices in a packet based telecommunications network. The communication session is routed through various intermediate network elements of the packet based network. The intermediate network elements tag the signaling messages with information indicating their geographic location or otherwise provide such location information. In response to the signaling messages and preferably before the communication session is established, the location information indicating the location of the intermediate network elements in the routing of the communication session between the end user devices is made available. An end user device or apparatus may receive the location information and provide a user display indicating the routing and status of the communication session being initiated.10-28-2010
20100274907COMMUNICATION APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA THROUGH A PLURALITY OF DATA-PATHS - A communication apparatus is configured to include first and second cards, and a card-to-card link connecting the cards. Each card is communicably connected to another communication apparatus through a route connected to the card. One of the cards is determined to be a primary card that controls data transmission between the communication apparatus and another communication apparatus, and the other card is determined to be a secondary card controlled by the primary card. The primary card establishes a primary data-path for transmitting primary data, using one of the first and second routes connected to the primary card. The primary card further establishes a secondary data-path for transmitting secondary data, using the card-to-card link, the secondary card, and the other one of the first and second routes connected to the secondary card.10-28-2010
20100274906System for Activating and Deactivating a Function - The present invention relates to a system being adapted to be connected to at least one computer. The system comprises: at least one tracking surface, and a pointing device adapted to navigate on the at least one computer when the pointing device is moved across the at least one tracking surface, which defines a first zone and a second zone. The system further comprises a detection unit which detects the zone the pointing device is present in, and a control unit adapted to activate a function when present in the first zone.10-28-2010
20100274905SIGNALING OF MGW IDENTITY IN SIP-I - The invention relates to signaling of MGW identity in SIP-I. A Call Control Unit of a network includes an Input/Output unit. The Call Control Unit includes a processing unit in communication with the input/output unit. The Call Control Unit includes a memory unit in communication with the processing unit, the processing unit producing a signal having information which identifies a seized Media Gateway (MGW) related to a call establishment or one or more offered Media Gateways, which is sent via Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) to a Mobile Switching Centre (MSC)-Server in the network which is in charge to seize a MGW. A computer readable medium storing a computer program, which, when executed by at least one processing unit, signals a media gateway (MGW) identity. A method in a telecommunications node for signaling a Media Gateway (MGW) Identity.10-28-2010
20100274904METHOD OF INTERACTION WITH PHYSICAL ELEMENTS FORMING THE CONTENT OF A MACHINE - The invention concerns a method for interacting between a handheld device and a machine. The handheld device has an Internet browser for interacting with a physical element that is part of the machine. The physical element is a smart card web server for establishing a near-field wireless connection with the handheld device when the handheld device is in proximity of the machine. The physical element communicates over the air with at least a distant server, the server being able to update the content of the physical element.10-28-2010
20100274903METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PREVENTING A LOCAL DISPLAY DEVICE FROM DISPLAYING DATA GENERATED BY A REMOTE COMPUTING DEVICE - A method and system for preventing a local display device from displaying data generated by a remote computing device is described. The system includes a local agent for facilitating a remote session; an operating system generating a request to enable a display device controlled by a display adapter; and a filter executing in a driver and in communication with the local agent, the filter intercepting the request generated by the operating system. The filter transmits the request to the local agent when a remote user is active or to the display adapter when the remote user is inactive. The filter will transmits a signal to the operating system that the display adapter has enabled the display device when the filter transmits the request to at least one of the local agent and the display adapter.10-28-2010
20120233337Method and system for policy and charging control based on time period - The disclosure discloses a method for Policy and Charging Control (PCC) based on a time period, which comprises: when a Policy and Charging Rule Function (PCRF) entity provides Quality of Service (QoS) rules to a Bearer Binding and Event Reporting Function (BBERF) entity, a time indication of activation and/or deactivation of the QoS rules is provided at the same time. The disclosure also discloses a system for PCC based on a time period, which comprises: a providing unit located in the PCRF entity and configured to provide QoS rules and a time indication of activation and/or deactivation of the QoS rules to the BBERF entity at the same time. The disclosure ensures the consistency between the time of activating the QoS rules by the BBERF entity and the time of activating the PCC rules by the Policy and Control Enforcement Function (PCEF) entity, and the technical scheme is simple and practical.09-13-2012
20120233340HANDHELD COMPUTER SYSTEM THAT ATTEMPTS TO ESTABLISH AN ALTERNATIVE NETWORK LINK UPON FAILING TO ESTABLISH A REQUESTED NETWORK LINK - A computer system that attempts to establish an alternative network link upon failing to establish a requested network link is described. The computer system may encounter conditions where access to numerous networks, in particular wireless networks, is not available. Rather than only providing an error message to the user upon a failed attempt to establish the requested network link, the computer system determines whether the user has designated an alternative network link in case the requested network link cannot be established, whereas the alternative network link is selected from the plurality of network links that the computer system is configured to support. If an alternative network link has been designated, the computer system attempts to establish the alternative network link. Hence, the user experience is made smooth and uneventful when the requested network link cannot be established.09-13-2012
20120233338COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus comprises: a detection unit configured to detect a communicable network; a determination unit configured, if a plurality of networks are detected by the detection unit, to determine a base station constructing the detected networks; and a connection unit configured to perform connection processing in accordance with the result of determination by the determination unit.09-13-2012
20120233334SHARED MEDIA ACCESS FOR REAL TIME FIRST AND THIRD PARTY CONTROL - A communication system provides for establishing a communication environment where multiple media applications can share the same communication channel in a communication session. When establishing a communication session, an application or media application can create a token that can include information regarding resources assigned to or to be used with the communication session. The token may then be used and interpreted by other applications. When communicating during a communication session, the applications and/or components negotiate for access to ports or communication channels assigned to the communication session. Thus, two or more applications may use the same port(s) during the session by obtaining the token and accessing the resources assigned to the token. In this way, fewer ports or channels are used by the multiple applications by sharing resources.09-13-2012
20120233333Resource Negotiation for Cloud Services Using a Messaging and Presence Protocol - Techniques are provided for sending from a client in a first network device a first session-initiate message to a second network device that is configured to provide network layer, data link layer, or associated convergence layer based service connection information in order for the second network device to accept or reject a network layer, data link layer, or associated convergence layer based service connection with the first network device. The first session-initiate message is based on a messaging and presence protocol. A session-accept message is received at the client in the first network device that is configured to accept the service connection and provide a network layer, data link layer, or associated convergence layer based service connection information in order for the first network device to establish the service connection with the second network device. The session-accept message is based on the messaging and presence protocol. In response to receiving the session-accept message, the service connection is established.09-13-2012
20100011108METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR CAUSING A COMMUNICATION DEVICE TO JOIN A COMMUNICATION SESSION - According to embodiments of the present invention, there are provided a method, system and apparatus for joining a communication session. A method comprises receiving from a first communication device an indication of a desire of the first communication device to establish a communication session; the first communication device having been associated with a device group comprising the first communication device and at least one second communication device. The method further comprises determining if there exists an active communication session with the at least one second communication device. The method further comprises, responsive to existence of the active communication session, causing the first communication device to join the active communication session.01-14-2010
20120254448SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTION OF NETWORK TRANSPORT WITHIN A MOBILE DEVICE - In a mobile device, one of a plurality of network transports may be used for a connection request. The ideal network transport may be selected by executing a connection selection policy that is stored within the device. The connection selection policy may include one or more network transport evaluators that are each configured to weight the available network transports according to various criteria. Examples of network transport evaluators include evaluators that are dependent on geolocation, security levels, or battery status.10-04-2012
20120254447METHODS, SYSTEMS AND ARTICLES OF MANUFACTURE TO RESUME A REMOTE DESKTOP SESSION - Example methods, systems and articles of manufacture to resume remote desktop sessions are disclosed. A disclosed example method to resume a remote desktop session with a first computing device includes sending a query packet containing a first value representing a user identifier from a second computer device to a third computing device, receiving a response packet containing a second value representing the first computing device from the third computing device, and resuming at the second computing device the remote desktop session with the first computing device using the value.10-04-2012
20120254446METHOD TO CREATE A COMPOSITE RUI FROM MULTIPLE RUIs - A compositing device lessens a rendering/processing load for rendering devices by processing one or more sessions instead of requiring the rendering devices to do so. The compositing device is able to receive one or more sessions from one or more source devices and process the sessions either together or separately. Then, either a composited session or a selected session is sent to be displayed by a rendering device.10-04-2012
20120185603RELAY SERVER AND RELAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a relay server, a routing group information sharing unit shares routing group information, which is prepared by grouping routing control points including at least two of a first relay server in a relay group, a second relay server in the relay group, a client terminal connected to the first relay server, and a client terminal connected to the second relay server. A routing session establishment unit establishes a routing session, which enables a communication packet to be routed via the routing control points, for each group indicated in the routing group information while referring to relay server information.07-19-2012
20120185600Control of Codec Negotiation for Communication Connection - The invention relates to a session control entity, method and a computer program product for receiving a request for a session, deciding on removal of a user plane gateway from a user plane of the session, extracting, when the user plane gateway is to be removed, a first codec list in the second encoding and removing the first codec list from the request for the session. Further, removing a second codec list in the first encoding from the request for the session, deriving a third codec list, when the user plane gateway is to be removed, from the first codec list, or, when the user plane gateway is not to be removed, from the second codec list, including in the request for the session, a third codec list in the first encoding, and transmitting the request for the session.07-19-2012
20120185602METHOD FOR SECURE USER PLANE (SUPL) VERSION NEGOTIATION - The subject matter disclosed herein relates to a system and method for negotiating a version of Secure User Plane Location (SUPL) between a network entity and a SUPL enabled terminal. In a particular implementation, a SUPL initiation message is transmitted from a network entity to a SUPL entity, where the SUPL initiation message identifies a plurality of SUPL versions capable of supporting a desired service. A response is received from the SUPL entity that is based, at least in part, on an ability of the SUPL entity to support at least one of the plurality of versions.07-19-2012
20120185599METHODS FOR CONTROLLING ONGOING TRIGGERED SUPL SESSION BY SLP AND NETWORK-SIDE SUPL AGENT - A method for controlling an ongoing network-initiated triggered session in compliance with a Secure User Plane Location (SUPL) standard is provided, and the method proposes that the SUPL Agent sends a request to the SUPL Location Platform (SLP), so that the SLP further indicates the target SUPL Enabled Terminal (SET) to pause the ongoing network-initiated triggered session via a SUPL TRIGGERED STOP message. Also, a method for controlling an ongoing SET-initiated triggered session is provided, and the method proposes that the SLP indicates the target SET to pause the ongoing SET-initiated triggered session via a SUPL TRIGGERED STOP message.07-19-2012
20090319667Optimal Source Interface Selection - Aspects of the subject matter described herein relate to selecting a source interface with which to establish a connection. In aspects, a profile for each network location a host has seen is maintained in a data store. The profile includes information about the network interfaces available to a source host at the network location. This information indicates, among other things, the reliability of each interface of the source host. Based on the profile, an interface is selected with which to establish a connection. If the interface is unsuccessful in establishing the connection, the interface is de-prioritized and another interface may be selected.12-24-2009
20120084448Communication Control Device, Communication System and Communication Method - A communication control device includes: a device connection unit that is configured to establish connection to a plurality of communication devices; a controller that is configured to control communication between the plurality of communication devices, which is connected to the communication control device by the device connection unit, and a counterpart device via a line; and a memory that is configured to store protection-target information including at least information for communication with the plurality of communication devices connected by the device connection unit. The controller is configured to: register at least one communication device from among communication devices connectable by the device connection unit; determine whether or not the at least one registered communication device is connected by the device connection unit; and when the at least one registered communication device is determined to be connected, permit an output of predefined protection-target information for the connected communication device.04-05-2012
20120084447End-Point Identifiers in SIP - A system and method for uniquely identifying an SIP device extends the SIP communications protocol with an end point identifier, carried for example in the header of an SIP transmission. The end point identifier is useful for routing, registration, subscription, and authentication. The end point (device) of a given user epid can be uniquely identified by creating a key from an epid and a user's address-of-record (URI). This in turn enables improved connection management and security association management when the connections/IP addresses are transient, such as when HTTPS tunneling is used.04-05-2012
20120084446ELECTRONIC DEVICE - An electronic device includes a storage, a communication device and a controller. The storage stores information identifying the electronic device. The controller, when starting connection of the electronic device with a first other electronic device, sends the information identifying the electronic device to a second other electronic device when the first other electronic device is connected to the second other electronic device, and connects the electronic device to the first other electronic device when a request for connection with the first other electronic device is received, the first other electronic device receiving the information identifying the electronic device from the other second electronic device.04-05-2012
20120226814TOPOLOGY HIDING OF A NETWORK FOR AN ADMINISTRATIVE INTERFACE BETWEEN NETWORKS - An administrative interface is provided between a first network and a second network, where the administrative interface is separate from one or more communications session signaling interfaces between the first network and second network. At least one of authorization, authentication, and accounting messages is communicated over the administrative interface. A module associated with the administrative interface is provided to perform topology hiding of the first network such that topology information of the first network is hidden from the second network.09-06-2012
20120226813COMPUTER NETWORK, COMPUTER SYSTEM, COMPUTER-IMPLEMENTED METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR MANAGING SESSION TOKENS - A computer network for managing session tokens may include a client operable to run a client application; a web server hosting at least one web service; and a session token manager. The session token manager may be operable to receive a check out message along with user credentials from the client application, wherein the user credentials identify a user operating the client application; process the check out message to determine a session token from a pool of session tokens managed for the user; and send a token identifier (token ID) to the client application pointing to the determined session token, wherein the session token can be used by the client application to point to and/or to re-use a previously established session with the web service without re-establishing a new session.09-06-2012
20120226812Method and system for subscription service in IP multimedia subsystem network - A method for subscription service in an IP multimedia subsystem is disclosed. A Session Border Controller (SBC) establishes IP channels between the SBC and an IMS terminal as well as between the SBC and a Resource List Server (RLS) after receiving a status subscribe request message from the IMS terminal; and the RLS sends the status information and an acknowledgment message to the IMS terminal through the IP channels after finding subscribed status information for the IMS terminal. A system for a subscription service in an IP multimedia subsystem network is further disclosed. The IP channels established in the present disclosure to transmit the subscription information on the RLS not only can transmit a great amount of information, but also has higher efficiency of information transmission, as long as the IMS terminal has a capability of processing IP data packets.09-06-2012
20120259987DETECTING AN INACTIVE CLIENT DURING A COMMUNICATION SESSION - A communication session is established between a first device and a browser on a second device. The communication session is a persistent hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP) session in which a transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) connection persists throughout the persistent HTTP session. A question is transmitted from the first device to the browser on the second device. In response to the first device receiving an illogical response to the question from the second device, the communication session between the first device and the second device is terminated.10-11-2012
20120259985METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY - A method for providing improved wireless connectivity for wireless devices operating in a heterogeneous multi-RAT environment may include receiving, at a network device, information indicative of one or more radio access technologies detected by a user equipment (UE) in corresponding locations where the received information is received in connection with a session initiation protocol (SIP) procedure, and causing provision of the received information to an access network discovery and selection function (ANDSF). A corresponding apparatus and computer program product are also provided.10-11-2012
20120233336Situation-Driven Spontaneous Networking - In an exemplary embodiment, a method is disclosed that includes, in an electronic device, forming a hypothesis that a situation exists based on one or more situation definitions and data from one or more sensors accessible by the electronic device. The method includes searching for other electronic devices via one or more network interfaces in the electronic device and establishing a network with one or more other electronic devices found during the searching. The method also includes receiving information from the one or more other electronic devices, the information corresponding to the situation. The method further includes, based at least on the information, modifying the hypothesis that the situation exists. Apparatus and computer readable memory media are also disclosed.09-13-2012
20120233335AUXILIARY HOST AND SESSIONS - A method for establishing a session between a policy and charging rules node (PCRN) and an auxiliary host, includes: receiving, at the PCRN, an application session request message from a packet data network gateway (PGW); establishing an access session with the packet data network gateway; receiving, at the PCRN, an auxiliary session request message from the auxiliary host; and establishing an auxiliary access session with the auxiliary host corresponding to the access session with the packet data network gateway.09-13-2012
20120233339Transport System for Instant Messaging - An exemplary method involves creating a master session over a first connection through a server; and creating a virtual channel over the connection, the virtual channel operable to communicate a feature session. The method may involve establishing a direct connection that bypasses the server, and switching communication of the feature session to the direct connection. A system for network communication includes a plurality of transport bridges, each transport bridge corresponding to an active network device configuration, and a switching module operable to choose one of the transport bridges to form a connection between two computing devices based on the active network device configuration.09-13-2012
20080301303VIRTUAL NETWORK CONNECTION APPARATUS, SYSTEM, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CONNECTION OF A VIRTUAL NETWORK AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - There is provided a virtual network connection apparatus having a unit that receives an instruction for forming a virtual network; an unit that assigns a unique virtual network identifier in response to the instruction; a unit that receives designation of an information processor; a unit that issues permission information for a designated information processor and registers the issued permission information in correlation to the assigned identifier; a processor that determines, upon receipt of the permission information from an information processor, a virtual network identifier correlated to the permission information and executes a process to correlate an address of the information processor to the determined identifier; and a transmission controller that determines a virtual network identifiers correlated to a source and a destination addresses of a transmitted information, and executes a control to transmit the transmitted information to the destination address by reference to the determined identifiers.12-04-2008
20080301302COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, RELAYING METHOD AND RELAYING DEVICE - Method and device for heightening communications security. Gateway 12-04-2008
20080301300Predictive asynchronous web pre-fetch - A web server receives an asynchronous pre-request of data from a web browser resulting from the web browser predicting a user action based on the user's interaction with the web browser. The web server pre-fetches the pre-requested data based on the asynchronous pre-request of data.12-04-2008
20080301301Information sharing in a smart space - An apparatus and method for storing and maintaining in a smart space device connectivity information of devices of the smart space including a plurality of disparate radio access technologies. The connectivity information is propagated to at least one other device of the smart space and is used for selecting an optimal distribution route for information to be shared in the smart space. Technologies such as NoTA, BillBoard and Whiteboard can be used.12-04-2008
20110004691Distribution of Streaming Content Between Media Players Configured to Locate Each Other - The invention relates to a device for either generating or maintaining an organic data network having an dynamic topology, comprising 01-06-2011
20110004689ACCESS OF ELEMENTS FOR A SECURE WEB PAGE THROUGH A NON-SECURE CHANNEL - Particular embodiments generally relate to allowing access of non-secure elements through a non-secure channel when a top-level page was accessed through a secure connection. In one embodiment, a webpage is accessed over a secure channel. The webpage includes secure and non-secure elements. When a non-secure element for the webpage is determined, a client may message with the server to open a non-secure channel for accessing the non-secure element. For example, the client may request port information in the request. The server then can respond with port information for a non-secure channel. The client then accesses data for the non-secure element through the non-secure channel using the port information.01-06-2011
20110131334ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, an electronic apparatus includes a communication module, a connection request transmitter, a connection response receiver, a response time measuring module, a stability determination module, and a connection controller. The communication module executes close proximity wireless communication. The connection request transmitter transmits a connection request signal to an external device. The connection response receiver receives from the external device a connection response signal responding to the connection request signal. The response time measuring module measures a response time indicative of an elapsed time from the transmission of the connection request signal to the reception of the connection response signal. The stability determination module determines whether communication between the communication module and the external device is in a stable state based on the response time. The connection controller establishes connection between the communication module and the external device when the communication is in the stable state.06-02-2011
20110131333DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REMOTE IDENTIFICATION, MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL OF SEPARATE WIRELESS DEVICES BY LINKED COMMUNICATION AWARENESS AND SERVICE LOCATION - Systems and methods are operable to limit use of a Controlled Wireless Device within a controlled environment. An exemplary embodiment establishes a first wireless communication link between a Controlled Wireless Device and a Linked Context Aware Communication and Control Device (LCACCD) Platform, detects proximity of the Controlled Wireless Device to the controlled environment, communicates a control signal from the LCACCD Platform to the Controlled Wireless Device when the Controlled Wireless Device is within the controlled environment, and controls communications of the Controlled Wireless Device based upon the communicated control signal, wherein the Controlled Wireless Device is communicating over a second wireless link established with a wireless carrier network.06-02-2011
20110131332METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERRING A MEDIA SESSION - Various methods for transferring a media session are provided. One example method includes triggering a media session transfer from a media receiver device, and providing a session transfer message to a network device. In this regard, the media receiver device and network device have communications connections to a network. Similar and related example methods and example apparatuses are also provided.06-02-2011
20110131331ALTERNATIVE BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT ALGORITHM - Methods, systems, and devices are provided that propose allocating bandwidth in a distributed network. According to a decentralized mode of operation, bandwidth between network devices is cooperatively shared and managed, allowing one or more call processing modules to selectively and intelligently place calls or perform activities. A single authoritative mode of operation for a given communication link is also provided, wherein one or more network devices may consult an authoritative member to determine if sufficient bandwidth is available to support an activity. Various triggering events or conditions may facilitate the transition from one mode to another. Audits or accountings are conducted, wherein devices may update or synchronize information stored in a control table related to system bandwidth.06-02-2011
20120265886SERVICE TEMPLATES FOR AN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - The present invention provides a call/session control function for an Internet Protocol multimedia subsystem where a service template may be invoked in lieu of a single multimedia service. The service template identifies a number of multimedia services and associated logic for invoking the multimedia services, once the service template is invoked. In operation, a signaling message is received and appropriate filtering criteria are retrieved for the signaling message. Filtering criteria define a set of rules identifying any multimedia services that need to be invoked in light of receiving the signaling message. The filtering criteria will identify a service template, and perhaps other multimedia services to invoke directly. If a service template is invoked, the service template is obtained and the logic controlling invocation of the associated multimedia services is applied to effect invocation of the multimedia services.10-18-2012
20120239816METHOD AND APPARATUSES FOR TDF SESSION ESTABLISHMENT - The present invention faces the issue of racing conditions occurring during the establishment of an IP-CAN session in PCC architecture and a TDF session between a PCRF and a TDF of the PCC architecture. To overcome this issue, the present invention provides for cooperating apparatuses carrying out a method of establishing a Traffic Detection Function “TDF” session in a Policy and Charging Control “PCC” architecture with a Policy and Charging control Rules Function “PCRF”, a Policy and Charging Enforcement Function “PCEF” and a TDF, the method comprising the steps of: signalling an IP-CAN session establishment from a PCEF towards a PCRF; selecting at the PCRF a TDF for detecting and reporting traffic through the IP-CAN session; initiating from the PCRF establishment of a TDF session with the TDF; submitting from the PCRF towards the TDF the ADC rules to be installed for the IP-CAN session; and submitting from the PCRF towards the PCEF the PCC rules to be installed for the IP-CAN session. This method thus ensures that the TDF session has been established before having completed the establishment of the IP-CAN session.09-20-2012
20120331159Method and Apparatus for Identifying an IMS Service - A User Equipment (UE) and IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network node for indicating the IMS services and IMS applications to which a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message relates. An IMS communication service identifier and an IMS application reference are added to the SIP message. The identifier and the reference may be added as Feature Tags. The reference may also be added as an a-line augmenting an m-line in a Session Description Protocol (SDP) part of the SIP message.12-27-2012
20120271956TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD, AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROGRAM - A transmission apparatus holds user information of an external device for a predetermined period of time and maintains a second protocol session between the own apparatus and another transmission apparatus for the predetermined period of time when a first protocol session between the external device and the own apparatus is disconnected. After the first protocol session is newly established, when a log-in is requested from an external device within the predetermined period of time, the transmission apparatus determines whether the user information of the external device that requested the log-in matches the user information it holds. When these pieces of user information match, the transmission apparatus connects the first protocol session newly established with the second protocol session maintained.10-25-2012
20120324118SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING TECHNICAL SUPPORT - A system and method are disclosed for facilitating technical support of equipment at multiple different geographic equipment locations such as hospitals and others, by a number of different vendors or manufacturers at still different geographic locations. Service calls are completed by means of a central portal which establishes an electronic communication path between portable computer customer support devices and manufacturer support devices. Soft buttons on the customer support devices may be selectively activated individually to call the central portal which then completes the establishment of communication between portable computer customer support devices and selected manufacturer support devices.12-20-2012
20120324117ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING NETWORK CONNECTIONS USING THE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method for providing a plurality of network connections using an electronic device presets a first Access Point Name (APN) to connect the electronic device to a wireless network. A first transmission channel is established and activated to transmit data between a first application and the wireless network according to the first APN, in response to determining that the first application has a need to access the wireless network. The method further creates a second APN if a second application in the electronic device needs to access the wireless network while the first transmission channel is activated. A second transmission channel is established and activated to transmit data between the second application and the wireless network according to the second APN.12-20-2012
20120324119Energy Management System And Method, Including Auto-Provisioning Capability Using Near Field Communication - According to an aspect of the disclosure, a provisioning system for a network includes a first device associated with a site. The first device includes an RFID reader associated therewith. The system also includes a second device including a device identifier associated therewith. The device identifier includes information about the second device to assist in joining it to the network. The RFID reader is configured to read the device identifier on the second device to obtain information about the second device. Based on the information about the second device it can then be joined to the network by the first device.12-20-2012
20110219123NETWORK FIREWALL AND NAT TRAVERSAL FOR TCP AND RELATED PROTOCOLS - A message passing protocol allows two clients to establish a connection even when the clients are behind different NAT devices such as NAT firewalls. Beneficially, the protocol does not require that either client has knowledge of where the other client is located (e.g., behind the same NAT device or behind a different NAT device). When two clients want to establish a connection, the clients exchange identifying information with each other by passing the information through a rendezvous server. Based on the identifying information, each client determines and sends a plurality of synchronization packets to a number of different predicted addresses. When synchronization packets reach the actual addresses of both devices, a connection can be established between the clients.09-08-2011
20120278490DISTRIBUTED MACHINE-TO-MACHINE CONNECTIVITY - Connections and/or transmission times to or from machine-to-machine (M2M) type devices are staggered and/or randomized. M2M data/call sessions are distributed during a time interval. The distributed connections during a time frame can be random, pseudorandom, and/or distributed in accordance with a scheme to mitigate network congestion.11-01-2012
20110225305SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING GROUP OWNER INTENT - A system comprising a first wireless device which comprises a first group owner intent determination unit. The first group owner intent determination unit is configured to determine a group owner intent value of the first wireless device based on: whether the first wireless device is configured to access a coexisting wireless network, the power remaining in the first wireless device at the time the group owner intent value determination is made, whether the first wireless device is a group owner in another peer to peer group, a received signal strength indication of the first wireless device, and/or whether the first wireless device is required to perform a cross-connection between an infrastructure basic service set and a peer to peer group.09-15-2011
20110238845Correlation of Sessions in Case of Session Transfer in IMS Domain - The invention relates to session control in an IMS domain of a communications network and more particularly to techniques for performing session transfer in an IMS control node (SCC AS) for controlling centralized services in an IMS domain. One embodiment of an SCC AS (09-29-2011
20110238843DAMPENING INTERFACE FLAPPING - A device may include a control module and a line card. The control module may be configured to run a routing protocol to obtain routing information from network devices. The line card may include a processor. The processor may be configured to establish a bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) session with a remote device, determine whether an interface associated with the BFD session is flapping, terminate the BFD session when the interface is flapping, disable the interface when the interface is flapping, re-enable the interface after a dampening recovery period elapses, reestablish the BFD session, and send a BFD packet to the remote device.09-29-2011
20120278492USING A SERVER'S CAPABILITY PROFILE TO ESTABLISH A CONNECTION - A network device connects between a client and a server. The network device is configured to store information regarding a capability of the server; receive a first message, from the client, intended for the server; obtain the stored information regarding the capability of the server; generate a second message that includes the information regarding the capability of the server; send the second message to the client; receive a third message from the client; and establish, based on the third message, a connection between the client and the server.11-01-2012
20120278491Session Management Technique - A system for managing sessions between a client and multiple servers includes: a receiver for receiving, as a proxy for each of the servers, a request from the client to any of the servers; a determination unit for determining, upon receipt of the request from the client to any of the servers, whether sessions established between the client and the multiple servers are maintained; a disconnection unit for disconnecting, on condition that a session between the client and any of the multiple servers is already disconnected, the sessions established between the client and the servers different from the disconnected server; and a forward unit for forwarding, on condition that the sessions established between the client and all of the multiple servers are maintained, the received request to the destination server for the request.11-01-2012
20110270996METHOD FOR CONFIGURING CLOSED USER NETWORK USING IP TUNNELING MECHANISM AND CLOSED USER NETWORK SYSTEM - A method for configuring a closed user network (CUN) using an IP tunneling mechanism and a CUN system are disclosed. In particular, disclosed is a technique of establishing a tunnel between a tunnel end edge device (TEED) and a control server by using an IP tunneling mechanism to allow terminals connected to the TEED to perform communications by using a closed IP, enabling the TEED to provide a network address translation (NAT) function so that the TEED can perform data forwarding like a general NAT, without performing tunneling on a destination IP outside the closed IP section, to perform communication, and allowing a terminal located in an area where the TEED is not provided to directly establish a tunnel with the control server by using a client software to thereby perform communications with a terminal or a server connected to the TEED by using the closed IP.11-03-2011
20120089740METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SELECTING AN SVC OPERATION POINT, AND METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION OF SVC OPERATION POINTS - A method for selecting an SVC operation point is provided, which includes: receiving an SDP message, where the SDP message includes a unique ID of each operation point and characteristic parameters of at least one operation point of multiple operation points, where the unique ID includes a layer-ID; selecting an operation point from the multiple operation points; and sending a session setup request that includes the unique ID of the selected operation point. A server device and a client device are also provided. Through the method and the device, each operation point may be uniquely identified, and the mapping relationship between each operation point and characteristic parameters is clarified.04-12-2012
20120089739EXPEDITED RESOURCE NEGOTIATION IN SIP - A method of expediting resource negotiation in a modified Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) reduces the number of messages exchanged for resource negotiation, thereby reducing the latencies involved in session setup. The method entails sending an INVITE message having a modified SIP header containing an indication that the originator's terminal seeks a fast session setup. The INVITE message further contains a list of all codecs available at the originator's terminal and how many each type of media component are required. These codecs can be provided in an order of preference. The answerer selects the codecs for the requested media types from the list of available codecs without engaging in a back-and-forth resource negotiation for the codecs. The result is that the session can be set up with fewer messages which provides quicker session setup than in the prior art.04-12-2012
20110276701System and Method to Trigger a Mobile Device in Different Domains Based on Unsuccessful Initialization or Handover - A system to promote communication in a second domain responsive to a failure in a first domain. The system includes a first domain for communicating, and a second domain for communicating. The system includes a rejection message and a mobile device. The rejection message transmitted upon a failure of a call in the first domain. The mobile device configured to communicate in both the first domain and the second domain. The mobile device configured to attempt the call in the second domain responsive to receiving the rejection message in the first domain.11-10-2011
20110276700SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PEER-TO-PEER ENDPOINT MESSAGING - A system and method are disclosed for messaging between endpoints in a peer-to-peer hybrid network. In one example, the method includes establishing a peer-to-peer communication session between a first endpoint and a second endpoint and between the first endpoint and a third endpoint. The first endpoint then bridges the communication sessions to include both the second and third endpoints.11-10-2011
20110276699SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ALLOCATION OF CLASSES OF SERVICE TO NETWORK CONNECTIONS CORRESPONDING TO VIRTUAL CHANNELS - A system for allocating a different class of service to each network connection in a plurality of network connections, where each network connection corresponds to one or more virtual channels. The system can include a plurality of virtual channels that connect a first computer and a second computer. Each virtual channel can service at least a portion of the network traffic generated using a remote-display protocol. The system can also include a plurality of network connections, where each network connection corresponds to at least one of the virtual channels. Each network connection of the system can have an assigned port number and an assigned class of service that corresponds to a transmission priority level. The class of service assigned to each network connection can be unique from the classes of service assigned to other network connections.11-10-2011
20110276697Remote Session Management - Provided is reporting session information for a session upstream from a server. A data processing system receives a session handshake from a first client for a session between the server and the first client. The system receives a session-descriptor for a session between a second client and the first client before handling a nested session. The system determines whether a user has made an upstream session request. The system obtains session data from an upstream data structure, responsive to a determination that the user has made an upstream session request. The system renders the session data based on the upstream session request.11-10-2011
20110276696Provider Connection Framework - A library of routines may serve as a connection point between multiple services. Each service may be a consumer or provider of data, and may be connected through the library using a registry service. The library may include a provider access mechanism through which provider services may transmit availability of an interface, as well as a consumer access mechanism through which an interface to be consumed may be transmitted. A registry service may match providers with consumers and facilitate communication between the two. The library may be configured to allow providers and consumers to be added or removed at any time.11-10-2011
20120096172Method and apparatus for remotely controlling a computer with peer-to-peer command and data transfer - A remote access session is established between client and host computers with the assistance of a gateway. The gateway requests the host computer to send a plurality of data packets to different external addresses and monitors the network ports used for these outgoing packets. The gateway then uses the network port information to predict which port the host will use to transmit future outgoing data packets. A similar process is performed on the client computer. The gateway then directs the client computer to send further data packets to the network address and the predicted port of the host computer. Similarly, the host computer is directed to send further data packets to the network address and predicted port of the client computer. The computers are then directly connected together so that further data communications bypass the gateway.04-19-2012
20120096171SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENTERPRISE NODES THAT ARE CONTAINED WITHIN A PUBLIC CLOUD TO COMMUNICATE WITH PRIVATE ENTERPRISE INFRASTRUCTURE DEPENDENCIES - An agent is deployed to a node of an enterprise network, where the agent is configured to establish communication with the enterprise network after migration of the node to a cloud infrastructure. Further, the node is migrated to the cloud infrastructure, and communication is established between the node and the enterprise network using the agent.04-19-2012
20120331154METHOD AND APPARATUS OF ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION BETWEEN DEVICES USING CACHED CONNECTION INFORMATION - Disclosed are an apparatus and method of performing a connection setup between two or more endpoint devices communication over a data network. An example connection setup operation may include receiving an initial command at the at least two endpoint devices, retrieving at least one IP address from a cache file in response to the initial command, assigning a port number to the at least one retrieved IP address based on a common session identifier (ID) shared between the at least two endpoint devices, and listening for a connection communication message on the assigned port number associated with the at least one IP address.12-27-2012
20120331157Selecting A Network Connection For Data Communications With A Networked Device - Selecting a network connection for data communications with a networked device, including: identifying a plurality of networks available for data communications with the networked device, each network having network connection attributes; and selecting one of the plurality of networks in dependence upon the network connection attributes and the direction of data transfer.12-27-2012
20120331155METHOD AND APPARATUS OF ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION BETWEEN DEVICES USING CACHED CONNECTION INFORMATION - Disclosed are an apparatus and method of caching connection information used to establish a communication connection setup between at least two endpoint devices across a data network. One example method of operation may include exchanging at least one interface address and at least one globally unique identifier between the at least two endpoint devices. The method may also provide retrieving a last successful connection setup information based on the at least one globally unique identifier and the at least one interface address, assigning at least one port number to the at least one interface address via at least one of the two endpoint devices, exchanging at least one rendezvous message between the at least two endpoint devices to share connection setup information, and storing at least one of the at least one interface address, that at least one globally unique identifier, the last successful connection setup information, and the at least one port number in a cache file.12-27-2012
20120331158System and Method for Determining Trust for SIP Messages - A method in a user agent (UA) is provided. The method includes sending a SIP REGISTER request, and receiving a SIP REGISTER response message. The SIP REGISTER response message has a first header field that includes an identifier associated with a trusted network node. The method also includes receiving a SIP message having a second header field for indicating a URI, and sending a SIP communication if the URI matches the identifier associated with the trusted network node.12-27-2012
20120331156WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM, METHODS AND APPARATUS - Methods, systems and apparatus for controlling wireless target devices, such as, for example, appliances or other electrically powered devices, or power circuits for providing power to such target devices. A user of a smart device, such as, for example, a cell phone, can conveniently configure the smart device for communication with the target devices, and control the target devices using the smart device via a local network or remotely away from the local network. The target device can broadcast a network for use in configuring the smart device for use in controlling the target device.12-27-2012
20120331153Establishing A Data Communications Connection Between A Lightweight Kernel In A Compute Node Of A Parallel Computer And An Input-Output ('I/O') Node Of The Parallel Computer - Establishing a data communications connection between a lightweight kernel in a compute node of a parallel computer and an input-output (‘I/O’) node of the parallel computer, including: configuring the compute node with the network address and port value for data communications with the I/O node; establishing a queue pair on the compute node, the queue pair identified by a queue pair number (‘QPN’); receiving, in the I/O node on the parallel computer from the lightweight kernel, a connection request message; establishing by the I/O node on the I/O node a queue pair identified by a QPN for communications with the compute node; and establishing by the I/O node the requested connection by sending to the lightweight kernel a connection reply message.12-27-2012
20110320612ELECTRONIC APPARATUS, WIRELESS DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, an electronic apparatus comprises a communication device, a first controller, a second controller, and a player. The communication device has a close proximity wireless communication function. The first controller establishes connection between a wireless device and the communication device in a proximity state. The second controller connects the electronic apparatus to a server through the close proximity wireless communication function and a wireless communication function of the wireless device. The player plays a content received from the server through the close proximity wireless communication function and the wireless communication function of the wireless device, to halt playing the content when the proximity state is released during the playing, and resume playing the content when the proximity state is restored.12-29-2011
20110320611WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication device includes an identification information storage stores identification information based on which a predetermined terminal device is identified, an initial setting storage storing, as an initial setting, a communication setting with which a direct communication is enabled with respect to the predetermined terminal device identified by the identification information stored in the identification information storage, an acquiring unit acquires a connection setting to connect an access point, a transmission unit transmits the connection setting acquired by the acquiring unit and an instruction to connect with the access point in accordance with the connection setting to the predetermined terminal deice in accordance with the initial setting stored in the initial setting storage, and a setting unit makes the communication device connectable to the access point with the connection setting acquired by the acquiring unit after the connection setting and the instruction are transmitted by the transmission unit.12-29-2011
20110320609Handling Of A Communication Session - Method, device and computer program product for handling a communication session at a device, by executing a communication session handling program at the device, the communication session handling program comprising a communication session handling part for handling the communication session and an interfacing part for linking with a communication session control interface. An application executed at the device provides, to a user of the device, a communication session control interface for the communication session handled by the communication session handling part of the communication session handling program, the application linking with the interfacing part of the communication session handling program. On detecting that the application has ceased to provide the communication session control interface, the interfacing part of the communication session handling program links, without dropping the communication session, to a further communication session control interface provided at the device for continuation of the communication session handled by the communication session handling part.12-29-2011
20120102205RELAY DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A relay device requests a status notification of another relay device to a server device. When the relay device is notified that the other relay device is under a logged-out status, the relay device stands by. When the relay device is notified that the other relay device has logged in, the relay device transmits a connection request to the server device. The server device relays the connection request to the other relay device. A response is transmitted from the other relay device to the server device, and further relayed to the relay device. Accordingly, a TCP connection is established between the relay device and the other relay device. A communication device connected to a different network can transmit and receive data to and from the relay device via the other relay device.04-26-2012
20120102204SYSTEM AND METHOD EMPLOYING AN AGILE NETWORK PROTOCOL FOR SECURE COMMUNICATIONS USING SECURE DOMAIN NAMES - A system and method connect a first network device and a second network device by initiating a secure communication link. The system includes one or more servers configured to: receive, from the first network device, a request to look up a network address of the second network device based on an identifier associated with the second network device; determine, in response to the request, whether the second network device is available for a secure communications service; and initiate a secure communication link between the first network device and the second network device based on a determination that the second network device is available for the secure communications service; wherein the secure communications service uses the secure communication link to communicate at least one of video data and audio data between the first network device and the second network device.04-26-2012
20120290728Data card and method for quickly establishing dial-up connection thereof - The disclosure provides a method for quickly establishing a dial-up connection by using a data card, which comprises: when a mobile terminal initiates the dial-up connection from a computer, performing both a process of initiating a wireless connection establishment through a Unified Messaging (Um) port and a process of initiating a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server through a Remote Messaging (Rm) port at the same time. Compared with the prior art, in the technical solution of the disclosure, the time for initiating the DHCP server by the terminal equipment (TE) is advanced and is identical to the time for initiating the wireless transmission connection establishment, thus the Um side and the Rm side can initiate the dial-up flow at the same time, and the time for waiting DHCP discover messages and the time for waiting the wireless connection establishment overlap, in this way, the purpose of shortening dial-up time and realizing quick dial-up is achieved.11-15-2012
20120290727METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INCREASING PERFORMANCE OF TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL SESSIONS IN DATA NETWORKS - A method for increasing the performance of a transmission control protocol (TCP) session transmitted over a telephony local loop between a client and a server. The method comprises: providing a proxy system between the client and the server, the client and the server being coupled through a network; intercepting, at the proxy system, a request transmitted by the client; transparently establishing a first TCP session between the client and the proxy system, and a second TCP session between the proxy system and the server; and storing data, received from the server in response to the request, in a buffer at the proxy system, when throughput between the server and proxy system is greater than throughput between the proxy system and the client.11-15-2012
20100169495METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING CONTINUITY OF MEDIA STREAMS IN A SESSION - A method, apparatus, and system for processing continuity of media streams in a session are disclosed herein to fulfill the requirements for processing continuity of media streams in a session. The method includes the following steps: providing an SAF between a set of first access connections and a remote connection corresponding to a HandOver Remote Function (HORF), where each first access connection corresponds to a HandOver Source Function (HOSF) in an HOSF set in a session and is associated with at least one target media stream; associating, by the SAF, a media component corresponding to the target media stream with a second access connection between the SAF and each HandOver Destination Function (HODF) in an HODF set after receiving a stream operation request; performing, by the SAF, a stream operation on the second access connection and processes continuity of the target media stream.07-01-2010
20100169494Virtualizing Sockets to Enable the Migration of a System Environment - Techniques for maintaining connectivity between a remote application stored on a remote device and an application being executed in a system environment, wherein the system environment is migrated from a first device to a second device, are provided. A first connection between the remote application stored on the remote device and the application being executed in the system environment stored on the first device is established via a first communication over a first negotiation channel. The first negotiation channel connects a first socket layer interface linked to the application being executed in the system environment to a second socket layer interface linked to the remote application. The first connection between the remote application and the application being executed in the system environment is disconnected for migration of the system environment from the first device to the second device. Disconnecting the first connection is coordinated via the first negotiation channel. A second connection between the remote application stored on the remote device and an application being executed in the migrated system environment stored on the second device is established via a second communication over a second negotiation channel. The second negotiation channel connects a third socket layer interface linked to the application being executed in the migrated system environment to the second socket layer interface linked to the remote application.07-01-2010
20100169493SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SWITCHING FROM STREAMING CONTENT TO LOCAL CONTENT - A method of receiving streaming music at a wireless device is provided. The method includes receiving a music stream from a server, emitting music from the music stream, and playing a locally stored song, when a network interruption is detected. The method may further include accessing a playlist and determining whether the playlist includes at least one of a user favorite song, a same artist song, or a same genre song. Moreover, the method may also include determining that a network connection is re-established, finishing playback of the locally stored song, receiving another music stream from the server, and emitting music from the other music stream.07-01-2010
20130013795ESTABLISHING SECURE COMMUNICATION LINK BETWEEN COMPUTERS OF VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK - A technique is disclosed for establishing a secure communication link between a first computer and a second computer over a computer network. Initially, a secure communication mode of communication is enabled at a first computer without a user entering any cryptographic information for establishing the secure communication mode of communication. Then, a secure communication link is established between the first computer and a second computer over a computer network based on the enabled secure communication mode of communication. The secure communication link is a virtual private network communication link over the computer network in which one or more data values that vary according to a pseudo-random sequence are inserted into each data packet.01-10-2013
20130013794METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CREATING IP-CAN SESSION - A method and an apparatus for creating an Internet Protocol Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session are disclosed herein. The method includes: creating, by a First Policy and Charging Enforcement Function entity, PCEFa entity, a session with a Policy and Charging Rules Function entity, PCRF entity; performing, by the PCEFa entity, mobility registration with a second Policy and Charging Enforcement Function entity, PCEFb entity; creating, by the PCEFb entity, a session with the PCRF entity; and sending, by the PCRF entity, a session information to the PCEFa entity and the PCEFb entity. mobility The apparatus includes: a PCEFa entity, a PCEFb entity, and a PCRF entity. The method and the apparatus for creating an IP-CAN session under the present disclosure accomplish the purpose of creating an IP-CAN session in the new PCC architecture.01-10-2013
20130013793APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR HANDLING MACHINETO-MACHINE COMMUNICATIONS - The present invention faces the issues of communicating Machine-To-Machine Devices with Machine-To-Machine Servers for remote control of said Machine-To-Machine Devices (401-10-2013
20100161806Optimization of Media Flows in a Telecommunications System - Disclosed are techniques for optimization of media flows within a provider network. The provider network comprises a plurality of sites, each site having one or more media servers capable of supporting a media session with a user endpoint device. The provider network further includes a media server director (MSD) that receives registration information identifying one or more user endpoint devices that have registered with a particular site. Using this registration information, as well as predetermined preference policies, the MSD prepares a preference order for the media servers of the provider network for user endpoint devices associated with the site. When an application server signals an intent to establish a media session with a user endpoint device of the site, the MSD selects a media server based on the preference order and provides an indicator of the selected media server. The application server can then contact the selected media server identified by the indicator to establish and support a media session with the user endpoint device.06-24-2010
20100131656METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISPATCHING RECEIVED SESSIONS BETWEEN A PLURALITY OF INSTANCES OF AN APPLICATION USING THE SAME IP PORT - A logical module, referred as Load Balancer Module (LBM), is disclosed which listens to one of certain common predefined port number. These well-known ports for receiving communication video conference signaling and control protocols is thereafter load balanced and multi-plexed to a number of instances of protocol stack applications. By balancing the multi-media data stream across a multitude of application instances multiple multi-media data streams may be serviced and processed by a single internet protocol host processor. A mutipoint control unit (MCU) may therefore process multiple input data streams containing multi-media video conferencing information.05-27-2010
20120151072Establishing Unique Sessions for DNS Subscribers - A system establishes virtual DNS servers that are supported by a DNS server. Target IP addresses are assigned for the virtual DNS servers. Network capable devices are uniquely assigned to the virtual DNS servers for domain name resolution. Each network capable device accesses the communication network through a corresponding network device associated with a corresponding source IP address. A client's service plan is assigned to a first network capable device used by the client. The service plan is implemented through a DNS request under a session established between the first network capable device and its assigned first virtual DNS server. The session is uniquely identified by a first source IP address of a first network device used by the first network capable device to access the communication network and a first target IP address of the first virtual DNS server.06-14-2012
20120151071METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR ESTABLISHING PT SESSION IN ORDER TO USE PT BOX - A PT (Push-To) service among SIP based session services, and particularly, a method and terminal for establishing a PT session in order to allow a certain user to use a PT box service under control of a PT server in a SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) based service, are discussed. According to an embodiment, the method of providing a Push-To (PT) box service, includes storing, in a PT server, PT box setting information of a terminal; receiving, by the PT server, a session invitation directed to the terminal; and determining, by the PT server, a routing of the session invitation to a PT box for the terminal based on at least the PT box setting information.06-14-2012
20120151070METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING NETWORK PROXY - A method and system for implementing network proxy are provided. The method includes: establishing a first connection between a client and a server through a proxy adapter, so as to enable the client to acquire status information of the server through the first connection; and if the status information of the server shows that the server is in a turn-on state, establishing a second connection between the client and the server, so as to enable the client and the server to transmit a data packet through the second connection. Through the method for implementing network proxy, the client acquires the status information of the server through the first connection, and only when the status information of the server is the turn-on state, could the second connection between the client and the server be established, thereby ensuring the reliability of establishing the second connection, and improving the user experience.06-14-2012
20120151068ENDPOINT WEB MONITORING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MEASURING POPULARITY OF A SERVICE OR APPLICATION ON A WEB SERVER - A system is provided that includes an artificial connection generator and a probe machine. The artificial connection generator is configured to establish one or more artificial connections with a server that at least partially hosts one or more services or applications for access by clients. The probe machine is configured to control a number of artificial connections with the server by the artificial connection generator. The probe machine also is configured to establish a probing connection with a server to determine a service time of the server that is indicative of a time period involved with execution by the server of one or more requests to the server. The probe machine is configured to derive a number of actual connections between the clients and the server based on changes in the service time of the server when the number of artificial connections with the server is varied.06-14-2012
20120151067Method and System for Extending Memory Capacity of a Mobile Device Using Proximate Devices and Multicasting - An improved download capability for mobile devices, without requiring increasing of the local memory of such devices, by providing a set of multimedia devices with the capability to create a cooperative download grid where multiple instrumented devices can be aggregated together according to predefined profiles. This capability is useful in at least two different scenarios. The first is when a SIP enabled device must download a large file having a capacity that is larger than the available memory of the SIP device. The second is when a SIP enabled device must download a file but cannot be connected for a long enough time to accomplish the download. If the SIP device is in proximity to other compatible devices such as Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) or Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), these devices are operable to be dynamically aggregated to provide a download grid with multiprotocol support that allows optimized downloading.06-14-2012
20130019021DATA PATH SELECTION METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION SESSIONAANM LAU; PriscillaAACI FremontAAST CAAACO USAAGP LAU; Priscilla Fremont CA US - A network controller may receive a communication session request from a user device via a network gateway. The communication session request may include a request to establish a communication session between two or more devices. The network controller may also determine that a communication session corresponding to the communication session request requires a network boarder controller, access a data structure that associates network gateways with network border controllers according to distance, and use the data structure to identify a network border controller that is located nearest to the network gateway. The network controller may establish a communication session comprising a data transport path between the network gateway and the network border controller, of a plurality of network border controllers, nearest to the network gateway.01-17-2013
20130019020SMART WIRELESS CONNECTIONAANM Kang; FengAACI San DiegoAAST CAAACO USAAGP Kang; Feng San Diego CA USAANM Treebs; LelandAACI San DiegoAAST CAAACO USAAGP Treebs; Leland San Diego CA USAANM Zhou; YiAACI San DiegoAAST CAAACO USAAGP Zhou; Yi San Diego CA US - Disclosed are approaches for automatically forming a wireless connection for a computing device. In one embodiment, a method can include: determining that a first wireless connection for a computing device has been lost; receiving a browser indication from a browser running on the computing device that a second wireless connection is desired for the computing device; providing, in response to the browser indication, an automatic connection indication to a user of the computing device via a user interface; receiving an acceptance indication from the user interface in response to the automatic connection indication; and establishing the second wireless connection for the computing device in response to the acceptance indication from the user interface.01-17-2013
20110145419INTER-DEVICE MOBILITY SESSION RELEASE - A method and apparatus for performing session release are provided. For a transferred communication session between a plurality of wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) and a remote device, wherein at least one of the WTRUs performs the transferred communication session in association with a first Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) and at least one other of the WTRUs performs the transferred communication session in association with a second IMS, session release may include releasing the transferred communication session, a portion thereof, one or more of the WTRUs, or a collaborative session associated with the transferred communication session while maintaining service continuity. Any one of the plurality of WTRUs or the remote device may initiate the session release by transmitting a release request. Any one of the plurality of WTRUs may control the transferred communication session and may modify or reject a release request.06-16-2011
20110161504METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING SESSION INFORMATION - A method and an apparatus for identifying session information are disclosed by the present invention, wherein the method includes: a sending end PCRF sends an S9 session message to a receiving end PCRF in order to transmit the Diameter session information, wherein the S9 session message carries the identification information identifying the Diameter session uniquely; the receiving end PCRF determines the Diameter session corresponding to the Diameter session information carried by the S9 session message according to the identification information. By the present invention, when the receiving end PCRF issues the policy control information, it issues the policy control information to a corresponding Gxx session or AF session according to the unique identification information carried by the S9 session, thereby it can consummate the application flow of the realization of the S9 roaming interface in the policy charging control frame.06-30-2011
20110161503METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTIPLE PHYSICAL USE OF A SINGLE IDENTIFIER CODE SHARED BY A GROUP OF TERMINALS IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A method for conducting communication between a plurality of terminals and at least one control center via a network, the terminals being combined into a group, with all the terminals in that group having the same identifier code within the network, and attachment to the network and establishment of a connection between an individual terminal and the control center taking place within a predetermined time window with subsequent terminating of the connection and detachment from the network, and attachment to the network and establishment of a connection between the next terminal in that group and the control center taking place within the following time window, so that after a predeterminable time period has elapsed all the terminals assigned to the group were or could have been connected to the control center at least once.06-30-2011
20110161501METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING DATA BETWEEN TWO HOSTS - A method for communicating video data between at least a first host and a second host comprises: identifying, at a server, an address of the first host, to which the second host may communicate video data, and a sequence number expected by a network security system coupled between the first host and the server; and communicating, from the second host to the first host, video data using the address of the first host and the sequence number expected. The method may further comprise: identifying, at the server, an address of the second host, to which the first host may communicate video data, and a second sequence number expected by a network security system coupled between the second host and the server; and communicating, from the first host to the second host, video data using the address of the second host and the second expected sequence number. The second host may be adapted to perform the act of communicating without use of an intermediate server. The method may also further comprise communicating periodically, from the first host to the server, through the network security system, so as to maintain an open communication channel through the network security system to the first host at the address of the first host. The address of the first host may include address information and port information.06-30-2011
20110161500SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING PORTS FOR RTSP ACROSS CORES IN A MULTI-CORE SYSTEM - The present application is directed towards systems and methods for systems and methods for handling real-time streaming protocol sessions by an intermediary multi-core system. When a multi-core intermediary receives a setup request for a real-time streaming protocol session, the intermediary processes and forwards the request to a server providing the streaming media. The server sets up an RTSP session and transmits a session identification to the multi-core intermediary. A core of the intermediary receives the transmitted session identification and determines an owner core of the session, based on a hash of the session identification. The core transmits the session information to the determined owner core, which selects two consecutive ports on which to establish listening services. The owner core then notifies all other cores to establish listening services on the same consecutive ports, such that any core that receives an RTSP control message from a client can handle it properly.06-30-2011
20110161499NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION METHOD, NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATOR, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR MEDIA STREAMING - A network address translation method includes: configuring a network address translator (NAT) to receive a first control signal from a first user end indicating an intent to conduct media streaming, a media description in the first control signal including a private first address and a private first port; configuring the NAT to modify the first address and the first port to a public second address and a public second port, and to send a second control signal containing a media description that includes the second address and the second port to a control signal server; and configuring the NAT to receive a third control signal sent in response from a second user end via the control signal server, parse a media description in the third control signal to obtain a public third address and a public third port, and establish an address translation rule using the addresses and ports.06-30-2011
20110161498SELF-SERVICE TERMINAL - A self-service terminal comprises: a plurality of session initiation devices, each associated with an initiation token, so that a customer can initiate a transaction using one of a plurality of different initiation tokens. The terminal further comprises a plurality of session suppliers, each session supplier being associated with one of the session initiation devices, and each session supplier being operable: (i) to receive from its associated session initiation device, information from an initiation token provided by a customer, and (ii) to create an electronic access token based on the received information. The terminal also comprises a session supplier aggregate operable to receive an electronic access token from one of the session suppliers for each session to be created; and a session component operable (i) to receive the electronic access token from the session supplier aggregate and (ii) to create a session based on the received electronic access token.06-30-2011
20130024578Method and system for distributed initiation of USB over network data plane connections - Connecting USB devices with USB hosts over a network supporting distributed initiations of USB connections over the network, including the following steps: Connecting non-collocated USB hosts with respective non-collocated USB host adaptors (USBHs), according to USB specification timings. Connecting non-collocated USB devices with respective non-collocated USB device adaptors (USBDs). Enabling the USBDs and the USBHs to communicate over the network and to discover the presence and capabilities of one another. Initiating, by the USBDs or the USBHs, via the network control plane, USB-over-network-data-plane connections between the USB devices and the USB hosts. And operating at least two of the USB-over-network-data-plane connections essentially simultaneously and without any common network node.01-24-2013
20130024577SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A RELATIONSHIP BASED ON A PRIOR ASSOCIATION - Disclosed herein are systems, methods, and non-transitory computer-readable storage media for automatically establishing trusted relationships between users across organizational boundaries. A user makes a request to his system to create a trusted relationship with an individual of another organization. The system then analyzes the previous communication history between the user and the other individual, and, based on that analysis, sends a query to the other individual's system. The system then receives a response from the other individual's system, and if the response matches an expected response the system forms a trusted relationship between the user and the other individual.01-24-2013
20130024576Proximity-Based Detection - Proximity-based detection is described. In one or more implementations, an identifier is received wirelessly by a computing device from another computing device that is directly communicated from the other computing device such that the identifier is not communicated via an intermediary device. The other computing device is identified by comparing the identifier to one or more identifiers stored locally by the computing device. A notification is output for display that indicates the other computing device is within a predefined proximity to the computing device and that identifies the other computing device using data associated with the identifier that is stored locally by the computing device.01-24-2013
20130024575METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PROVIDING LEGACY DEVICES ACCESS TO A SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) BASED NETWORK - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for providing legacy devices access to a session initiation protocol (SIP) based network are disclosed. One exemplary system comprises a session initiation protocol (SIP) based access proxy element communicatively coupled to a SIP based network that includes a registration engine configured to create a mapped entry in a database that associates an assigned SIP registration identifier to an identifier corresponding to a legacy endpoint device and configured to register the legacy endpoint device into the SIP based network using the assigned SIP registration identifier. The SIP based access proxy element further includes a session management module configured to establish a communications session involving the registered legacy endpoint device by interworking between a legacy control protocol and a SIP based call control protocol using the mapped entry in the database.01-24-2013
20130024574COMMUNICATION SESSION ALLOCATION - A network device may receive an incoming call for a user device requesting a communication session corresponding to a particular communication session type, where the user device is attached to a first access network. The network device may identify the first access network and determine whether a first centralized network supports the communication session type in the first access network. When the first centralized network supports the communication session type in the first access network, the network device may designate the first centralized network to service the incoming call. When the first centralized network does not support the communication session type in the first access network, the network device may designate a second centralized network to service the incoming call.01-24-2013
20130173811NETWORK SYSTEM OF HOME APPLIANCE AND NETWORK SETUP METHOD OF THE SAME - A network system of a home appliance configured to set up a network of the home appliance by using a terminal, and a network set-up method of the same, after converting a home appliance having built with a WIFI module into an AP to enable the terminal to be connected to an AP home appliance, the information stored at the terminal is transmitted to the AP home appliance, and thus the WIFI may be set up without a separate manipulation of a user at the time of setting up the WIFI of the home appliance without adding an input/output apparatus such as a display apparatus or an interface, the set-up value of the AP, the device information, and the device authentication key may be changed, and thus is safer from hack attacks, an AP is not needed to be provided, and thus a cost-related advantage may be obtained.07-04-2013
20080244074REMEDIAL ACTION AGAINST MALICIOUS CODE AT A CLIENT FACILITY - Aspects of this invention may relate to a malicious application remedial action request application where a network site interaction may be requested from a client computing facility; the network site interaction from the client computing facility may be determined to be unacceptable based on an acceptance policy at a gateway facility; access to the network site from the client computing facility may be denied; information relating to the attempted interaction with the network site may be sent from the gateway facility to the client computing facility, wherein the information may indicate that the attempted interaction occurred; and the client computing facility may interpret the information relating to the attempted interaction, determine whether the attempted interaction was the result of an automatically generated request, and take remedial action in the event that the attempted interaction was the result of the automatically generated request.10-02-2008
20080228923Server-Side Connection Resource Pooling - A server side connection pool provides pooling of server connections. Thus, client side processes do not create groups of dedicated resources. Clients are provided the capability to communicate to a server side connection broker process to GET a pooled server connection comprising connection state plus a thread of execution for doing some work, whereby requesting the work can bypass the connection broker process and go directly to the assigned pooled connection. Once the client issues a RELEASE to release the pooled connection back to the pool, a completely different client process on potentially a different client middle tier machine can reuse the same pooled connection. The server-side connection pool can be logically partitioned into sub-pools that correspond to connection classes that typically correspond to respective applications. A client process can request a pooled connection having a particular state, where a stored procedure can be executed to generate such state.09-18-2008
20110246654Wireless Shared Resource Computing - The formation of a wireless device group for use in the shared resource computing environment involves establishing a wireless communication connection between a host wireless interface device and each of one or more dependent wireless interface devices, in which each dependent wireless interface devices is configured to not directly communicate with a computing device. Another wireless communication connection is established between the host wireless interface device and the computing device when the host wireless interface device is within a host connection distance of the computing device.10-06-2011
20080222298SHARING A SHARED RESOURCE ACROSS LOGICAL PARTITIONS OR SYSTEMS - An apparatus and method for sharing a resource (such as a modem or virtual private network) allow virtualizing the shared resource in a simple and efficient manner that allows both accepting and initiating virtual or physical connections through the shared resource across logical partitions or systems. An L2TP tunnel is established between the server that owns the shared resource and the client that desires to use the shared resource. Messages are defined that allow the client to initiate an outgoing connection through the shared resource, and that allow the client to accept an incoming connection received from the shared resource. Once the connection is made, the client and ultimate destination communicate through the shared resource via point-to-point communications.09-11-2008
20080222297METHOD AND SYSTEM TO EFFICIENTLY MANAGE A NETWORK CONNECTION TO CONNECT A CLIENT AND A RESOURCE - This document discusses, among other things, an example system and methods for connecting a client and a resource. Example embodiments may include receiving a request from a client computer, for a connection to a generically named resource that is associated with multiple resources. In response to the request, example embodiments may further include detecting whether one of the multiple resources is overloaded and determining a number of static connections reserved for the client computer. A static or dynamic connection may be assigned to the resource or a further one of the multiple resources based on the generic resource name, the load on the resource and the number of static connections reserved for the client computer.09-11-2008
20080222296DISTRIBUTED SERVER ARCHITECTURE - A method and apparatus for synchronizing network element state when a network connection between a plurality of servers is restored after a network failure includes a plurality of objects that exist within the network. Each object exists in a plurality of different versions, in which each said different object version results from modifications to an object made by different servers during the network failure when the servers are unable to communicate with each other but otherwise continue to function. Each object comprises a vector including a separate version number for each server, in which each server increments its version number in the vector when it modifies the object. An automatic conflict resolution mechanism provides, at each server, a most up to date view of all objects across all of said plurality of servers upon restoration of the network connection between said plurality of servers after said network failure. The conflict resolution mechanism reconciles the existence of said plurality of different versions of an object to determine which object version should take precedence over other object versions. Conflict resolution is performed when there are multiple versions of a same object at a server. The conflict resolution mechanism also comprises at least one tie breaking rule that is applied to decide which servers take precedence over other servers when determining which object version should take precedence over other object versions.09-11-2008
20080222294Managing Communications Using a Mobile Device - A method and apparatus is provided for managing communications using a mobile device. More specifically, the present invention allows the mobile device to transfer a communication session from one network path to another network path. The user of the mobile device, therefore, has control over “network choice” instead of the network operators or handset providers. In addition, the present invention allows the mobile device to manage an association with one or more wireless network access points. With respect to access point management, the present invention provides a “fast scan” or “short scan” process to reduce the scanning time during active communication sessions to a level that is not detectable by the user. As a result, the present invention is more efficient, reduces power consumption, increases call quality and increases user acceptance of the device.09-11-2008
20080222293Systems and methods for facilitating identification of communication originators - Systems, apparatuses and methods for facilitating identification of the originator of a communication. A communication is received from a sending device. Sending device identification information is requested from a distributed contact database fashioned from the contact databases of the communication devices in a group of communication devices. If the sending device identification information is available at a given communication device, it is received from the communication device.09-11-2008
20100318664STEGANOGRAPHIC ENCODING FOR VIDEO AND IMAGES - The presently claimed invention relates generally to digital watermarking and steganographic data hiding for video and images. One claim recites a method of connecting a user computing device to one of a plurality of remote computers available for communication over a network. The method includes: a) obtaining streaming data representing a two dimensional color image or video, the two dimensional color image or video including an index steganographically hidden therein through alterations to the two dimensional color image or video; b) analyzing the streaming data to obtain the index; c) accessing a database with the index, the database comprising a plurality of records that associate an index to a pointer, the pointer identifying a remote computer on the network, in which the pointer is determined as a function of the index; and d) using the pointer to establish communication with the remote computer identified thereby. Of course, additional claims and combinations are provided as well.12-16-2010
20130179580DYNAMIC VPN ADDRESS ALLOCATION - Methods and related systems are presented that relate to automatically avoiding address conflicts when establishing a secure communications link over a public network between a local computer, associated with a local network, and a remote computer, located outside the local network. In order to avoid address conflict, addresses reserved for use by the local network and addresses reserved for use by the remote network are determined. At least one local address is selected from among available local addresses such that the selected local address is an address that does not conflict with the reserved addresses of the local network and the reserved addresses of the remote network. The selected local address is used in connection with establishment of the secure communications link between the local computer and the remote computer.07-11-2013
20120254449CONTROLLING A DATA EXCHANGE SESSION BETWEEN TERMINALS OF A FIRST USER AND AT LEAST ONE TERMINAL OF A SECOND USER - A method, device, program, server and terminal are provided for monitoring a data-exchange session between first terminals belonging to a first user and at least one second terminal belonging to a second user. The method includes, after the first user receives an invitation to establish a session, creating a first group of the first terminals belonging to the first user suitable for enabling the session to be established with the first group.10-04-2012
20110270993CAPABILITY GRABBING PEER DEVICE FUNCTIONALITY IN SIP - A method for enhancing the capability grabbing peer device functionality in Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is disclosed. The method includes associating a session originating from a first terminal (11-03-2011
20110270992ENHANCED FLIGHT CREW DISPLAY FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE CONTROLLER/PILOT DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS (CPDLC) VERSIONS - An avionics system comprising a human machine interface configured to display a user interface and a control device is provided. The control device coupled to the human machine interface, wherein the control device is configured to send and receive controller/pilot data link communications (CPDLC) messages and adjust the user interface based on a first CPDLC version of an established first CPDLC session.11-03-2011
20130138818METHOD FOR ACCESSING AN AUTOMATION SYSTEM AND SYSTEM OPERATING ACCORDING TO THE METHOD - A method and a corresponding system for accessing with a programming device an automation system having at least one automation device, includes the steps of establishing an indirect connection between the programming device and the at least one automation device via a conference server located remote from both the automation system and the programming device, said conference server having access to at least one virtual machine comprising engineering software, transmitting engineering data from the conference server to the at least one automation device in response to operator control actions at the programming device, remotely executing with the programming device via the conference server a virtual machine comprising engineering software, and transmitting via the conference server at least screen dumps of the virtual machine to the programming device.05-30-2013
20130173810System and Method of Enabling a Multi-Chassis Virtual Switch for Virtual Server Network Provisioning - A multi-chassis server system has several chassis, each including a chassis management controller (CMC) and a blade server with a blade management controller (BMC) and a virtual switch (VS). The first CMC establishes management sessions with the second CMC and the first BMC. The second CMC establishes a management session with the second BMC. A switch path on a virtual switch is provided via a management session to the first CMC and another switch path on another virtual switch is provided via a management session to the second chassis management controller and by another management session to the first CMC. The switch paths are aggregated into a chassis management controller virtual switch on the first chassis management controller.07-04-2013
20130091290INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - An information processing system (04-11-2013
20130091289METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING A COMMUNICATION SESSION FOR AN UNREGISTERED INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS) DEVICE - Methods and apparatus for handling a communication session for an unregistered Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) device are disclosed. An example method includes, in response to receiving an internet protocol multimedia subsystem session initiation message from a user endpoint, determining whether the user endpoint is registered; and, when the user endpoint is determined to be unregistered: determining whether the internet protocol multimedia subsystem session initiation message is directed to an exception endpoint by performing a lookup on a list; determining whether a profile for the unregistered user endpoint is available; when the profile for the user endpoint determined to be unregistered is unavailable, loading a default profile; and establishing an internet protocol multimedia subsystem session on behalf of the user endpoint determined to be unregistered when the internet protocol multimedia subsystem session initiation message is directed to the exception endpoint.04-11-2013
20130091288Discovering And Connecting Wireless Devices Without Discoverability - Pairing among computing devices is achieved without any of the device entering discoverable mode. An inquiring device obtains a list of MAC addresses and transmits connection requests using the MAC addresses. Any device within reception distance that has the same MAC address would respond to the request. Upon receiving the response, the two devices would pair up. A beacon may be used to store MAC addresses and related data. Computing devices may send inquiries to the beacon and receive in return MAC addresses corresponding to the inquiry. The devices may then transmit pairing requests using these MAC addresses.04-11-2013
20130091287SYSTEM FOR CONTACT SUBSCRIPTION INVITATIONS IN A CROSS-DOMAIN CONVERGED ADDRESS BOOK SYSTEM - A system and method provides subscription invitations for an address book service. The system receives contact subscription invitation requests from originating clients. Contact data from the contact subscription invitation request is extracted. A session initiation protocol (SIP) message based on the extracted contact data is generated. The SIP message includes a user resource identifier (URI) to some or all of the originating client's Personal Contact Card (PCC). A SIP message is then transmitted to remote address book server.04-11-2013
20130097327SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PUSHING INFORMATION FROM A SERVER TO A MOBILE DEVICE - A system is provided for providing content to a plurality of mobile electronic devices, where at least some of the mobile electronic devices have wireless communications capabilities. A first network comprises a wireless network system for communicating with at least some of the mobile electronic devices through wireless sessions; a wired to wireless gateway module connected to the wireless network system for interfacing between a wireless portion of the first network and a wired portion of the first network; a session control module interfacing with the wired to wireless gateway module for managing the wireless sessions and wired sessions; and a relay server module interfacing with the session control module and the wired to wireless gateway module, the relay server module for providing relayed content to the mobile electronic devices. A second network comprises an external server for providing content to the mobile electronic devices.04-18-2013
20130097326VISITED PCRF S9 SESSION ID GENERATION - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method performed by a network node for generating a S9 session ID, the method including: receiving, at the network node, an attachment request from a user equipment (UE); creating a DIAMETER session ID; attaching a timestamp and UE ID to the DIAMETER session ID resulting in a S9 session ID; and initiating a S9 session with a home PCRN using the S9 session ID.04-18-2013
20130097328METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ENABLING FEATURES PROVIDED BY A FIRST PRESENTATION LAYER PROTOCOL IN A SESSION IMPLEMENTED ACCORDING TO A SECOND PRESENTATION LAYER PROTOCOL - A method for enabling a feature provided by a first presentation layer protocol, within a session established according to a second presentation layer protocol includes intercepting, by a hooking component executing on a first machine, a request, by an operating system executing on the first machine, for an indication whether the first machine established a session with a second machine according to a first presentation layer protocol. The method includes determining that the first machine established a session according to a second presentation layer protocol. The method includes identifying a type of a function within the operating system that generated the request for the indication. The method includes indicating that the first machine established the session according to the first presentation layer protocol, responsive to the identification of the type. The method includes enabling functionality provided for use in sessions established according to the first presentation layer protocol.04-18-2013
20130097324Selective Reestablishment of Cable Modem Internet Protocol Connectivity - Techniques are generally directed to selective reestablishment of Internet Protocol (IP) connectivity between a cable modem and a cable modem termination system (CMTS). IP connectivity between the cable modem and the CMTS is initially established through execution of a plurality of connectivity steps. After IP connectivity is lost, the cable modem determines which of the plurality of connectivity steps are desired for use in reestablishing IP connectivity, and sends a message to the CMTS indicating the desired IP connectivity step. The CMTS determines if the desired connectivity steps identified in the message may be used to reestablish IP connectivity, and sends a response message to the cable modem indicating if the desired connectivity steps may be used. IP connectivity is then reestablished using at least the desired connectivity steps.04-18-2013
20130103841SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AUTOMATED SERVER SIDE BROKERING OF A CONNECTION TO A REMOTE DEVICE - Systems and methods described herein provide for automated brokering of a remote connection to a device between entities, including support personnel, work queues and automated support tools. The automated brokering of the remote connection may be based on a work flow or events detecting during service to the remote device. In one example deployment, a centralized service provides support services to multiple customer devices. For each device, the centralized service establishes a remote connection to the device via a remote connectivity tool. Based on the type of work to perform, the centralized service may automatically provide the remote connection to a support automation tool to automatically deliver a local automation service to the device or to a remote support agent to access the device via the remote connection.04-25-2013
20130103843METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A COMMUNICATION LINK BETWEEN A PROGRAMMING DEVICE AND AN AUTOMATION TECHNOLOGY FIELD DEVICE - In a method for establishing a communication link between a programming device and an automation technology field device with an activatable DHCP server, the programming device is configured to automatically obtain a network address from a DHCP server upon connection to a field device with such activatable DHCP server or upon connection to a network with at least one field device having an activatable DHCP server.04-25-2013
20130103842METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUSES FOR APPLICATION SERVICE LAYER (ASL) INTER-NETWORKING - Systems and/or methods for providing internetworking among application services layers (ASLs) of different network technologies may be provided. For example, a tunnel anchor point (TAP) may be established. The TAP may be configured to enable communication between a local application in the network and a remote application in a different network. At the TAP, an ASL tunnel may be created to the local application in the network to facilitate the communication. Additionally, a message from the local application may be received where at least a portion of the message may be configured to be provided to a remote ASL and the remote application in the different network to which the local application wishes to communicate. At least the portion of the message may be provided to the remote ASL and the remote application in the different network.04-25-2013
20130103840INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS THAT CONTROLS CONNECTION OF DEVICES, METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE APPARATUS, AND DEVICE CONTROL SYSTEM - An information processing apparatus which is capable of performing device connection control for connection to more devices than the maximum connectable devices defined by the device interface standard or the SDK. A device server communication module generates communication threads for controlling data communication with device servers according to requests from higher-layer software. Each communication thread generates a device stack for controlling a device via an associated device server connected thereto in such a manner as if the device were directly connected to the apparatus. When a connection notification indicative of connection with the device is received, the communication thread attempts to detect a device stack in a non-data transmission and reception state from the device stacks, and connects to the device server via the detected device stack to perform data transmission and reception.04-25-2013
20130124739MEDIATION SERVER, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND CONNECTING METHOD - A mediation server for mediating subscription information to a communication device from a network operator providing network connectivity is provided. The server includes a management unit for managing context information of a communication device, which includes data relating to service provided by a network operator; an obtaining unit for obtaining device information of the communication device, which includes data needed to obtain subscription information from a network operator; a selecting unit for selecting, using the context information, a network operator that provides the best service to the communication device out of network operators that are able to provide network connectivity to the communication device; and a request unit for sending a request, with the obtained device information to the selected network operator, for subscription information which is to be used for the communication device to connect to the selected network operator as a home network operator.05-16-2013
20130124738METHODS, APPARATUS AND SYSTEMS FOR TRAFFIC IDENTIFICATION - Embodiments for enabling traffic content identification by a wireless transmit/receive unit are provided. The WTRU may store interface binding entries in a database associating links in a web page to various traffic content types, such as video, audio, and text. Upon a request to access one of the links, a socket may be created based on a data mobility policy associated with the traffic content type. Alternately, the database may associate the links directly to interface types based on the data mobility policies. The Access Network Discovery and Selection Function (ANDSF) may provide the data mobility policies to the WTRU.05-16-2013
20130124737COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus receives, from a first apparatus which has established a communication session, a signal indicating a state in which the communication session should be maintained. If the signal is not received from the first apparatus within a predetermined period of time while the communication session with the first apparatus is established, and a communication session establishment request is received from a second apparatus, the communication apparatus disconnects the communication session with the first apparatus.05-16-2013
20130124736APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING AUTO CONNECTION OF SENSOR NODE BASED ON SENSOR DATA - Provided is an apparatus and method for setting a sensor node to be automatically connected. An apparatus for setting a connection of a sensor node may include: a data receiver to receive, from the sensor node, sensor data that is measured by the sensor node; a node type determining unit to determine a type of the sensor node based on the received sensor data; and a sensor node setting unit to set the sensor node to be automatically connected based on the determined type of the sensor node.05-16-2013
20130132591Method for the Operating of a Field Device - A method for the operating of a field device of process automation technology, wherein data is exchanged via a connection between the field device and an operating device, for operating the field device, wherein the connection is established via a communication interface on the field device and a communication interface on the operating device, and wherein the communication interface of the operating device is a hardware communication interface, which is emulated by software, as an Ethernet interface.05-23-2013
20130132589Media delivery by preferred communication format - The present disclosure relates to communication formats and more particularly, to media delivery by preferred communication formats. In one illustrative embodiment, communications between an originator and receiver can be converted into a format preference based on the receiver's context. The context can refer to device type, application usage, time of day, location and user role. The originator can be free to choose their desired format of communication and the recipient can be equally free to choose the best suited format to receive the message. In outgoing communications, the receiver can use their own defined format and the communications can be converted into the originator's chosen format. Media format conversion can be performed unilaterally, for example, the first person can send an email which can be translated to speech for the second person who responds by voice which can be received as voice by the first person.05-23-2013
20130132590Managing Session Data of a Composite Service Session in a Communication Network - The present invention relates to a method for managing session data of a composite service session in a communication network, the composite service session originating from executing a composite service. The method comprises determining (05-23-2013
20130179581SIP Server Overload Control - There is provided a system, method and computer program product for managing network communications to a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) server. In the system, a packet limiter receives packets relating to SIP messages from a network and selectively forwards said packets for initial SIP processing. A work scheduler then accesses the result of the initial SIP processing and determines whether to proceed with further SIP processing based on a level of system activity. If a level of system activity is such that the system should proceed with further SIP processing, then further SIP processing may be scheduled. Initial SIP processing may involve one or more of parsing, request handling and response handling. Further SIP processing may involve one or more of initiating a new dialog, processing SIP messages relating to an existing dialog and processing messages that do not require a dialog.07-11-2013
20130145037UNICAST/MULTICAST MEDIA EDGE PROXY WITH FAST CHANNEL SWITCHING - A system, method, and media edge proxy, MEP, for providing media data such as Internet Protocol Television, IPTV, or Internet radio channels to a media client. The MEP obtains the media data from a media server utilizing a temporary unicast connection and provides the media data obtained from the server to the media client for an initial time period. Upon determining that the initial time period has expired, the MEP obtains the media data via multicast from a multicast router, provides the media data obtained from the router to the media client, and releases the temporary unicast connection. The invention reduces channel switching delay and thus improves quality-of-experience for the end-user. The invention also avoids excessive IGMP JOIN/LEAVE signaling when a user switches quickly through channels.06-06-2013
20100281169PRESENCE-AWARENESS FOR WIRELESS DEVICES - The invention relates to computer software product (11-04-2010
20110219124SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TWO WAY COMMUNICATION AND CONTROLLING CONTENT IN A WEB BROWSER - A system and method for connected devices over a network includes: receiving, by an address registration server, a communication from a host device and a communication from an endpoint device; determining whether the host device and the endpoint device are connected to a single local network and whether the host device and the endpoint device are each executing a compatible application; and facilitating a network connection between the endpoint device and the host device over the local network by providing a private network address of the endpoint device to the host device.09-08-2011
20110219121RESILIENT ROUTING FOR SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL BASED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Resilient routing management approaches are provided based on primary/backup and failover/failback relationships in a clustered network environment, where each user and/or resource is assigned to a primary cluster and at least one backup cluster. A distributed handover mechanism enables global knowledge of primary/backup relationships between clusters and their assigned users or resources.09-08-2011
20080209051Transport System for Instant Messaging - An exemplary method involves creating a master session over a first connection through a server; and creating a virtual channel over the connection, the virtual channel operable to communicate a feature session. The method may involve establishing a direct connection that bypasses the server, and switching communication of the feature session to the direct connection. A system for network communication includes a plurality of transport bridges, each transport bridge corresponding to an active network device configuration, and a switching module operable to choose one of the transport bridges to form a connection between two computing devices based on the active network device configuration.08-28-2008
20080209048Loading A Mirror Driver In Remote Terminal Server Session - Described are systems and methods for loading mirror drivers in remote sessions of a remote server that enables remote sessions at various computing or client devices to access the mirror drivers. The mirror drivers are video display drivers which receives video rendering output and/or graphics output from a graphics device interface. Such video rendering output and/or graphics output received may be a mirror image of the video rendering output and/or graphics output send to display drivers for displaying on monitor.08-28-2008
20080201480METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING PEER-TO-PEER CONNECTION, METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR TRAVERSING NAT TO REALIZE NETWORK COMMUNICATION - The employment relates to a realization method for establishing peer-to-peer communication connection, a method, an apparatus and a system for realizing network communication by traversing NAT. The employment mainly comprises following steps. When the user terminal may not directly communicate with the peer user terminal by the manner of peer-to-peer communication for needing to traverse through the NAT (network address translator) entity, the type information of the NAT entity needed to be traversed is determined. Then, the communication connection with the peer user terminal is established according to the determined type information of the NAT entity and by using the predefined manner of peer-to peer communication and the communications between the user terminals are carried out. The employment realizes that the manner of peer-to-peer communication is adopted as much as possible during the process of traversing the NAT to carry out the communication so as to reduce the occupation of server source and effectively save the costs of network operation. The employment also tries to use the corresponding re-issue mechanism during the procedure of establishing the peer-to-peer communication in order to resolve various connection establishment problems when the factors which may affect the connection establishment appear.08-21-2008
20080201478METHOD FOR DETECTING FAULT IN NEXT GENERATION NETWORK - A method for detecting fault in a next generation network includes: establishing a tool set and a corresponding command set for detecting whether the network is connective and detecting a range of network fault; creating dynamically in a PROXY an address mapping table storing a correspondence relationship between a user identifier userid and address information of a user terminal; and upon occurrence of a fault in the network, obtaining the address information of the user terminal from the address mapping table according to the userid of the user terminal probed currently, executing the set of command according to the address information, and probing connectivity of the network between the PROXY and the user terminal. The problem that the network address transform (NAT) device and the firewall cannot be traversed may be avoided, and the fault point or range may be detected accurately in the NGN where a fault occurs.08-21-2008
20080201477Client side replacement of DNS addresses - A DHCP response is intercepted and the DNS address in the DHCP response is placed with an address for a server device when the server device is present on a local network. When the server device is not present, the DNS address from the DHCP response is used. The server device may provide authentication, shared resources, or other services to devices within a local area network and may also serve as a gateway to other networks including the Internet.08-21-2008
20080222295Using internet content as a means to establish live social networks by linking internet users to each other who are simultaneously engaged in the same and/or similar content - A system and method that uses internet content and/or content metadata as a means to establish social networks. Examples include linking internet users, searchers, viewers and/or listeners of the same and/or similar internet content to each other via a platform that enables any of the following in n-dimensional environments: social networking, communications, sharing, e-commerce, advertising, search, hosting and registry services, push and pull applications, anonymous communications, and rich presence.09-11-2008
20110225304SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING AND MAINTAINING A VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL CONNECTION BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - A system and method for establishing and maintaining a voice over internet protocol connection between wireless devices, in one example embodiment, may comprise a receiving module to receive a communication device identifier, and a request to establish a communication data link to another communication device. The communication device identifier may initially be received by a terminal from the communication device over a wireless data link connecting the communication device and the terminal. Subsequently, the terminal network address may be associated with the terminal, which received the communication device identifier. A processing module may be utilized to determine whether another communication device is reachable over a wireless data link to another terminal based on information stored in a register. Further, a communication module may be utilized to establish the communication data link between one communication device and another communication device subsequent to determining that another communication device is reachable by a terminal over the wireless data link.09-15-2011
20100287284METHOD FOR SETTING UP APPLICATIONS BY INTERCEPTION ON AN EXISTING NETWORK - The invention concerns a method for extending applications in an existing network by intercepting communications between a client application (C) and a server application (S). It includes fixing a device (B) in a point of interception (I) of a communication line (L), which is known to support all the packet exchanges between the client (C) and the server (S) applications and enabling a connection termination point to be created on the new application (N) emulating the network identity of the application originally requested by the client application (C).11-11-2010
20110252146ESTABLISHING ONLINE COMMUNICATION SESSIONS BETWEEN CLIENT COMPUTING DEVICES - A method and apparatus for assisting in establishing an online communication session between client computing devices. An online communication session invite request message is received from an initiating client computing device, the message includes connection data of the initiating computing device and an online communication session endpoint identifier for an intended recipient. A set of one or more push tokens that are associated with the identifier is determined, where each of the push tokens identifies a client computing device. An online communication session invite message that includes the connection data of the initiating client computing device is transmitted to a set of intended recipient client computing devices that correspond with the set of push tokens. An invite accepted message is received from at least one of the set of intended recipient client computing devices that includes connection data of that computing device. An invite accepted message is transmitted to the initiating computing device that includes the connection data of each accepting computing device to allow the initiating computing device and each accepting computing device to establish a direct peer-to-peer online communication session.10-13-2011
20110252145Application Programming Interface, System, and Method for Collaborative Online Applications - An application framework including different application programming interfaces (APIs) is described which performs a variety of mobile device functions in response to API calls from applications. For example, in response to relatively simple API calls made by applications the application framework manages the complex tasks associated with invitations and matchmaking. By way of example, the details of complex transactions such as establishing peer-to-peer connections between mobile devices may be transparent to the application developer, thereby simplifying the application design process. The application framework may include an application daemon for communicating with a first set of services and an applications services module for communicating with a separate set of services. The application framework may also include a cache for caching data for each of the services based on different cache management policies driven by each of the services. The cache may be updated by push notification cache updates sent from each of the services.10-13-2011
20110238846METHOD AND MOBILE USER EQUIPMENT FOR HANDLING MEDIA TYPES OF A COMMUNICATION SESSION IN AN IMS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND AN IMS NIDE - A method of and mobile User Equipment, UE, (09-29-2011
20130151720NETWORK ENTITY AND METHOD FOR MANAGING SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL COMMUNICATIONS TOWARDS A USER ENTITY IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A network entity for managing Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) communications towards a user entity in a communication network. The network entity has a receiver and a processor. The receiver is configured to receive a first SIP message. The processor is configured to generate a second SIP message in response to receiving the first SIP message, the second SIP message having user-specific data relating to the user entity.06-13-2013
20130151719DETERMINING AN EFFICIENT KEEP-ALIVE INTERVAL FOR A NETWORK CONNECTION - Systems and methods for use in communication between a client and a server, via a networking device, are provided. The method may include sending a request to establish a data connection from the client to the server via the networking device, setting a data connection keep-alive interval for the data connection to a predetermined safe value, and sending a request to establish a test connection between the client and the server. The method may further include determining an efficient keep-alive interval for communication between the client and server via the networking device, using the test connection, setting the data connection keep-alive interval to the efficient keep-alive interval determined using the test connection, and uploading the efficient keep-alive interval from the client to the server in an efficient keep-alive interval notification message, for communication to other clients connected to the server.06-13-2013
20130151718OFFERING AND PROVISIONING SECURED WIRELESSVIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK SERVICES - An electronic device may present a user interface for making selections related to connecting to a network or selecting a network from a plurality of available networks. Additionally, a user interface may give a user an opportunity to secure to an open, unsecure, connection, for example, an ad-hoc wireless connection, such as may be found at a coffee shop. A selection of security offerings may be made from a user interface screen including pre-populated service providers. A user may be allowed to save preferences for connecting to new networks, as well as preferences related to previously used networks. Further, the user may save preferences for invoking security services on a per-network or pan-network basis. The security service may a known tunneling protocol (i.e. VPN), such as L2TP or PPTP.06-13-2013
20130151717SUSTAINING SESSION CONNECTIONS - In an embodiment, techniques for sustaining session connections are provided. The techniques send heartbeat messages when not sending a message may cause the session connection to close because of a timeout condition. Heartbeat messages are valid transport layer messages that will be ignored by protocols at higher levels of a data communications stack. As an example, the techniques may send a TCP message containing only a carriage return and line feed (“CRLF”) in its payload. Because the TCP layer considers a message containing only a CRLF to be a valid TCP message, intermediary computing devices such as proxy servers may not interpret heartbeat messages as “keep alive” messages, and may sustain session connections.06-13-2013
20130151716METHOD FOR SECURE USER PLANE (SUPL) VERSION NEGOTIATION - The subject matter disclosed herein relates to a system and method for negotiating a version of Secure User Plane Location (SUPL) between a network entity and a SUPL enabled terminal. In a particular implementation, a SUPL initiation message is transmitted from a network entity to a SUPL entity, where the SUPL initiation message identifies a plurality of SUPL versions capable of supporting a desired service. A response is received from the SUPL entity that is based, at least in part, on an ability of the SUPL entity to support at least one of the plurality of versions.06-13-2013
20130151715COMMUNICATION APPARATUS THAT PERFORMS COMMUNICATION USING T.38 PROTOCOL, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus which is capable of performing communications using the T.38 protocol by means of a SIP server that does not support the T.38 protocol. Audio is selected among a plurality of media types, and a first session establishment request for establishing a first session with a destination with which the communication apparatus is to communicate is transmitted to a SIP server. An address of the destination is obtained from a response transmitted from the SIP server in response to the first session establishment request. The first session established in response to the first session establishment request is disconnected. Image is selected among the plurality of media types, and a second session establishment request for communicating with the destination is transmitted to the destination using the obtained address. Image data is transmitted to the destination through the second session established in response to the second session establishment request.06-13-2013
20130151714METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADAPTIVE NETWORK HEARTBEAT MESSAGE FOR TCP CHANNEL - A method and apparatus for a client to continue to receive updates from a server when a channel has been disconnected before the expiration of a heartbeat timer is disclosed. The method includes sending a heartbeat message from the client to the server wherein the heartbeat message is sent at the expiration of a timer having a first time interval that is less than the first timeout duration period of the server. The method includes detecting that the channel is disconnected before the expiration of the first time interval and then determining a second timeout duration period from detecting the channel is disconnected. After determining the second time out duration, the method includes resetting the first time interval to a second time interval for the sending of the heartbeat message wherein the second time interval being less than the second timeout duration period.06-13-2013
20130151713Performing An Allreduce Operation On A Plurality Of Compute Nodes Of A Parallel Computer - Methods, apparatus, and products are disclosed for performing an allreduce operation on a plurality of compute nodes of a parallel computer, each node including at least two processing cores, that include: establishing, for each node, a plurality of logical rings, each ring including a different set of at least one core on that node, each ring including the cores on at least two of the nodes; iteratively for each node: assigning each core of that node to one of the rings established for that node to which the core has not previously been assigned, and performing, for each ring for that node, a global allreduce operation using contribution data for the cores assigned to that ring or any global allreduce results from previous global allreduce operations, yielding current global allreduce results for each core; and performing, for each node, a local allreduce operation using the global allreduce results.06-13-2013
20120259986SYSTEM AND METHOD TO PRESERVE DIALOGS IN CLUSTERED ENVIRONMENTS IN CASE OF NODE FAILURE - The present disclosure provides a system and method to preserve dialogs in clustered environments in case of node failure. In accordance with one embodiment, there is provided a method for performing a transaction call between an originating device and a terminating device, comprising: receiving, by a originating proxy server in a first cluster, a SIP message from the originating device over a first connection; and sending, by the originating proxy server, the SIP message to a routing proxy server in a second server cluster.10-11-2012
20120259984Ancillary data support in session initiation protocol (SIP) messaging - A SIP ancillary data server provides host to auxiliary data for an emergency SIP session (call) uniquely referred to in a transported SIP header. In a manner similar to how location is represented in an emergency call, a SIP header is extended. The extended SIP Header contains one of two possible types of content elements: either (a) a content pointer element to a SIP Message body part (a “cid:”, or content identifier); or (b) an (a.k.a, “info_URI” in this document).10-11-2012
20090083428SWITCHING BETWEEN CONENCTIVITY TYPES TO MAINTAIN CONNECTIVITY - Techniques are provided for leveraging narrowband connectivity (such as dial-up communications or other types of low bandwidth communications) to provision or configure broadband connectivity between a broadband access provider and a broadband device, such as a DSL modem or a cable modem. Specifically, because narrowband connectivity does not require advance configuration or provisioning by the host system of connectivity parameters for an access-seeking device, a modem at an access-seeking device may be leveraged to establish a narrowband connection between that device and a host system and to enable an exchange or negotiation of connectivity parameters necessary to enable future broadband connectivity. Thus, once established, the narrowband connection may be used as a conduit for communicating required provisioning information between the broadband-enabling host and the access-seeking device to enable broadband connectivity by the device in the future.03-26-2009
20100318665INTERCEPTION OF A CLOUD-BASED COMMUNICATION CONNECTION - Methods and apparatus are provided for intercepting a client-server communication connection in a computing environment. A first network intermediary configured to facilitate optimization of client-server transactions may be installed in a path of communications between the client and the server. A second network intermediary configured to cooperate with the first network intermediary is not in the path of communications between the client and the server. The first network intermediary intercepts a connection request from the client and forwards a modified request toward the server. A module within the server intercepts the connection request and redirects it to the second network intermediary. The client-server connection is thus split-terminated at the two network intermediaries, which establish cooperative sessions between themselves and with the client and with the server.12-16-2010
20100318663OPTIMIZING MOBILE DEVICE SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MULTIPLE DATA SOURCES - Embodiments are provided for synchronizing data retrieval with multiple data sources on a mobile computing device while maintaining a predetermined quality of service and optimizing resource usage. A connection is established between the mobile computing device and the multiple data sources for a first synchronization interval. A synchronization request is sent over the connection during the first interval. A response to the request including data is received from a data source during the first interval to synchronize the data. After the data is received, the connection to the data source is severed. The connection between the mobile computing device and the data source is then re-established for a second synchronization interval based on quality of service parameters associated with the data source and a pending connection status associated with one or more additional data sources. Another synchronization request is then sent by the mobile computing device over the re-established connection.12-16-2010
20120284415Electronic Device and Base Station for Maintaining a Network Connection - An electronic device and wireless base station for maintaining a persistent connection are provided. In an embodiment, a system includes an electronic device that connects to a web server via a physical link that is bandwidth-constrained. The physical link also includes a wireless base station and at least one network address translation (“NAT”) router that is configured to terminate idle connections between the client and the web-server. One of the electronic device and the wireless base station is configured to send keep-alive packets to the web-server in order to reduce the likelihood of the NAT router terminating the connection. The keep-alive packets are sent on a variable basis that is intended to reduce bandwidth consumption while ensuring that the NAT router does not deem the connection idle and terminate the connection.11-08-2012
20120284414Method, System and Network Nodes for Performing a SIP Transaction in a Session Initiation Protocol Based Communications Network - Method, system and network nodes for performing a SIP transaction, such as a SIP Invite transaction, in a Session Initiation Protocol based communications network from a first node to a third node via a second node. The second node acts as a proxy that receives a SIP message from the first node and, instead of forwarding the message to the third node, transmits a pivot request to the first node requesting the first node to forward the message directly to the third node. The first node forwards the message directly to the third node, and during the remainder of the SIP transaction further SIP messages are exchanged between the first and third node directly.11-08-2012
20120284413COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, SERVER DEVICE, COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION - A pairing server (11-08-2012
20120284412NETWORKING DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR THE CREATION OF PORTABLE PROXIMITY COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - The present disclosure relates to a networking device, a system and a method for the creation of a portable proximity communication network. A networking device comprises a communication interface and a networking component for establishing connections of the networking device, via the communication interface, with any one of a plurality of communication devices. The networking component is capable of establishing a connection with a peer networking device for creating a long range based communication network.11-08-2012
20130185440Ice Based Nat Traversal - An originating P-CSCF node receives a SIP INVITE request from first user equipment (UE) that originates a call to a second UE. If a relay candidate address for the first UE is not present in the SIP INVITE request, the SIP INVITE request is modified to include a first address provided by an originating IMS-AGW node as a relay candidate for the first UE and forwarded to the second UE. The originating P-CSDF node receives a SIP INVITE response message from the second UE in response to the SIP INVITE request. If a relay candidate address for the second UE is not present in the SIP INVITE response, the SIP invite response is modified to include a second address provided by an originating IMS-AGW node as a relay candidate for the second UE and forwarded t the first UE. The address information is used by both UEs in ICE operations.07-18-2013
20130185443METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR AGGREGATING PRESENCE INFORMATION TO PROVIDE A SIMPLIFIED UNIFIED PRESENCE - Methods and systems for providing simplified presence for a user are described. The user has a plurality of associated communication devices registered with a communications server, and each communication device enables at least one communication service class. The server has a user data entry associating the user with each of the plurality of communication devices. To hide the details of the user-associated devices from third parties, a virtual device is defined and associated with the user. Presence information received at the server from the various devices is aggregated together to create aggregated presence information that indicates at least the service classes available from the user-associated devices based on the received presence information. A virtual device presence document is generated containing the aggregated presence information and is provided to a presence server as presence information associated with the user.07-18-2013
20130185444SWITCHING BETWEEN CONNECTIVITY TYPES TO MAINTAIN CONNECTIVITY - Techniques are provided for leveraging narrowband connectivity (such as dial-up communications or other types of low bandwidth communications) to provision or configure broadband connectivity between a broadband access provider and a broadband device, such as a DSL modem or a cable modem. Specifically, because narrowband connectivity does not require advance configuration or provisioning by the host system of connectivity parameters for an access-seeking device, a modem at an access-seeking device may be leveraged to establish a narrowband connection between that device and a host system and to enable an exchange or negotiation of connectivity parameters necessary to enable future broadband connectivity. Thus, once established, the narrowband connection may be used as a conduit for communicating required provisioning information between the broadband-enabling host and the access-seeking device to enable broadband connectivity by the device in the future.07-18-2013
20130185441MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF MANAGING CONNECTIVITY STATUS FOR THE SAME - The present invention provides a method of managing connection status for a channel connecting a server device to a mobile radio communication device including a client/server pair (07-18-2013
20110283002Selectively Communicating Data Of A Peripheral Device To Plural Sending Computers - A network arrangemen includes a receiving computer connected over a network to plural sending computers. A first session is established between the receiving computer and a first of the plural sending computers, where the first session involves providing data of a peripheral device attached to the receiving computer to the first sending computer, and where the data of the peripheral device is provided to a first device driver of the peripheral device in the first sending computer. A second session is established between the receiving computer and a second of the plural sending computers, where the second session involves providing the data of the peripheral device attached to the receiving computer to the second sending computer, and where the data of the peripheral device is provided to a second device driver of the peripheral device in the second sending computer.11-17-2011
20110283001TETHERING METHOD AND MOBILE DEVICE ADAPTED THERETO - A mobile device and a method for providing a tethering service via a security mode and a list of preferred mobile devices are provided. The method includes determining, when the mobile device receives a connection request from a client mobile device, a number of client mobile devices that are currently connected to the mobile device, determining, when the number of connected client mobile devices is less than a preset maximum connection number, the number of created Basic Service Sets (BSSs), determining, when the number of BSSs is less than a preset maximum creation number, the identification-information regarding the client mobile device that requested connection, and providing a tethering service to the client mobile device according to the determined identification-information.11-17-2011
20110289219SIP ANCHOR POINTS TO POPULATE COMMON COMMUNICATION LOGS - The concept of a centralized communication log is provided. Anchor points, and specifically Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) anchor points, serve as a media and call control point that is established on a per-user basis which can then be leveraged by a communication log service. Such a communication log service is able to determine accurate and real-time communicant information for a communication session and populate a centralized communication log with the same. Such a communication log is, therefore, accurate with respect to multiple users in a system, highly available, and scaled horizontally.11-24-2011
20110296034ACCESS CHANGE FOR RE-ROUTING A CONNECTION - There is proposed a method and corresponding apparatuses allowing a change from a packet switched communication domain to a circuit switched communication domain. When a user equipment as a connection terminating point receives a connection initialization message with a media flow, such as audio, which cannot be delivered by the packet switched access, it sends a specific response rejecting the connection via the packet switched access to an application server for service centralization and continuity. In the application server, it is checked whether several conditions are met in order to determine whether the communication connection comprising the media flow is allowed to be changed to the circuit switched domain. If yes, the communication connection is changed from the packet switched communication domain to the circuit switched communication domain.12-01-2011
20110296031COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHOD - A communication system is arranged to provide a communication service to a communication terminal. The communication system comprises a packet data network arranged to communicate data packets supporting the communication service to and from the communication terminal via a data path through the packet data network, a path computational element arranged to control the data path, an application server arranged to control the communication service and an internet multimedia sub-system operable to control the application server. The application server is operable to provide the communication service to the communication terminal in response to a registration request transmitted from the communication terminal to the internet protocol multimedia sub-system requesting an establishment of the communication service. When establishing the communication service, the internet protocol multimedia sub-system is operable to communicate an adaptation message to the path computational element including information indicating service quality parameters associated with the communication service. The path computational element is operable to calculate the data path in accordance with the service quality parameters and to adapt the packet data network in accordance with the calculated data path.12-01-2011
20110314166End-to-End Address Transfer - According to a first aspect of the present invention there is provided a method of facilitating the end-to-end transfer of a URI between a plurality of SIP entities. The method comprising generating a SIP message and including the URI to be transferred in a Contact header of the message and including in the Contact header a parameter indicating to a back-to-back user agent that this URI is not to be changed or replaced.12-22-2011
20110314165HIGH AVAILABILITY BY LETTING APPLICATION SESSION PROCESSING OCCUR INDEPENDENT OF PROTOCOL SERVERS - Embodiments of the invention provide systems and methods for providing high availability in a session supporting multiple protocols. More specifically, embodiments of the present invention provide for high availability processing by decoupling an application session from protocol processing. That is, protocol processing can be performed at protocol nodes specific to each protocol session. The protocol nodes can then pass messages to and from a session node that performs session processing other than the protocol processing. The session of the first session node can be replicated on a second session node and, upon a failure of the first session node, control of the session can be passed to the second session node. The session can then be continued on the second session node according to a number of different models described herein.12-22-2011
20110314164INTELLIGENT NETWORK STORAGE PLANNING WITHIN A CLUSTERED COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - Embodiments of the present invention provide an integrated host and subsystem port selection methodology that uses performance measurements combined with information about active data paths. This technique also helps in resilient fabric planning by selecting ports from redundant fabrics. In a typical embodiment, host port to storage port pairs that create a path between a host and a storage device will be identified. From these pairs, a set of host port to storage port candidates for communicate data from the host to the storage device will be identified based on a set of resiliency constraints. Then, a specific host port to storage port pair will be selected from the set based on a lowest joint workload measurement. A path will then be created between the specific host port and storage port, and data will be communicated from the host to the storage device via the path.12-22-2011
20110314163WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK FOR SMART APPLIANCES - A communications module, and a consumer device comprising the communications model, is provided for use in a communication network with one or more consumer devices or “smart” appliances. The communications module includes a wireless transceiver for communication with the network, for example in accordance with the ZigBee protocol, and an interface for communicating with a host processor of the consumer device. The module receives scheduled event data over a wireless link on behalf of the host processor, and schedules events for execution by the host processor upon receipt of commands transmitted by the module. The communications module may include a virtual host module, which translates commands between a protocol used by the host processor and a protocol used by the communications module. The communications module is also configured to automatically seek and join a network, and to discover and bind to services provided over the network.12-22-2011
20110314162METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTION BY HNB - The method for establishing a connection by a HNB comprising steps of: the HNB transmitting an “attachment request” message to an operation and maintenance center (OMC); the OMC transmitting an “attachment response” message to the HNB; the HNB establishing a connection with an MME indicated by the “attachment response” message. With the method proposed in the present invention, a UE can switch between HNBs in the same CSG through interface X12-22-2011
20130191545INFORMATION SENDING METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention disclose an information sending method, device, and system, which are applied in the field of communications technologies. In the embodiments of the present invention, a control point sends a connection request to a target user equipment, where the connection request includes a guidance identifier, so as to request the target user equipment to receive detail information sent by the control point; after displaying the guidance identifier to a user and receiving a guidance identifier selected by the user, the user equipment sends a connection request acceptance message to the control point; and the control point may send detail information that corresponds to the guidance identifier to the target user equipment, where the guidance identifier is selected by the user and included in the connection request acceptance message, thereby implementing information guidance for the user by the control point.07-25-2013
20110320613METHOD OF ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN USERS AND PROFESSIONAL SERVICE PROVIDERS - The invention relates to a method of establishing communication between one or more users and one or more professional service providers. The professional service provides include, but are not limited to legal professionals, medical professionals, doctors, taxation professionals, accounting professionals, and financial professionals. Information corresponding to one or more professional service requirements of the user is obtained. The information includes basic information and confidential information. The basic information is transmitted to the one or more professional service providers based on the one or more professional service requirements of the user. Thereafter, communication is established between the user and the one or more professional service providers based on conflict of interest and an affirmative confirmation from the one or more professional service providers.12-29-2011
20120005354WIRELESS POINT THAT PROVIDES FUNCTIONS FOR A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK TO BE SEPARATED BETWEEN THE WIRELESS POINT AND ONE OR MORE CONTROL NODES, AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING SERVICE IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK HAVING FUNCTIONS SEPARATED BETWEEN A WIRELESS POINT AND ONE OR MORE CONTROL NODES - A method for negotiations between various entities of a wireless local area network (WLAN) including negotiations between controlling nodes (CNs) and wireless access points (WAPs) and negotiations between WAPs is disclosed. These negotiations are used for the purpose of establishing the capabilities of the various entities, determining how such capabilities may be optimally divided among the negotiating entities and then dividing the capabilities among the entities based on this determination. The capabilities include those required for the operation, control and management of the WLAN entities and the encompassing WLAN. The disclosed method introduces means for flexibly accommodating the varying degrees of differences in capabilities among the WLAN entities between the WLAN entities including dynamic changes in WLAN topologies.01-05-2012
20120030362TRANSMITTING PACKETS FROM DEVICE IN NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS WITH OTHER DEVICE UTILIZING MULTIPLE VIRTUAL NETWORK CONNECTIONS - A method includes detecting, at a device, a request for a network connection from an application running on the device; spawning first and second virtual machines for network connections that virtualize network capabilities of the device such that first and second virtual network connections are provided; using the first virtual network connection, establishing a first connection with another device over a first path; using the second virtual connection, establishing a second connection with the other device over a second path; determining that the second path represents a trusted path; determining that a first packet does not need to be routed via a trusted connection; transmitting the first packet using the first virtual network connection for communication via the first path; determining that a second packet needs to be routed via a trusted connection; and transmitting the second packet using the second virtual network connection for communication via the second path.02-02-2012
20120030361PROXIMITY SYNCHRONIZING AUDIO GATEWAY DEVICE - A digital audio gateway device for use in a wireless network of digital audio playback devices. The gateway device is wirelessly linked to one or more digital audio playback devices to provide a gateway to the Internet for the digital audio playback devices. In addition to functioning as a gateway, the device provides additional functionality and may act as a cache of digital audio data for the various digital audio players connected in the wireless network and may also act to automatically update digital audio content on the audio players, synchronize digital audio content and playlists between the digital audio players and continue automatically or upon user request a particular playlist as the user moves from one digital audio player to another.02-02-2012
20120030360APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZED NETWORKS - An apparatus and method for network routing is provided. Synchronized networks are disclosed which enable fast connection set up and release in a tiered hierarchy of circuit switched nodes. Nodes in the network aggregate and disaggregate data according to a transform algorithm allowing for dynamic frame and frame segment sizing. Connections within the network are organized by paired connections performing aggregation and disaggregation according to control vectors.02-02-2012
20130198395SOCKS TUNNELING FOR FIREWALL TRAVERSAL - The present invention provides a unique way of implementing the SOCKS protocol for establishing connections through a firewall. In general, instead of having a SOCKS server implemented entirely in the firewall, SOCKS servers are implemented on both a server and a client, which are configured to communicate with each other through the firewall. The SOCKS servers on the server and client allow multiple objects on both the server and the client to communicate with each other through a single port through the firewall, wherein the SOCKS servers on the server and the client cooperate with each other and their respective objects to allow the objects to establish the connections.08-01-2013
20130198396METHOD FOR EFFICIENT INITIALIZATION OF A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method for efficient initialization of a telecommunications network includes: establishing a physical communication channel between an access node of the telecommunications network and a configuration device; providing, by the telecommunications network, via an Internet Protocol Edge node, a public or private Internet Protocol address to the configuration device for use by the configuration device to communicate with the Internet Protocol Edge node of the telecommunications network; and assigning, by the telecommunications network, a configuration and installation functionality level to the public or private Internet Protocol address.08-01-2013
20130198392METHODS AND DEVICES TO DETERMINE A PREFERRED ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method and electronic devices to provide a preferred device mode on a first electronic device and a second electronic device are described. In one example aspect, the present disclosure describes a method for determining a preferred device on a first electronic device and a second electronic device. The first and second electronic devices may have established a connection between them. The method includes: receiving a request related to an application on the first electronic device; sending the request to the second electronic device; initiating processing the request on the first electronic device; determining which of the first electronic device and the second electronic device is a preferred device to process the request; if the first electronic device is the preferred device, completing processing of the request on the first electronic device; and if the second electronic device is the preferred device, processing the request on the second electronic device.08-01-2013
20130198394COMMUNICATING WITH A USER DEVICE - A methods and systems for communicating are disclosed. A request is received at a first device to communicate with a second device. Contact is initiated with the second device via a data center. A first form of communication is transmitted to the second device without requiring the transmitting to be routed through a central server. The first form of communication is received from the second device without requiring the receiving to be routed through a central server. A second form of communication is transmitted to the second device without requiring the transmitting to be routed through a central server.08-01-2013
20130198393SERVICE BUS SYSTEM, SERVICE BUS DEVICE, AND METHOD FOR ASSURING CONNECTION UNIQUENESS - A service bus system includes: a plurality of first devices each coupled with a client; a plurality of second devices each to perform a service; a first service bus device through which sequences of a session between the first and second devices are communicated, including: a prediction unit to predict one or more other service bus devices through which connection between the first and second devices in a second or later sequence of the session is established; and a transmission unit to transmit information indicating the connection in the first sequence of the session to the one or more other service bus devices predicted; and a second service bus device including: a storage unit to hold the information transmitted from the first service bus device; and a connection unit to establish the connection in the second or later sequence of the session by using the connection information held.08-01-2013
20130198391System And Method For Main Page Identification In Web Decoding - Web pages may be rendered from a main page data element and a plurality of embedded data elements, which are separately fetched by a browser. Herein is provided a web decoder which includes a learning engine adapted to receive human indications of data elements which are unimportant and accordingly to adjust the web decoder's procedures for determining which data elements are displayed to the user. The learning engine may receive human indications of important data elements and uses both types of indications in its further determinations. Optionally, rule generalizations are performed in a manner which searches for parameters which differentiate between important and unimportant data elements. The rule generalizations optionally concentrate on groups of data elements having at least a predetermined number of parameters having the same values for both important and unimportant data elements, reducing the chances that a generalization rule will find important data elements as unimportant.08-01-2013
20120036272Method and System for Handling Connection Setup in a Network - Certain embodiments of a method and system for handling connection setup in a network may comprise a network interface hardware device (NIHW) that may be operable to receive a services list and/or connection acceptance criteria from a first guest operating system running on a host system, receive a connection request from a second guest operating system running on the host system, and determine whether to allow establishment of the requested connection based on one or both of the services list and the connection acceptance criteria. The determination may be made prior to or during connection set up. The NIHW may maintain a connection state comprising information regarding set up of the requested connection. The services list may comprises one or more of a local network address, a local transport address, a network protocol, and a transport protocol. The communicated acceptance criteria may comprises packet filtering operations and/or security operations.02-09-2012
20120297075DEVICE INTERCONNECTION AND SERVICE DISCOVERY VIA A COMMUNICATION CLOUD - A system, method, and computer program product for allowing network enabled devices to interconnect via auto-discovery and manual discovery. The interconnections are made via a communication cloud, which is a resource on a server that acts as a transmission channel between authorized devices. The protocol includes a Communication Cloud Assignment that defines a process for designating a device to a cloud. Once a device is connected to a cloud, it uses a Service Discovery/Delivery Protocol to request and/or advertise its services to other devices on the cloud. Devices with appropriate criteria such as the same IP address, subnet, service protocol etc. will be placed on the same cloud; thus, those devices will automatically discover each other and their services. A device may be manually directed from its originating cloud to another cloud when a special code is entered.11-22-2012
20130205031Method, Computer Readable Medium And System For Scaling Medical Applications In A Public Cloud Data Center - A method for providing scaled applications in a cloud data center is disclosed. The method includes receiving a request from a user to use one of a plurality of applications maintained in a memory of a cloud data center. The method further includes assigning one of a plurality of instantiations of a service manager to the user and establishing, using the assigned instantiation of the service manager, a connection between the user and an instance of the requested application for a duration of a user session.08-08-2013
20130205032PAIRED COMMUNICATION BETWEEN AN IMPLANTED MEDICAL DEVICE AND AN EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE - A method of identifying an external device that sent a message and then determining whether to process the message based in part on the identity of the external device that sent the message. The implanted device receives a message from the external device and identifies an external device ID in the received message. The external device ID identifies the external device that sent the message. The implanted device then compares the external device ID from the message to a stored list of approved external device IDs. The implanted device processes the message when the external device ID matches one or the approved external device IDs in the stored list of approved external device IDs. However, the message is disregarded when the external device ID does not match any of the approved external device IDs in the stored list of approved external device IDs.08-08-2013
20120079118SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DURING A PRE-BOOT PHASE OF A COMPUTING DEVICE - A system, device, and method for facilitating wireless communications during a pre-boot phase of a computing device includes establishing a communications interface between a unified extensible firmware interface executed on the computing device and a wireless transceiver of the computing device during a pre-boot phase of the computing device. An OOB processor of the computing device processes data communications between the unified extensible firmware interface and the wireless communication circuit during the pre-boot phase by reformatting the data communications between wired and wireless communication standards.03-29-2012
20130097325PCRN SESSION ARCHITECTURE FOR ROAMING - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method performed by a node for creating a virtual IP-CAN session, the method including: receiving, at the network node, a S9 message; creating a S9 session; creating a virtual IP-CAN session associated with the S9 session; persisting the S9 session; and transmitting an answer S9 message.04-18-2013